JP7278012B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine capable of improving performance is provided. A gaming machine comprising a first control board and a second control board, wherein the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness. When the first harness changes from the connected state to the non-connected state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state and the first When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first control board may be reset. Characteristic playground. [Selection drawing] Fig. 195

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

Improvements in performance are desired for this type of game machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving performance.

The game machine according to the present invention comprises:
a first control board;
a second control board;
A game machine comprising
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first control board may be reset.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the performance.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. It is the figure which showed the notification example at the time of performing the 1st operation instruction notification in a certain game in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of alerting|reporting at the time of performing 2nd operation instruction alerting|reporting in a certain game in time series. (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the setting key is turned from off to on while the power is off. (b) It is the front view which showed the example which performed 1st information in the 1st state. (c) It is the front view which showed the example which performed 2nd alert|reporting in a 2nd state. (a) It is the figure which showed the example 1 of setting change operation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the example 2 of setting change operation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed the example 3 of setting change operation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the example 4 of setting change operation in time series. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 19 viewed obliquely from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the visual range of a person H1 in a standing posture, and (c) is a sitting posture. 2 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each substrate and each unit shown in FIG. 25; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between a reel motor drive IC 322i and a 24V power supply line; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170; FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are It is a figure which shows an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a flow of a main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 39; FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 41; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is the first sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is the second sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting to setting b by setting change and the state of related components; FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 45; (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to setting b; FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the checkout operation is performed immediately after the third stop while the third stop is being performed; FIG. 48A and 48B are diagrams schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage of FIG. 47; (a) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting is checked in the state where the setting is set to setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) is the state set to setting 1. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in power saving mode in . FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage of FIG. 49; (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b, and (b) is a table set in power saving mode in the state set in setting b It is the table|surface which summarized the state of the component concerned when confirmation is performed. FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage of FIG. 51; (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the hands that are the targets of the lottery of hands and the level of the winning probability in RT1. FIG. 10C is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of winning probability in RT2. It is a diagram showing an example of payout rates of RT1 and RT2. It is the table|surface which put together the state of the component related when the 1st sound is output by the closure of the front door 102 after setting change. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . When the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occurs during rotation of the reel, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after power recovery. It is the table|surface which summarized the state. It is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout after settlement of the inserted tokens before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the setting, the state of the related components when the power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settlement of the inserted medals, and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. This is a summary table. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. It is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. After confirming the setting once, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. be. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting is confirmed once, and the game is played once. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when a set value is displayed on a set value display 293 even when a setting key switch 281 is in an off state. After confirming the setting once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are accounted for. is a table summarizing the states of After confirming the setting once, the state of the related constituent elements when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after the tokens are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state and the game is played is summarized. It is a table. It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 and a lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. 71 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 109 similarly shown in FIG. 70; FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68. FIG. It is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700; (a) is a diagram showing details of hall control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. FIG. 10 is a table showing medal count control state commands; FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing (step S102) in FIG. 82; FIG. 84 is a flow chart of processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG. 83; FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 84; FIG. 90 is a flow chart of variation information transmission processing (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 84, 85 and 89; FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 86; FIG. 88 is a flow chart of priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) to the medal count control unit in FIGS. 83 and 87; FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interruption processing. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. 90; FIG. 91 is a flow chart of a medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90; It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process; FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality determination processing (step S302) in FIG. 94; FIG. 4 is a table showing a target range of RAM clear processing; FIG. 96 is a flowchart of error request setting processing (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of preparation processing (step S303) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 94; FIG. 99. It is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of count notification transmission processing (step S305) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flow chart of rental notification reception confirmation processing (step S306) in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a flowchart of lending reception result response transmission processing (step S308) in FIG. 94; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of a medal count control unit; FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of a lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 104; FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105. FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of an update process (step S405) to be counted in FIG. 104; FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 111; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in FIG. 111; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of start lever acceptance command reception processing (step S4521) in FIG. 111; FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of game information setting processing (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 114 and 116; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of payout command reception processing (step S4523) in FIG. 111; FIG. 117 is a flowchart of game medal number overflow confirmation processing (step S4A11) in FIG. 116; FIG. 112 is a flowchart of an error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of error monitoring processing (step S407) in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a medal number control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104; FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing a modification of the processing during medal insertion in FIG. 84; FIG. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87; FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 112; FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 107; FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 107; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first example in which a count button 171 is operated; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example in which a betting operation is performed before the counting button 171 is operated and the number of bets is not 0. FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect. 4 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. 134(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and FIG. 134(b) is a state in which 30 sheets are set as the number to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 134(c). 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off at , and then the power is restored. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing an example in which the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 126 is employed; (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs and the power is restored; It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long-press operation, has elapsed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140; 141 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140; (a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect image display device 157 displays the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in addition to the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145; 146 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed after exceeding the second payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of notification of approaching the upper limit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a notification prompting counting is superimposed on an error notification with high urgency; (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the count continues even after transition to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number; 10 is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. 153(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 153(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) is an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state). 7 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the number of game medals when the count button 171 is long-pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of acquisition medals in AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when overflow of a game medal|token occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a game medal number upper limit exceeded error and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a sound output permission period is provided in outputting a counting sound for a counting process; 165(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a). FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b). FIG. (a) A diagram showing an example of update conditions for a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means). (b) A diagram showing an example of a difference number counter (first counting means), a virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of counting by a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means) in chronological order; It is the graph which showed an example of transition of the difference number of sheets in a certain game period. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of various effects in a game period shown in FIG. 171; FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of various effects in a game period shown in FIG. 171; It is the graph which showed an example of transition of the difference number of sheets in a certain game period. 174 is a diagram showing an example of various effects in a game period shown in FIG. 173; FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of various effects in a game period shown in FIG. 173; FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of complete function prior notification. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of complete upper limit reach|attainment alerting|reporting. (c) It is a diagram showing an example of advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit. (d) It is a diagram showing an example of notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached. It is the graph which showed an example of transition of the difference number of sheets in a certain game period. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various effects and various notifications in a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various effects and various notifications in a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various effects and various notifications in a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a modification of various effects and various notifications in a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a modification of various effects and various notifications in a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect by a shutter 163; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of complete function advance notification; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of complete upper limit arrival notification. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing a flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 186; FIG. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the flow of complete function activation processing (step S119) in FIG. 186; FIG. It is a figure which shows the connection example of the board|substrate inside a game stand. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of operation when the harness connection is normal, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. . FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a harness HB1 connecting a main control board 300B and a relay board RB1 is disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operations when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bed button unit harness HA3 are each disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected and reconnected; 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the lateral direction; It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which expanded about the sub-board case 500a and the main-board case 300a. 4 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing air flow from cooling fan 950 with front door 102 open.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined amount of game value (medals, electronic medals, etc.) is inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receives a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Then, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. When the reels are accepted, the rotation is individually stopped, and if the condition determined by the pattern combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game value is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out game values if they do not match.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. Figure 1 shows
1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door (door) 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. And prepare.

In this example, by inserting a key owned by the manager of the amusement arcade into the door key hole 140, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detecting means, hereinafter also referred to as an "open/close sensor", not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass through the space.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including the open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The front door 102 is closed, and the front door 102
When the light blocking piece moves to a position where it blocks the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor sends a signal (for example, a low level signal) indicating the closed detection state to the main control unit 300. output to.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is in the open state. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, and may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, and the like. Moreover, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door is opened and closed. good, on the contrary
Even if the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state by performing a predetermined operation even if the front door 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the open/close sensor of the main body 101,
By inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length and fixing it with tape or the like to block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor can be detected even when the front door 102 is open. The state can be forcibly set to a closed detection state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as "door pseudo-closed").

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor in the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 2, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the drawing) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the drawing). The pattern to be displayed is the left reel middle pattern, the left reel 1
10 (the position of 3 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, the middle reel 111
The symbol displayed on the upper stage (position 4 shown in the figure) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 lower stage. (
The symbol displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the upper row symbol of the middle reel, and the upper row symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure) is displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure) is called the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) is called the right reel bottom symbol. 3 symbols are displayed vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110-112
functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. Note that the slot machine 10
In the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112 inside 0, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. It is configured so that a light shielding piece of a certain length provided in the opening passes through. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. Valid winning line (hereinafter simply "
(sometimes referred to as "effective line") is predetermined by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, none of the winning lines are activated. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines. Incidentally, the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as an active line area S1.
Areas other than the effective line area S1 of the symbol display window 113 (numbers 1, 3, 4, 6,
7 and 9) may be referred to as a non-effective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically,
It is a lamp that informs the player that the special combination 1 or special combination 2) has been internally elected, or that the special combination internal winning state or special game state to be described later is in effect. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for production and is also called production button 190 . The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141.
Input is a meaning including both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 displays various internal information (for example,
This is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state as a numerical value. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110-
112 will start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 13
8 and a right stop button 139 (stop operation means) 137 to
139 are provided. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137,
The middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138 , and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139 . Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is connected to a speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below inside the slot machine 100.
) is a hole for outputting sound to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and the slot machine 100 is provided above the production device 160.
A sound hole 143 is provided for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) provided in the upper part to the outside. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ).

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key (first operation means) that can be switched on and off by a rotating operation is provided. This setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm settings of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later. Also, the main body 101
is provided with a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as "reset SW") that can be operated to change settings (set value change operation) by pressing. The reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error canceling switch that enables an operation for canceling various errors (error canceling operation) to be described later.

These setting keys and reset switch are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door) is in the open state, and cannot be operated when the front door 102 (door) is in the closed state. Difficult or impossible. In other words, it is an operating means that can be operated only by the administrator (staff, etc.) of the game parlor, and is an operating means that cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (FIG. 14) capable of displaying setting values is provided.
) are provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Although the details will be described later, when an operation to change the setting is performed, the setting value display device 1
At 01a, the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed, and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Also, on the inner wall of the main body 101, an external common terminal board (not shown) is attached which is connected to the main control board constituting the main control section 300 and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board has an external cable connection section for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 3) provided in a hall computer (not shown) or the like, and an external centralized terminal board LED (not shown) is provided. An external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole opened on the rear surface of the main body 101 and connected to the external cable connecting portion of the external centralized terminal plate.

In addition, a medal dispensing device (not shown; a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the inner wall of the main body 101, and an auxiliary medal storage box (not illustrated) is provided on the right side of the medal dispensing device.
is provided, behind which an overflow terminal is provided (not shown).

A power supply box (not shown) having a power board is arranged on the left side of the token payout device, and a power switch (not shown) is arranged in front of the power supply box. The power supply box converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later, and each device. . Furthermore, even after the power supply from the outside is cut off, predetermined parts (for example, the RAM of the main control unit 300
308, etc.) for supplying power for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days).

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
The main control unit 300 is provided with a basic circuit 302 for controlling the entirety of the main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 contains a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, reel pattern arrangement, stop positions, and the like. ROM 306, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.
The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 stores the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 in the counter timer 3 .
12, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 operates from 0 to 65 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a.
The CPU 304 is provided with a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value within the range of 535, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. , When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (BET button 130 sensor, BET button 132 sensor,
A medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, and medals paid out from the medal payout device 180. medal payout sensor, optical sensor of reels 110 to 112 (index sensor 80
), etc.) are monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 31 that received this signal
6 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores a random number used for lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect Checkout button 13
4 sensors are provided on the checkout button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once,
Settle electronically stored medals. The medal payout sensor is the medal payout device 180
is a sensor for detecting the medals to be paid out. Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110-112
112, and becomes L level each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. CPU
When the L level signal is detected, 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 3 of the main control unit 300 .
08.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor
, Various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information display 126 , and a drive circuit 328 for driving the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output, and the external centralized terminal board LED is lit when the game information is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-controller 400 , it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-controller 400 to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. First sub-controller 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. RAM 408 and I/O 4 for controlling input/output of various devices
10, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling lighting patterns of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. Sound source IC418
controls audio output from amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . Sound source IC 418 stores S-ROM (sound R
OM) are connected, and audio data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404
The state of the shutter sensor 428 is monitored for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the effect device 1 including display control of the effect image display device 157 .
60 various controls. It should be noted that the second sub-control unit 500, for example, the effect image display device 157
It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as a control unit that controls the display of , and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Also, the second sub-controller 500 includes a VDP 516 (video display processor)
, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

Each reel 110 to 112 has a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure.
are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment).
Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 2 on the middle reel 111 has a "seven 1 pattern", and the numbered frame 2 on the right reel 112
"Seven 1B pattern" is placed on each frame.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the reel 1 corresponding to the corresponding reel 1 is opened within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in the present embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed.
It is configured to stop 10-112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination 1, a replay combination, and minor combinations 1-8. note that,
The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 and replay roles are "operating roles"
is sometimes called. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of the replay role is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 3-seven 1-replay" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "RB1" or "RB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The replaying combination is a winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. i.e.
The game can be executed again with the same number of bets as the last inserted number. The corresponding symbol combination is
Replay-Replay-Replay”.

The replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a replay is won, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 8 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small combination 1, "replay-cherry-replay" for small combination 2, and "cherry-cherry-cherry" for small combination 3. 4 is "Bell B-Bell-Bell", small combination 5 is "Bell B-Bell (or Bell B)-Bell", small combination 6 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", Small role 7 is "Seven 2-Seven 2
- Seven 2", and the small role 8 is "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "weak cherry", the small role 3 is "strong cherry", the small role 4 is "common bell", and the small role 5 is "push order bell". , Small roles 6 to 8 may be referred to as "one-piece role".

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described.
FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 6 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of a replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous R
is T.

There are a special winning combination 1, a replay winning combination, and small winning combinations 1 to 8 in RT0. note that,
If the player does not win the role, the player loses, and the symbol combination corresponding to the role is not displayed.
It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 6 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state, which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. again,
This RT has a higher probability of winning a replay role than RT0 and is more advantageous than RT0.

In RT1, the internal winning combination includes replay combinations and small winning combinations 1-8.

FIG. 6 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 has a higher probability of winning a common bell (minor combination 4) than other RTs, and is an advantageous RT that facilitates the acquisition of medals.

The internal winning combination in RT2 is only the common bell (small combination 4). RT2 is shown in FIG.
, when a predetermined number of games (six times in this example) are played, or when a predetermined number of times (five times in this example) are won, the process moves to RT0.

The conditions for ending RT2 are not particularly limited. For example, the game may end when a predetermined number of coins or more are paid out, or when a predetermined winning combination is won.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is divided into non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals for management. Among these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internal winning combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation navigation" or "operation instruction notification")
is allowed, and this operation navigation is not displayed in non-advantageous sections. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In this embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state (including super AT state). Figure 7
shows that four states of normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state are transited. In this embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for non-advantageous sections, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for advantageous sections. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous section.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Also, not limited to the above configuration,
In RT2, it may be configured so as to internally win the pressing order bell, and the operation navigation may be displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are satisfied. Further, when the transition condition is established, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions to be established when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance state>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted when a specific combination (in this example, one-card combination (minor combination 6 to 8)) is internally won. Then, when the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has passed, the state is shifted to the normal state B, and the number of AT sets is 0.
Otherwise, it shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won, there is a case where a notification (operation instruction notification) including a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped is executed (details will be described later). Note that the operation instruction notification is not limited to a notification including a suggestion of a symbol that is intended to be stopped, and for example, a notification including a pressing order (for example, "middle → right → left", "press middle", etc.). may be

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the pressing order bell (small winning combination 5) is internally won, an operation navigation indicating the corresponding correct pressing order is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments light up in a mode corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer (hereinafter referred to as
Sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. and,
When the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (for example, 50) again, and if the AT set number is 0, lottery for chance state. to run. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). In addition, A
When the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the T state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of internal lottery in this embodiment).

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 receives a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 is provided to output The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or bet buttons 130 and 132 have been operated), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. again,
It is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the prescribed number (three) of medals has been used. , to start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, if the replay role (replay) is internally elected, the replay role (
preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating internal winning to the first sub-control unit 400 in the replay), and if the result of the winning combination internal lottery is a loss (non-winning of a role), a loss is indicated. Preparations are made to transmit the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. and A
Information that can specify the result of the T-addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the stop button 137-1 is used for the internal winning command including the internal winning of the push order bell (small winning combination 5).
Operation instruction information representing the correct operation order of the 39 operation orders (press order) is also included.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. All reels 110-11
2 stops, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small combination 1 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 7 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, C
It performs processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of the PU 304 to the stack area.

In step S203, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial set value (32 in this embodiment).
. 8 ms) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing),
The WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, interrupt status (various sensors 31
acquire various interrupt statuses based on the signal from 8) is executed.
For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, subtracting the game interval timer,
Such processing is executed to update various timers according to respective time units.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 is strobe information (if ON,
data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command,
Input command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, first through reception of operation of stop buttons 137-139 Three press command, reel 110
112 stop command, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ing.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the RAM
The game information stored in 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 and stored in the RAM 308.
A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least 8 used areas is derived, and the RAM 308
, and sets a power supply flag to ON to indicate that power-off processing has been performed.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG.
a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S305
to process.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the performance data is expanded and stored in the RAM
A process of setting device data in an effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, a process of setting effect data in an effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and further, based on the received command and information included in the command. Then, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the effect image display device 15
If there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to 7, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control section 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 40 as an unprocessed command.
8 is stored in the command storage area.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 10A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG.
a) is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; FIG. 11(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S405
to process.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 controls the first sub-controller 40
It is determined whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of No. 0.

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409.
For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is treated as an unprocessed command.
It is stored in the command storage area provided in the AM 508 .

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 11A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(d), step S4 in the main processing of the second sub-control section 500
11 image control processing will be described. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 stores the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506) in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table,
After setting VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518 ), etc., an instruction to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 is set. VDP 516 is
Image data is transferred from the ROM 506 to the VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
Transfer to AM518. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in step S421, the CPU 504
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518, information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) of V
Instruct DP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504
516 is instructed to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S43
If not, go to 1 and wait for the end of production interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
Next, a gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. In addition, for terms that overlap with other embodiments, the terms of this embodiment are given priority,
12 and 13 are given priority over descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS.

<Notification means>
Next, before describing various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. The display means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display device 127, the accumulated number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., which have been described with reference to FIG. These display means are, in this example, a liquid crystal display device, an LED
, segment display, etc.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. Light-emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, the side lamp 144, the title panel (lamp) 162, and the effect button 190 described with reference to FIG.
, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, upper lamp 142 (see FIG. 14), reel backlight (not shown) of each reel 110 to 112, etc.
In this example, all of these light emitting means are LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Notification of stop instruction>
Next, the stop instruction notification will be described. Here, the stop instruction notification is a notification (for example, operation navigation) including a suggestion of a symbol aimed at stopping, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment aims at stopping There are cases where the first operation instruction notification including the suggestion of the first symbol to be and the second operation instruction notification including the suggestion of the second symbol aiming to stop are executed.

<Notification of first stop instruction>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. The state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135, and the first operation instruction is given in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with the winning of the AT lottery in the chance state. Notification ID1 is being executed.

The first operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol to be stopped. In this example, as the first operation instruction notification ID1, a Seven 1 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID 1a (in this example, includes an image of Seven 1 symbol and a character string "Aim!") display) and a push order notification I suggesting the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139
D1b (in this example, a display suggesting that the stopping operation should be performed in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137) is executed.

In addition, the first operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be a notification including a notification including a suggestion of the first symbol aimed at stopping. For example, the stop buttons 137 to 139
It may be a notification that does not include the pressing order notification ID 1b suggesting the pressing order of , or a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Aim for blue 7". Alternatively (or instead), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of voice saying "Aim for blue 7") may be applied.

Also, the conditions for executing the first operation instruction notification are not limited to this example. For example, 100 points may be accumulated.

<First stop instruction notification→first stop mode→execution of first notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the first stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "seven 1
-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination), the first notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification)
, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1, aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and performs the stop operation in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137, reels 110 to 112 stopped at the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination (first stop mode) ("Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination (first stop mode) on winning line L1) are complete), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 1 pattern, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), it shifts to AT state and starts AT game.

In addition, in this example, the first stop mode is applied to all the reels with the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations including the first symbol whose goal is to be stopped may be used.

In addition, the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations Blue 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead hand),
Notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "Congratulations Blue 7") and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) are applied. good too.

Further, the execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<First stop instruction notification → second stop mode → non-execution of first notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the second stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "seven 3
-Seven 3-Seven 3'' symbol combination), at least the first notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification)
, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but aims at the Seven 3 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137.
, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the pattern combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop mode) ("Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" on the winning line L1). " symbol combination (second stop mode) is complete), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 1 symbol and the " Get it!" and a display that includes an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), the reel is in the first stop mode (in this example, " Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination), at least while executing the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12 (b-1)) in the game , when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification in the game is not executed, information can be given without misleading the player, the player is not misunderstood, and the decline in the player's desire to play can be prevented.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol (this In our example, Seven 3
Since the symbols are stopped, the symbols suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

In addition, in this example, the second stop mode is applied to all the reels with the second symbol (in this example, Seven 3
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol targeted to be stopped may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<First stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of first notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the fourth stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reel is in a fourth stop mode (first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode (so-called breakout)), the first notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification)
, the player followed the first operation instruction notification ID1, aimed at the Seven 1 symbol, and performed the stop operation in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (or , the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the first operation instruction notification ID1), and the reels 110 to 112 are "bell-seven 1
-Replay" symbol combination (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is complete on the winning line L1), so FIG. -
The first notification RD1 shown in 1) (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 1 pattern, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. Stopping in a fourth stopping mode (in this example, a stopping mode other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose stitches)), at least Since the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

In addition, in this example, the fourth stop mode is a specific pattern (in this example, Seven 1
pattern, Seven 2 pattern, or Seven 3 pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a mode in which other specific patterns are not aligned. good too.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<First stop instruction notification→third stop mode→execution of third notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the third stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the third stop mode (in this example, "seven 2
-Seven 2-Seven 2" symbol combination), the third notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification)
is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but aims at the Seven 2 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137.
, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop mode) ("Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" on the winning line L1). ” symbol combination (third stop mode) is complete), the third notification RD3 (third notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 2 symbol, the character string “Get!”, and the effect display, including images).

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"). In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), it shifts to AT state and starts AT game.

According to this example, in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. In the example, the third stop mode (in this example, "Seven 2-Seven 2-
Seven 2" symbol combination), the third notification (in this example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12 (b-3)) is executed at least in the game, so the first notification is executed It is possible to make the player think that the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, which enhances the interest of the player.

In addition, in this example, the third stop mode is applied to all the reels with the third symbol (in this example, Seven 2
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol targeted to be stopped may be used.

Further, the third notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Red 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead hand),
Notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "Congratulations on Red 7") and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (for example, blinking yellow) are applied. good too.

Further, the execution timing of the third notification may be only the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode. In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Temporary stop of the first stop mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), reel 1
In the next game after 10 to 112 are stopped in the second stop mode, the reel effect is being executed. In the next game after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stop mode, reel effects are executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, after the reels have stopped in the second stop mode (or after the reels have stopped in the fourth stop mode), the reel effect is the first stop mode (in this example, " It is configured to stop at a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1").

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. Reels 110-112
However, not the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), but the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop mode) Since the game has stopped, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed. Stop (temporary stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination) as the reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1, AT game have started.

According to this example, after stopping the reels in the second stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in the second stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, so that the player can be surprised. can.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c-1), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a game, , reel 110 ~
112 stops at the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) instead of the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") 12(b-1), the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed. Stop (temporary stop) in the first stop mode (in this example, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination) as a reel effect, and after executing the first notification RD1, AT game is started are doing.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode after being stopped in the fourth stop mode, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, so that the player can be surprised. can.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when the second operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started with the pressing operation of the start lever 135, and the second operation is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 with the winning of the super AT lottery in the chance state. Instruction notification ID2 is being executed.

The second operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of a second symbol to be stopped. In this example, as the second operation instruction notification ID2, seven 3 symbols ( Target symbol notification ID 2a (in this example, includes an image of Seven 3 symbols and a character string "Aim!") display) and a push order notification I suggesting the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139
D2b (in this example, a display suggesting that the stopping operation should be performed in the order of middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137) is executed.

In addition, the second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be a notification including a notification including a suggestion of a second symbol aimed at stopping, for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139
It may be a notification that does not include the pressing order notification ID 2b suggesting the pressing order of , or a notification that consists only of a character string such as "Aim for gold 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means. Alternatively (or instead), notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of voice saying "Aim for Gold 7") may be applied.

Also, the execution condition of the second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example. For example, 100 points may be accumulated.

<Second stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the second stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "seven 3
-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination), the second notification is executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification)
, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2, aims at the seven 3 symbols, and performs the stop operation in the order of the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137, reels 110- 112 stopped at the "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination (second stop mode) ("Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination (second stop mode) on winning line L1 are complete), the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 3 symbols, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed when the super AT lottery is won, the reels 110 to 112 are in the second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"). In the next game after stopping at symbol combination), as shown in FIG. 13(d), AT
The super AT state is shifted to a super AT state more advantageous to the player than the state, and a super AT game is started.

As described above, in the next game after stopping in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), the state shifts to the AT state, whereas the second (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), in the next game, the game will shift to a super AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the AT state. Rather than the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") ) is more valuable as a symbol combination.

In addition, the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2")
In the next game after stopping at , the state shifts to the AT state, so the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") and the third stop mode ( In this example,
The symbol combination of "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2") has the same value as a symbol combination.

In addition, in this example, the second stop mode is applied to all the reels with the second symbol (in this example, Seven 3
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations including a second symbol whose goal is to be stopped may be used.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification composed only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Friday 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means (or instead hand),
Notification by sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 (for example, output of sound "Congratulations on Gold 7") and notification by light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) are applied. good too.

Further, the execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, or the In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Second stop instruction notification → first stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-1), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the first stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "seven 1
-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination), at least the second notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification)
, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, but aims at the Seven 1 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137.
, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) ("Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" on the winning line L1). " symbol combination (first stop mode) is completed), the second notification RD2 (second notification) shown in FIG. Get it!" and a display that includes an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, the reel is in the second stop mode (in this example, " Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination), at least in the game second notification (in this example, second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 12 (b-4)) While executing , when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in the game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, at least the second notification is performed in the game is not executed, information can be given without misleading the player, the player is not misunderstood, and the decline in the player's desire to play can be prevented.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol (this In our example, Seven 3
Since the symbols are stopped, the symbols suggested by the second operation instruction information can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

In addition, in this example, the first stop mode is applied to all the reels with the first symbol (in this example, Seven 1
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol targeted to be stopped may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Second stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of second notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the fourth stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the fourth stop mode (in this example, the first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode (so-called breakout)), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification)
, the player followed the second operation instruction notification ID2, aimed at the Seven 3 symbol, and performed the stop operation in the order of the middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (or , the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the second operation instruction notification ID2), and the reels 110 to 112 are "bell-seven 1
- Replay" symbol combination (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is complete on the winning line L1), so FIG. -
The second notification RD2 shown in 4) (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of Seven 3 symbols, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. Stopping in a fourth stopping mode (in this example, a stopping mode other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose stitches)), at least Since the second notification (the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) in this example) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

In addition, in this example, the fourth stop mode is a specific pattern (in this example, Seven 1
pattern, Seven 2 pattern, or Seven 3 pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a mode in which other specific patterns are not aligned. good too.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Second stop instruction notification → third stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), reel 1
10 to 112 are states stopped in the third stop mode.

The notifying means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is such that the reels are in the third stop mode (in this example, "seven 2
-Seven 2-Seven 2" symbol combination), at least the second notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification)
is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, aiming at the Seven 2 symbol, and presses the middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137.
, and the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop mode) ("Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" on the winning line L1). " symbol combination (third stop mode) is completed), the second notification RD2 (second notification) shown in FIG. Get it!" and a display that includes an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in the game for executing the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. When stopped in the third stop mode (in this example, the pattern combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), at least in the game, the second notification (in this example, FIG. 13 ( b-4
Since the second notification RD2) shown in ) is not executed, the notification can be made so as not to mislead the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented. can do.

In addition, in this example, the third stop mode is applied to all the reels with the third symbol (in this example, Seven 2
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol targeted to be stopped may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may be non-executed.

<Temporary stop of the second stop mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 13(c), the reel 110 is
112 is stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode (one of the first, third, and fourth stop modes in this example), and reel effects are being executed in the next game. is.

After the reel stops in a stop mode other than the second stop mode, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment uses the second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" as a reel effect). combination).

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), after executing the second operation instruction notification ID2 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. If it stops at the pattern combination of "seven 1 - seven 1 - seven 1" (first stop mode) instead of the pattern combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3" in this example, Figure 13 (b-4
) is not executed, but as shown in FIG. As a second stop mode (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" pattern combination) to stop (temporary stop), and after executing the second notification RD2, start the super AT game .

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode after being stopped in the stop mode other than the second stop mode, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, even when the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in the next and subsequent games of the certain game, which surprises the player. can give

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1)
includes reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 3, speakers 272 and 277 and various lamps), wherein the notification means is a first operation instruction notification (for example, first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a) ), the first operation instruction notification is notification including a suggestion of a first symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) that is targeted to be stopped, and the notification means is , when the reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification is made in the game (For example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is executed, and the notification means is configured so that the reel is in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. (For example, a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") is a means for not executing the first notification at least in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the game that executes the first operation instruction notification, at least the first notification is executed in the game, while the first When the reels are stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification is not executed in the game, so that the notification can be given so as not to mislead the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of the player's willingness to play without misunderstanding.

Further, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which all the reels have the second symbol ( for example,
Seven 3 symbols) may be stopped.

With such a configuration, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be misunderstood.

Further, the informing means, when the reels are stopped in a third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2") in a game in which the first operation instruction informing is executed, at least the It is a means for executing the third notification (for example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12 (b-3)) in the game, and the third stop mode is a third symbol on all reels (for example, Seven 2 symbols) may be stopped.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the reels are stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Further, the notifying means may be configured such that the reel is in a fourth stop mode (for example, a stop other than the first stop mode, the second stop mode, and the third stop mode) in the game for executing the first operation instruction notification. mode (so-called loose eyes)) is a means not to execute the first notification at least in the game, and the fourth stop mode is a specific pattern on all reels (for example,
Seven 1 pattern, Seven 2 pattern, or Seven 3 pattern) may be stopped without aligning.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player so as not to mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding, and prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

Further, after the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reel performance may be stopped in the first stop mode.

With such a configuration, after the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels can be stopped in the first stop mode, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the notification means is a means that may execute a second operation instruction notification (for example, a second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), and the second operation instruction notification includes: The notification includes a suggestion of the second symbol aimed to be stopped, and the notification means causes the reel to stop in the second stop mode (for example, "
symbol combination of Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), at least in the game the second notification (for example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13 (b-4)) is a means for executing, The informing means, when the reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction informing is executed, at least the game It may be means for not executing the second notification in.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player so as not to mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding, and prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

In addition, the first operation instruction notification and the second operation instruction notification are not limited to the notification including the suggestion of the pattern that is targeted to be stopped. "Right→Left", "Center!!", "Press center", etc.) may be included.

In addition, the third stop mode or the fourth stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, Seven 1 symbol) and the second symbol (for example, Seven 3 symbol) are not stopped on all the reels. may be

Further, all, a plurality of, or one of the first stop mode, the second stop mode, the third stop mode, and the fourth stop mode may be specified by specific letters, numerals, Alternatively, it may be configured including a figure (eg, number 7).

With such a configuration, since the stop modes are similar, it may be possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, a lottery means capable of internal lottery is provided, and in a game in which the first combination (for example, one-piece combination (small combination 6)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, in FIG. 12(a) When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed according to the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown (or only when), the reel is in the first stop mode (for example, "Seven 1-Seven 1- Seven 1
” symbol combination) may be configured so that it can be stopped.

In addition, in the game in which the second winning combination (for example, one-piece winning combination (small winning combination 8)) is won, according to the second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) When (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, the pattern combination of "seven 3 - seven 3 - seven 3"). can be configured to

Also, in the game in which the third winning combination (for example, one-piece winning combination (small winning combination 7)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed without complying (or only when), the reel is in the third stop mode (for example, the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") It may be configured so that it can be stopped at

<<Embodiment D>>
Next, a gaming table (slot machine) according to Embodiment D will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. In addition, for terms that overlap with other embodiments, the terms of this embodiment are given priority,
14 to 16 have priority over descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS.

<Notification means>
Next, before describing various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the setting key is changed from off to on while the power is off.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 has display means capable of displaying as one of notification means. Display means included in the slot machine 100 include, for example, a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 shown in FIG. , the stored number display device 125, the game information display device 126, etc., and these display means are composed of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display device, and the like in this example.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of notification means. Sound output means included in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 14(a).

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of notification means. For example, the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 is shown in FIG.
In addition to the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the title panel (lamp) 162 shown in a), the effect button 190, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the start lever 135, and the reel backs of the reels 110 to 112 described with reference to FIG. A light (not shown) or the like can be cited, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include frame lamps, effect buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, before describing various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be described.

The amusement machine according to the present embodiment opens the front door 102 (door body), and the power is turned on in a state in which a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned on before the specified time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key)) It is possible to shift to a changeable (setting change) state (setting change mode).

Here, the setting change refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) on the setting value display device 101a, the operation means ( Each time a pressing operation of the setting switch) is detected once, the currently set set values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, the set value returns to 1 repeatedly. It is possible to change the setting value with .

Further, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is released (in this example, the ON When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn off from is performed), the state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

It should be noted that the operation means (start lever 13
When the operation of 5) is executed or the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the setting value goes around once (for example, setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → ... → setting 5) and the operation means ( When the start lever 135) is operated, the setting is the same as the previous setting.

In the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, after the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on, a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed by a setting key provided inside the main body 101. When it is detected, it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which confirmation of setting values (setting confirmation) is possible.

Here, the setting confirmation refers to confirming the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, the operating means (
By pressing the setting switch), the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by setting change (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. By doing so, it is possible to check the set value.

Also, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is pulled out after an operation to turn it off from on) and the front door 102 is closed,
The state in which the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) ends, and the normal game state in which the normal game can be played is entered. Note that "cancelling a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to turn a setting key off from on" and then "to remove a setting key", but may be "an operation to turn a setting key off". good too.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a setting change mode in which only setting changes are possible, a setting confirmation mode in which only setting confirmation is possible, and a setting change and setting confirmation mode are included.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG.

<Various Notifications/First State, First Notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment issues the first notification in the first state in which the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the first state is that the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the door (front door 1 in this example).
02) is detected to be open.

FIG.14(b) is the front view which showed the example which performed 1st alert|reporting in a 1st state.

In this example, the power is turned on after a certain operation (turning on from off) is performed using the setting key, and the state changes to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode). (In this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is open, and the open/close sensor detects the front door 102 The open state is detected), and the first notification is performed in the first state.

The notification mode of the first notification is not particularly limited. Execute the first display notification IF1a, and from the speakers 272 and 277, "The setting is being changed."
By outputting the voice, the first voice notification IF 1b is executed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit, white light is emitted, and the title panel (lamp)
By lighting 162 in white, the first light emission notification IF1c is executed.

In addition, since the setting value display device 101a has shifted to a state in which the setting can be changed,
A numerical value (1 in this example) indicating the current setting value (setting 1 in this example) is displayed.

In addition, the notification mode of the first notification is not limited to this example, and one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emitting means (lamp), The notification may be made by a plurality of or all of them, and in addition (or in place of) the notification by the movable body may be performed.

In addition, the first notification is not limited to a notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, for example, a display suggesting that an operation related to the setting change is possible (e.g., "You can change the setting or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is valid").

<Various Notifications/Second State, Second Notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment issues the second notification in the second state in which the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch and the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the second state is that the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the door (front door 1 in this example).
02) is detected.

FIG.14(c) is the front view which showed the example which performed 2nd alerting|reporting in a 2nd state.

In this example, after a certain operation (turning on from off) by the setting key is performed, the power is turned on from off, and after shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (setting change mode), the front door 102 is closed, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. , the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the second notification is executed in the second state.

The notification mode of the second notification is not particularly limited, but in the second notification IF2 of this example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the message "Please change the settings while the door is open with the door key" is displayed. By performing a display including a character string, the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and from the speakers 272 and 277, a voice saying "Please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is output. The second audio notification IF 2b is executed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all turned on to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 16
2 is lit in white, the second light emission notification IF2c is executed.

In addition, since the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2 after transitioning to a state in which the setting change is possible, the setting value display device 101a displays the current setting value (in this example, setting 2). (In this example, 2) is displayed.

According to this example, the notification means is in the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor has detected that the front door 102 state), the first notification is executed, and the second state (
In this example, when the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, the second notification different from the first notification is performed. Based on this, the store clerk of the game parlor can grasp the state of the game machine at the time of setting change, and can appropriately execute the setting change.

In the first state, the detection means (open/close sensor in this example) detects the door (front door 10 in this example).
2) is a state in which the open state is detected, and the second state is a state in which the detection means detects the closed state of the door. In order to change the notification depending on the open/closed state of the door, the amusement store clerk changes the setting. can be properly executed. In addition, in order to change the notification depending on the opening and closing state of the door during the operation of the amusement arcade,
A store clerk may notice a fraudulent act of a fraudulent person.

The second state is not limited to the state in which the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, but the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the front door 102. may be in a state in which the closed state of is detected.

According to this example, in the second state (in this example, the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the door (front door 102 in this example) is closed, and the door is open, and even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudulent person during the operation of the game store, the second notification is made, so the store clerk notices the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person. Sometimes.

In addition, the notification mode of the second notification is not limited to this example, and one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emitting means (lamp), The notification may be made by a plurality of or all of them, and in addition (or in place of) the notification by the movable body may be performed.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to a notification that calls attention to a setting change. For example, a display indicating that an operation related to a setting change is impossible It may be a display including a character string, or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification prompting an operation that enables setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). may be a display including a character string such as

<Setting change operation>
Next, a specific example of the setting change operation will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

Here, to explain the terms in the figure, the "power switch" is the "power switch" described using FIG. 2, and the "door state" is the state of the door (front door 102) (closed or open). , and the “door sensor” is the “open/close sensor (detection means)” described with reference to FIG.

Further, the "setting key" is the "setting key" described with reference to FIG. 1, and the "setting value display means" is the "setting value display device 101a" described with reference to FIGS. The external collective terminal board LED is the "external collective terminal board LED" described with reference to FIG.

Further, the "liquid crystal display device" refers to the "liquid crystal display device 157 (display means)" described with reference to FIG.
, and the title panel lamp is the title panel lamp 16 described with reference to FIG.
2 (light emitting means), and the upper and side lamps are the upper lamps 14 described with reference to FIG.
2 (light emitting means) and the side lamp 144 (light emitting means), and the speakers are the speakers 272 and 277 (sound output means) described with reference to FIGS.

<Example 1 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing example 1 of the setting change operation in chronological order.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / power off, door closed>
In the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1), the power switch is OFF (power OFF) and the front door 1
02 is in the closed state and the setting key is in the OFF state.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external common terminal board LED, the liquid crystal display device, the title panel lamp, and the upper and side lamps are all displayed. The light goes out and the speaker stops emitting sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/power OFF, door closed → door open, setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) is the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1), in which the power supply is turned off, the door is closed, and the setting key is turned off. OF
This is a state in which F is turned ON.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the setting key is turned from OFF to ON.
N, the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is open, and the setting key is ON. The value display means is not displayed, the external common terminal board LED, the liquid crystal display device, the title panel lamp, and the upper and side lamps are all extinguished, and the speaker stops emitting sound.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / power OFF → power ON, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(3) is a state in which the power switch is turned from OFF to ON in the state shown in FIG.

In the same state, the power switch changes from ON to OFF, and since the power switch has changed from power OFF to power ON, the door sensor detects the opening of the door and changes to ON, and the set value display means
A numerical value indicating the current set value (in this example, 1 indicating setting 1) is displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED
lights up to indicate that a control signal (in this example, information indicating that the setting is being changed) is being output from the external centralized terminal board.

In addition, operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, start lever 1
35) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). Execute the first notification in the state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. The title panel (lamp) 162 emits white light.
is lit in white, the first light emission notification IF1c is executed.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(4) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the door is being opened, the setting key is ON, and the first notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(3). .

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF. The LED continues to light.

In addition, operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, start lever 1
35) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) to the second state (in this example, , the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying a character string "please open the door", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output "please open the door with the door key when changing settings".
By outputting the voice, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit, white light is emitted, and the title panel (lamp)
By lighting 162 in white, the second light emission notification IF2c is executed.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door closed, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened while the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(4). .

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) to the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. The title panel (lamp) 162 emits white light.
is lit in white, the first light emission notification IF1c is executed.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / Setting change operation during door opening and first notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6) are states in which the setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. .

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed (setting change operation), so the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / door open, setting key ON, lever operation during first notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(7) are states in which the start lever 135 is pressed down after the setting change operation shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(6).

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the operation of confirming the set value by the start lever 135) is performed, so the first notification is continued. While confirming the setting value to setting 2, in the setting value display means,
A numerical value (0 in this example) is displayed to indicate that the set value has been determined.

<Example 1 of setting change operation / Door open, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned off from ON after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(7).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation with the setting key has been canceled), operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135, etc.) ) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and the normal game state in which normal games can be performed is entered. Along with the shift, the first notification is ended, and the setting change end notification and demonstration effect are started.

Specifically, by outputting a voice saying "The setting has been changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the end of the setting change mode is notified, and a demonstration animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demo pattern corresponding to the demonstration effect, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

<Example of setting change operation 1/door open, setting key OFF → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(9) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON in the setting key OFF state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8).

In the same state, since the setting key has changed from OFF to ON while the power is ON (a certain operation was performed using the setting key), operations related to setting confirmation (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135) (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and in the first state Execute setting confirmation notification.

Specifically, by displaying a character string “confirming settings” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 , the setting confirmation notification display is performed to suggest that the setting confirmation is possible, and the speaker 272 , 277 outputs a sound "setting is being checked" to execute a setting confirmation voice notification suggesting that the setting can be confirmed, and all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 are turned on to turn on the blue light. While emitting light, the title panel (lamp) 16
2 is illuminated in blue, setting confirmation light emitting notification is executed to suggest that setting confirmation is possible.

<Example 2 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15B is a diagram showing example 2 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that (1) in FIG.
) to (b)(3), (b)(8), and (b)(9) in FIG.
Since the state is the same as that of (a)(3), (a)(8), and (a)(9) of FIG.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door open, setting key ON, setting change operation during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) is a state in which a setting change operation has been performed in the state shown in FIG.

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed (setting change operation), so the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) with the door open and the setting key ON.

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF. The LED continues to light.

In addition, operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, start lever 1
35) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) to the second state (in this example, , the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying a character string "please open the door", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output "please open the door with the door key when changing settings".
By outputting the voice, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit, white light is emitted, and the title panel (lamp)
By lighting 162 in white, the second light emission notification IF2c is executed.

<Example 2 of setting change operation / door closed, setting key ON, lever operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(6) is the state shown in FIG.
This is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed during the second notification.

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and opened/closed) is acceptable for operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135). In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the operation of confirming the set value by the start lever 135) is performed, so the second notification is continued. While confirming the setting value to setting 2, in the setting value display means,
A numerical value (0 in this example) is displayed to indicate that the set value has been determined.

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is operated to confirm the set value). is executed, the operation is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135) is executed, the operation is accepted.

According to this example, since the operation by the first operation means is accepted in either the first state or the second state, convenience for the amusement arcade clerk can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed in the first state (in this example, the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first notification (In this example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) is executed, and the second notification (this example Then, the second notification I shown in FIG. 14(c)
F2) is executed.

According to this example, since the same notification is executed before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed, the game clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the setting.

<Example of setting change operation 2/door closed, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(7) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(b)(6).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) to the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. The title panel (lamp) 162 emits white light.
is lit in white, the first light emission notification IF1c is executed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing example 3 of the setting change operation in chronological order. It should be noted that (a) (3
), (a) (10) to (a) (11) in FIG. 15 (b) (3), (b) (8
) to (b) and (9) of FIG.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door open, door sensor ON → door sensor OFF, second notification>
16(a)(4) is a state in which the door sensor is forcibly turned off while the front door 102 remains open in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(3) with the door open and the setting key ON. is.

In the same state, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the door sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like. By shielding the light from the light emitting part of the door sensor, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the door sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (door pseudo-closed). Although the sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, the set value display means continues to display, and the external common terminal board LE
D continues lighting.

In addition, operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, start lever 1
35) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) to the second state (in this example, , the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similarly to the second notification IF2 described with reference to FIG. By displaying a character string "please open the door", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output "please open the door with the door key when changing settings".
By outputting the voice, the second voice notification IF 2b is executed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit, white light is emitted, and the title panel (lamp)
By lighting 162 in white, the second light emission notification IF2c is executed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, setting change operation during second notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(5) are states in which a setting change operation is performed during the door pseudo-closed second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(4).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) is operated (setting change operation), so the second notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the setting value after the change (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation / fake door closed, lever operation during second notification>
The states shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(6) are states in which the start lever 135 is pressed down after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(5).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the state where the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is operated (operation to confirm the setting change), so the second notification , the setting value is confirmed as setting 2, and a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the setting value is confirmed is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closed, setting key OFF during second notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and (7) is a state in which the setting key is turned off from ON after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(a) and (6).

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed after the operation of the start lever 135) (the operation of confirming the setting change) is executed, The setting change mode is maintained while the operation of the second operation means is not accepted and the second notification is continued (the setting change mode cannot be ended).

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is operated to confirm the set value). is executed, the second operation means is operated (in this example, the setting key is turned from ON to OFF
operation) is executed, the operation of the second operation means is accepted, while the first (in this example, an operation to confirm the set value by the start lever 135) is executed, the second operation means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed. Then, the operation of the second operation means cannot be accepted.

According to this example, since the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state, the store clerk understands that the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped by whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

Even if the second operation means is operated (operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) during execution of the second notification, the notification means continues to execute the second notification. good. According to this example, even if the unauthorized person operates the setting key during the operation of the amusement arcade, the second notification is made.

Further, the notification means may continue the execution of the second notification even if the second operation means is operated (even if the setting key is removed) during the execution of the second notification. According to this example, even if the setting key is pulled out by the fraudulent person during the operation of the game parlor, the second notification is made, so that the staff of the amusement parlor may notice the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door false closing, setting key OFF during second notification → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) where the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is executed after the operation of the start lever 135) (operation of confirming the setting change) is executed, The setting change mode is maintained while the operation of the second operation means is not accepted and the second notification is continued.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door pseudo closed, second notification in progress → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(9) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened during the door quasi-closed second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(8).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and a second state (this In the example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the front Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected), the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similarly to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the sound "The setting is being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first audio notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are all lit. The title panel (lamp) 162 emits white light.
is lit in white, the first light emission notification IF1c is executed.

<Example 4 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing example 4 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that (1) in FIG.
) to (b)(7) of FIG. 15 are the same as those of FIGS.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurrence>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(0) is a state in which an error (first error) has occurred.

In this state, since an error occurs when the power is ON, the door is open, and the setting key is OFF, an error notification indicating that an error has occurred is executed.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error display suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, a display including a character string "first error has occurred") is performed, and the speaker is displayed. 272 and 277 output an error sound suggesting that the first error has occurred (in this example, the sound "first error has occurred"), and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 1
44 is lit (blinks in red in this example) in an error notification mode suggesting that a first error has occurred, and an error code is displayed on the payout number indicator 127 to execute error notification. there is

Here, as an error (first error) that can occur in the slot machine 100,
Medal insertion abnormalities 1 to 4, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormalities, RAM defects, prize winning abnormalities, and the like are listed.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals stay, and the corresponding error code is E1, for example. The medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is greater than or equal to a specified number, and the corresponding error code is E2, for example. Medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing, and the corresponding error code is E3, for example. Medal insertion error 4 occurs when inserted medals do not pass normally through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. Medal insertion abnormality 3 and medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when there is no payout of medals for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E4, for example. Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and the corresponding error code is E5, for example. Any of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is received after removing the cause of the error.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is E7, for example. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is E8, for example. The RAM defect is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. Winning abnormalities are reels 110 to 112
After the stop of , it occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins, and the corresponding error code is E9, for example. The prize-winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, and can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine (first error) include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame Examples include open error, RAM clear error, impact sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/error occurrence, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(b)(7).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation with the setting key has been canceled), operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135, etc.) ) can be accepted (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), and the normal game state in which normal games can be performed is entered. Along with the transition, the first notification is terminated, and the error notification interrupted in the setting change mode is resumed.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error display suggesting that a first error has occurred (in this example, a display including a character string "first error has occurred") is performed, and the speaker is displayed. 272 and 277 output an error sound suggesting that the first error has occurred (in this example, the sound "first error has occurred"), and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 1
44 is lit (blinks in red in this example) in an error notification mode suggesting that a first error has occurred, and an error code is displayed on the payout number indicator 127 to execute error notification. there is

<Example 4 of setting change operation/error occurrence, setting key OFF → error resolution>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(9) corresponds to the occurrence of an error shown in FIG.
In the state of F, the error is resolved and the reset SW is turned ON.

In this state, the error has been resolved and the reset switch has changed from OFF to ON. state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) is terminated, and the normal game state is shifted to the normal game state, and an error notification is issued. It is finished, and the setting change end notification and demonstration production are started.

Specifically, by outputting a voice saying "The setting has been changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the end of the setting change mode is notified, and a demonstration animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demonstration pattern, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1)
is a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 2 shown in FIG.
77, various lamps), and the notification means is in a first state (for example, , the state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). and the notification means is in a second state in which an operation related to setting change can be accepted (for example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and an open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or In the state where the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification (for example, the second notification IF shown in FIG. 14(c)
2), wherein the second notification is different from the first notification.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the staff of the amusement parlor can grasp the state of the amusement machine when the setting is changed based on the notification mode by the notification means, and can appropriately execute the setting change. can.

Further, a first operation means (for example, a start lever 135) is provided, and when the operation of the first operation means (for example, a set value confirmation operation by the start lever 135) is executed in the first state, The operation may be accepted when the operation is accepted and the operation of the first operating means is executed in the second state.

With such a configuration, the operation by the first operating means can be accepted in either the first state or the second state, so that the convenience for the amusement arcade clerk can be enhanced.

Further, a second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, a set value confirmation operation by the start lever 135) is executed in the first state, the second operation means is operated. When an operation of the second operating means (for example, an operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means is performed in the second state. When the operation of the second operation means is performed after the operation has been performed, the operation of the second operation means may not be accepted.

With such a configuration, since the operation of the second operating means cannot be accepted in the second state, the amusement arcade clerk is informed that the operation of the second operating means cannot be accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped by whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

Further, the notifying means operates the first operating means in the first state (for example,
means for executing the first notification before and after execution of the set value confirmation operation by the start lever 135, and the notification means operates the first operation means in the first state. may be means for executing the second notification before and after is executed.

With such a configuration, since the same notification is executed before and after the operation of the first operation means is executed, the game clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the setting.

Further, a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) for detecting an open/closed state of the door (for example, the front door 102) is provided, and the first state is a state in which the detection means detects the open state of the door, The second state may be a state in which the detection means detects the closed state of the door.

With such a configuration, since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, the store clerk can appropriately change the settings. In addition, since the notification is made different depending on whether the door is open or closed during the operation of the amusement arcade, the clerk of the amusement arcade may notice the fraudulent act of the fraudulent person.

Further, the door may be closed in the second state, and the door may be opened in the second state.

With such a configuration, even if the door is closed by a fraudulent person during the operation of the amusement arcade, the second notification is made. There is

In addition, the first notification is not limited to a notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, for example, a display suggesting that an operation related to the setting change is possible (e.g., "You can change the setting or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is valid").

Further, the first notification is, in addition to (or instead of) notification suggesting that the setting is being changed, notification suggesting that the open/close sensor is detecting the open state of the door (for example, ,
Display including a character string such as "Door is being opened", voice output such as "Door is being opened", flashing of various lamps, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to a notification that calls attention to a setting change. For example, a display indicating that an operation related to a setting change is impossible It may be a display including a character string, or a display including a character string such as "The operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification prompting an operation that enables setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). may be a display including a character string such as

Further, the second notification is, in addition to (or instead of) notification for calling attention to the setting change, notification suggesting that the open/close sensor is detecting the closed state of the door (for example,
Display including character strings such as "Door is closing" and "Door is being pseudo-closed", output audio such as "Door is being closed" and "Door is being pseudo-closed", blink various lamps, etc.) You may

Further, the first operation means is not limited to the start lever 135 and the setting switch, and may be other operation means such as a production button, and the second operation means is not limited to the setting key. , reset switch, or other operating means.

In addition, some errors (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout error 1
~ 3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc.)
The notification means is in a first state (for example, the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to setting change (for example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted.
In the state where the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first notification (for example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14B) is executed without executing the error notification. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, and the convenience for the store clerk at the amusement arcade can be enhanced.

In addition, some errors (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout error 1
~ 3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc.)
The notification means is in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (for example, the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed). Alternatively, in a state where the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification (for example, the second notification IF shown in FIG. 14(c)
2) may be executed.

With such a configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, and the convenience for the store clerk at the amusement arcade can be enhanced.

Further, in the state where the certain error occurs, the first state (for example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), or the first state Two states (for example, the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 10
2, or the state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and then the first state or the second state. In the state where the state has ended, if the certain error continues, the notification means notifies the occurrence of the error instead of the first notification or the second notification. Suggestive error notification (e.g., error display suggesting that an error has occurred, error sound output suggesting that a certain error has occurred, lamp in an error reporting manner suggesting that a certain error has occurred ) may be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably handle an error after executing a setting change operation.

<<other embodiments>>
17 to 32, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 17 to 32 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 17 to 32 in principle. Figure 32
In the explanation using , priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. , the condition determined by the combination of symbols based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped is the predetermined payout condition,
This game machine advances a series of games in which game media are paid out if they match and the game ends without paying out game media if they do not match. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113 approximately three times when viewed from the player, for a total of nine symbols.
One pattern is visible.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

18, the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure)
The symbol displayed on the left reel is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed on the middle stage of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is displayed on the bottom stage (position 7 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the middle reel symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is assumed. The right reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) is the right reel. Each of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. and,
By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 20) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel is determined, and the reel 11 is moved so that the desired symbol is displayed on the effective line.
Stop 0 to 112.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, the line means the display window 1
13, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110-112. A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 18 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, of the lines shown in FIG. 18, the upper line L4 is used as the valid line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a 3-coin betting machine, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines are activated, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 is activated. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically,
It is a lamp that informs the player that the player has internally won a special combination) or that he or she is in a special game state, which will be described later. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 displays various internal information (for example,
This is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game) as a numerical value. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 11
0 to 112 will start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 13
8 and a right stop button 139 are provided. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". In addition, each stop button 1
Light emitters may be provided inside the 37 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. slot machine 1
00 includes an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 19(a)) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened.
is provided. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 is provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141.
, and a second chance button 166 are provided. A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. Left button 167 and right button 168
may move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in this case, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The rendering device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a rendering image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. and the right shutter 163a
When the left shutter 163b is opened in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player side). Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, by providing decorations (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen,
As a result of part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the decoration, the display screen can be made to look oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

19A and 19B are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG.
02 is opened, the front view of the slot machine 100, and FIG.

The main body 101 includes an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, and a lower plate 26.
4 and a back plate 242, and is a box that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board 300B is installed inside the main control board 300B at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242.
(see FIG. 9) is arranged, and a reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210 . On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board storage case 220 containing the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 25) is arranged. be. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement arcade) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. In addition, the slot machine 1 is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) on the side plate 260 on the right side.
00 information to an external device is attached.

Also, on the right side of the reel unit 700, there is a setting key switch 28 for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value.
1 is provided. Here, the set value refers to the ratio of the total number of game media put out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. This value is a so-called “payout rate”, and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from “1” to “6”.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, the setting key switch 28
When a predetermined setting key is inserted into 1 and turned right, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when turned left, the setting key switch sensor detects the OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, the reel unit 70
0, a power supply device 252 having a power control board 252B (see FIG. 25) is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. As shown in FIG. The power switch 244 is
It is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply 252 . With this power switch 244, the slot machine 100 can be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there is a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals.
66 etc. are provided. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.
is configured to be

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the design display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 19(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . An operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This set value indicator 29
3 can display the game modes (setting values) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 by numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), setting value confirmation processing for confirming the setting value is started, and the setting key switch 281 and turn left (
When the setting key is turned from ON to OFF), the set value confirmation process is terminated.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (set value change processing is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (set value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired game mode can be selected. can. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key is also referred to as the setting value change mode. The period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting value confirmation operation is also called a setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the conditions for starting and ending the set value change mode and the set value confirmation mode will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the condition for starting the set value change mode is (1) that the power is turned on when the setting key switch 281 is ON, and (2) that the front door 102 is open. , is not a condition. In addition, conditions for terminating the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the condition for starting the setting value confirmation mode is set to the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state.
is turned ON, and the other condition (2) that the front door 102 is in an open state is not set as a condition. In addition, the conditions for ending the setting value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the setting value change mode (setting value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state. requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) while the front door 102 is closed, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) is not started based on the illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudulent person cannot terminate the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing). Therefore, it becomes easy to arrest the fraudster on the spot.

In addition, in the set value change mode, the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144
L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, speakers 272 and 277
Using a production device such as the above, a notification indicating that the setting value is being changed (hereinafter also referred to as a setting value change notification) is performed, and in the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value is being confirmed using the production device (hereinafter, also referred to as setting value confirmation in-progress notification).

Next, the structure of reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the structure of the reel unit 700. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 7 made of a box-shaped metal plate.
02 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C and a right reel unit 700R. A main control board 300B (FIG. 2) is mounted on the reel case 702.
5) and the connector 70 for connecting via the harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 25)
30, 7031, 7032 are provided. The left reel 1 is installed in the left reel unit 700L.
10 are arranged, the middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and the right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 11
0 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m and 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m-112m is a stepping motor. The left reel unit 700L will be described below as an example, but the middle reel unit 700L
The same applies to C and the right reel unit 700R. The left reel unit 700L includes a motor 110m and an index sensor 7 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110.
30 and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reel 110 are attached to the attachment base 732 .

The replacement work can be performed for each of the reel units 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, when the left reel unit 700L fails, the left reel unit 700L
can be replaced with a new reel unit.

FIG. 21(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG.
) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . Reflector 742
Three openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side are formed in a row in the vertical direction. Further, the illumination base 744 has LEDs at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.
745 are arranged two by two.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (the positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) has 16 contacts and is a circular rotating portion 190 that is rotatable.
and a pointing portion 190b that protrudes outward from the rotating portion 190a. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be capable of outputting the information of the numerical value indicated by the indicator 190b as a detection signal to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG.
When b points to "B", the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011).
Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control unit 400, the instruction unit 19
The number pointed to by 0b is treated as the selected setting.

Incidentally, instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 22(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 22(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 19 formed in the rotating portion 191a.
1b and. Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. Figure 2
2(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", 16
Now that the value of base F has been selected, the information on that value is sent to a binary 4-bit detection signal (
0b1111). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (FIG. 2), which will be described later,
4), by inputting this detection signal, the notch 19 of the rotary switch 191
The configuration is such that it is possible to detect a selected numerical value seen from 1b (in this example, any of the numerical values from hexadecimal 0 to F).

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 22(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and
and a slide portion 192b that has contact points and is slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. Figure 2
As shown in 2(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into the binary number 4. It can be output as a bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 described later
(See FIG. 24) is capable of detecting the selected numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is positioned by inputting this detection signal. It is configured.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 22(a) to 22(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. again,
Since the number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the setting value, and the convenience is high.

FIG. 22D is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as the confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operation means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player.
setting value) can be selected, and by pressing the second chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the set value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected set value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to operate the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 1.
68 has been operated can be detected.

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. Figure 17
The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 2 is configured so that the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be configured to be backed up.

FIG. 22(f) shows the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG.
It is the figure which compared the magnitude|size of . Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hits, etc.
The other chance button may be used as a hidden button. Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. In FIG.

In slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
is the value of the volume of sounds (eg, BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) output from the . As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Also, the first selection switch 1 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194
As for 90, it is also possible to select whether to set the slot machine 100 to the power saving mode or to the non-power saving mode (normal mode). Slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
Then, the power saving mode is set only when the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved.
Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. again,
You can also choose to mute the sound in non-power saving mode.

FIG. 23(A) shows that the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). First volume selection icon SI shown in FIG. 23(A)
1 indicates that the selection value of the seven levels of sound volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute" are displayed. In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 2 are turned on.
The sound output from 72 is completely inaudible.

FIG. 23(B) shows that the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23B, characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-level volume level is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 23(C) shows that the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(C), characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 23(D) shows that the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23D displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). It should be noted that, in place of the exhibition volume, the second selection switch 194 cannot be selected, and the first selection switch 1
A special volume selection that can only be selected at 90 may be enabled. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 23(a) shows that the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is the same as that of the first volume selection icon SI1.
different from the background color of In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 23(b) shows the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 as shown in FIG. 22(a).
] is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when set to .

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG.
Characters of "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the volume level in steps is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the indicator 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a),
It is chosen to set the slot machine 100 to a non-power saving mode. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG.
The volume output with the selection value selected in b) is the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23C and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. the same volume.

FIG. 23A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. Third volume selection icon SI
3 displays 5 levels of sound volume level selection values and 5 levels of vertical level display (indicator display). In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a), characters of "volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five-step volume level is 1 are displayed. Also, 5
In the stepped level display, only the lowest stepped level is illuminated in a fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 23(a) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 23(a).

In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a), characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 is the left button 167
and disappears when the right button 168 is not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and each setting value in seven stages is
18 in 1st tier, 36 in 2nd tier, 54 in 3rd tier, 73 in 4th tier, 91 in 5th tier, 1 in 6th tier
09, the 7th stage becomes 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only game store clerks
It is not possible to select the first set value (18) of the seven steps and the seventh set value (127). Note that the 1st stage of 7 stages (18) is the 1st stage of 5 stages, and the 5th stage of 7 stages (91) is 5 stages.
It may be the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage (54) of the 7 stages may be the 1st stage of the 5th stage, and the 7th stage (127) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth step. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, 1
Regardless of whether the selected value is /7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is operated by the store clerk, and the second selection switch 19
4 is designed on the assumption that it will be operated by the player, and can give priority to the player's intentions. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the selection value is not inherited, and the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI1
An initial value (for example, 4/7) of the volume selection icon SI2 may be set.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
A basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300 is provided, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304 and a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, pattern arrangement of reels, and the like. and RAM 3 for temporarily storing data
08, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 operates from 0 to 65 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a.
The CPU 304 is provided with a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value within the range of 535, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. , When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (BET button 130 sensor, BET button 131 sensor,
Bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 1
38 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, index sensor for left reel 110, index sensor for middle reel 111, index sensor for right reel 112, etc.). monitoring the status.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 31 that received this signal
6 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores a random number used for lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

BET button 130 sensor, BET button 131 sensor, and BET button 132
A sensor is located on each of the corresponding bet buttons 130-132, and the RAM
308 detects an insertion operation when inserting medals electronically stored as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time.
Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 for driving, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor 180m (see FIG. 25) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (active line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game token insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121
, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300
Via this information output circuit 334, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330
When the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 .

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-controller 400, the first sub-controller 4
00 cannot transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 .

Each component of the main control unit 300 described above is a main control unit board 300B (see FIG. 25)
installed in the

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. First sub-controller 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. RAM 408 and I/O 4 for controlling input/output of various devices
10, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 1) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
44L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 2
00, the backlight module 740, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) of the shutter 163. As shown in FIG. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the driving circuit 424 operates the motor 160m in response to commands from the CPU 404.
A drive signal is output to m.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404
The state of the shutter sensor 428 is monitored for each interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . In addition, second chance button 166 and left button 167
, and the right button 168 are also detected by the switch sensor 427 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Also, the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402,
This first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to basic circuit 402 via switch sensor 427 and sensor circuit 426 .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

The components of the first sub-controller 400 described above are the first sub-controller board 400B (FIG. 2).
5).

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

In addition, the second sub-controller 500 includes a VDP 534 (video display processor)
, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 14.
The 4R and the backlight module 740 receive control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 25 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. In addition, the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the effect movable body unit 1
Each 60U also shows one or more connectors HC1, RC1-RC3, DC1.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V alternating current is applied to the power supply control board 252B by 24V.
V DC voltage, 12V DC voltage, and 5V DC voltage. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 25 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. In addition, power supply control 5V monitor L
ED5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC are also shown. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an L for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while 24V DC current is flowing.
The ED lamp and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

Note that the main control board 300B also has voltages of 24 V and 5 V, like the first sub-control board 400B.
may be supplied in separate harnesses. Also, the main control board 3
You may supply 24V and 5V with a common harness like 00B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Also, the main control board 3 shown in FIG.
00B also has a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LE connected to the 5V power line.
D5ML is also shown. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or flashes while a 24V direct current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes a basic circuit 302 shown in FIG.
is configured, and integrated circuits that configure other drive circuits 324, 328, etc. are also mounted.

Connector MC connected to hopper motor drive IC 326i on main control board 300B
1 and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1. 70
0 connector RC2 is connected by harness MR2, and likewise reel motor drive IC3
22i and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 700 includes a reel motor drive IC 322i
Each of the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the harness MR
1 to 3, respectively, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel
becomes drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the side of the reel unit 700 are combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the side of the main control board 300B.
may be made into one connector and connected by one common harness. However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector S of the first sub-control board 400B
C4 is connected by harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, the first
The sub-control 24V monitor LED connected to the 24V power supply line is also provided on the sub-control board 400B.
24SL and secondary control 24V capacitor 24SC and secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line are also shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL is 24V
The sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while a DC current of 5V is flowing. be. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has
A basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 24 is configured, and an integrated circuit that configures other drive circuits 424, 426 and the like is also mounted.

Connector S to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i of the first sub-control board 400B is connected
C3 and connector DC1 of production movable body unit 160U are connected by harness SD.
In the effect movable body unit 160U, 24
A direct current of V and a direct current of 5V are supplied through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the effect movable body unit 160U can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG.
Although not shown in FIG. 25, the second sub-control board is also supplied with direct current of 24 V and direct current of 5 V from the power supply control board 252B through a harness (not shown). The second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also connected by the harness MR1.
.about.3 are electrically connected. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the production movable body unit 1
60U is also electrically connected by harness SD.

FIG. 26 shows that the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is opened.
It is a figure which shows a mode that is rotating manually. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may be in a state where no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If no power is supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Even in such a power failure state, each reel 1
10-112 can be manually rotated forward or backward.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 (the power control 24V monitor LE
D24PL, power control 5V monitor LED5PL, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor L
ED5SL) is also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, as shown in FIG. 26, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. Main control 24V monitor LED2
A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between 4ML and the ground, and the main control 5V
A main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is
Since the resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR, it lights up with an induced current. In addition, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24 will remain active for a while because the 24V power line is provided with the main control 24V capacitor 24MC.
ML continues lighting. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML changes to the main control 24V monitor LED.
24ML is extinguished earlier. Note that the main control 24V capacitor 24 is also connected to the 5V power supply line.
A capacitor having a lower capacity than MC may be provided.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. Power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is connected between power control 24V and ground.
A V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. Power supply control 24V monitor LED24P
L is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is connected to the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5P.
Since the resistance value is adjusted by R, it is lit by an induced current. here,
LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B and LEDs (2) on the power supply control board 252B
4PL, 5PL) are emitted from a plurality of substrates. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further passes through the harness PS1 to the first
It flows into the sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power supply line from the connector SC1. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5 is connected between the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground.
SR is provided. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is connected to the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 2
Lighting is caused by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by 4SR. again,
The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LED (24
ML, 5ML), the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line.
continues lighting. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, the harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (
or insufficient insertion), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated,
5 are not illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, any monitor LED or the main control 24V monitor LED2 shown in FIG.
If 4ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up, it is possible to suspect an abnormality in the harness MR1 or poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected, or if the connector MC5 or/and the connector PC
2, if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24
Although the V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up, the sub control 24V
Monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED2
4PL and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not illuminated. As a result, left reel 110
is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5
Although ML is lit, the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED
If 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not lit, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2.

In addition, the main control board 300B is connected to the power supply control board 25 during cleaning, maintenance, or during the manufacturing stage.
2B, by manually rotating the left reel 110, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B can be turned on.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected, or if the connector PC3 or/and the connector S
If the connection to C1 is not normal, only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will not light up when the left reel 110 is manually rotated. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
If only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up, there is a problem with the harness PS1 or the connector PC3.
, SC1 may be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Monitor L
Only ED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the
If only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described. The same is true when rotating. Also, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LE
D becomes brighter. For example, left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 1
12 simultaneously causes the monitor LED to illuminate brighter than if only the left reel 110 were manually rotated.

In addition, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub-control 2
4V monitor LED24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LE
Even LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs such as D24PL and power control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that emit light when an error occurs, signal monitoring LEDs, etc.) If it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 5V power supply line, light will be emitted when the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power failure state unless there is an electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 25 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 27(a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing tokens and a disk-shaped hopper disc 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181 . Figure 27(a)
Now, part of this hopper disk 182 is visible. The hopper disk 182 has
Six medal passage holes 1821 are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction. Medal passing hole 18
A hole 21 is large enough for medals, which are game media, to pass through. Hopper disk 182
is rotated by the motor 180m (see FIG. 25), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passing holes 1821.

FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above.
Six medal passage holes 1821 can be confirmed. Hopper disc 18
2 can be manually rotated in both the forward and reverse directions by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821 .

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the hopper disk 182 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current due to the resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has the resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or the connector MC1, no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. First, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML remains off. As a result, even if the hopper disc 182 is manually rotated,
If none of the monitor LEDs or main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG.
, MC1 is suspected.

The induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B in the same way as the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above, and is normal. , then each substrate 252B, 400
The monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided in B light up. Therefore, similarly to when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

It should be noted that while the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated while the power is off, the left reel 111
When the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LE
D becomes brighter.

Further, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 17 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (
25), a current (induced current) is generated by the back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current due to the resistance value adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has the resistance value adjusted by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The light is induced by an induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. Also, the first sub-control board 400
The induced current that has flowed into B also passes through the harness PS2 and flows into the power supply control board 252B,
It is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power supply line. Power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL also
Since the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR, it is lit by an induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24
Since the resistance value is adjusted by PR, it is lit by the induced current, and the power supply control 5
The V monitor LED 5PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LED (2
4PL, 5PL), the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B.

The above description is for the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, any monitor LED, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5 shown in FIG.
If SL does not light up, it can be suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness SD or poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3.

Also, if the harness PS1 is broken, or if the connector SC1 or/and the connector P
If it is not connected to C3 normally, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 2
The 4V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but power supply control 2
The 4V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. In addition, the harness PS2
However, if the wire is broken or the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4 are not properly connected, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24S
L and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected, or if the connector PC2 or/and the connector MC
5, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5M of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
Only L does not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 25 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 28, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. Main control board 300B and hopper unit 1 shown in FIG.
80, a hopper relay board 901B is shown, and between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700, a reel relay board 902B is shown.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also, the connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected
Also provided is a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Furthermore, the connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B connects, and the connector R of the reel unit 700
A connector RRR3 is also provided to which a harness MR32 connected to C3 is connected. Figure 2
8, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state,
If normal, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML
and other monitor LEDs light up. However, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 7
00 and a plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21,
If the MR32 is disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED24
Monitor LEDs such as ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up.

In addition, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power failure state, if it is normal, the monitor L such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML
ED lights up. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are broken or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will LEDs
does not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 28, the hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B
25, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased as compared with the connection example shown in FIG. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182 and the shutter 163 are used as movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and any movable bodies driven by a motor can be used. good.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. The following description will focus on points that differ from the internal configuration described with reference to FIG. 3, and redundant description may be omitted. In addition, the same reference numerals as those used so far may be used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

FIG. 29( a ) shows a state in which the front door 102 is opened up to 180 degrees with respect to the main body 101 . As a result, both the inner side of the main body 101 and the inner side of the front door 102 face forward (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 29).

A reel unit 700 is attached to the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 29(a). A main control board storage case 210 is arranged above the reel unit 700 . The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or translucent resin case.
Has translucency. A main control board 300B is housed in the main control board housing case 210 . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG.
ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML are shown. Further, on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a), an LED 3ML for error monitoring and a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292, which are operating means, are also mounted. That is, these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) as light emitting means and the setting key switch 281 and setting change button 292 as operation means are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). Moreover, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or translucent main control board storage case 210, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. FIG. In addition, these operation means (
281, 292) are provided with openings or cutouts to allow access. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) includes connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs
, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches and other circuit components (substrate components)
An identification mark is displayed for each. Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and FIG.
As shown in 9(a), "LED1" is displayed under the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, "LED2" is displayed under the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, and under the error monitoring LED3ML “LED3” is displayed, “setting key SW” is displayed under the setting key switch 281 , and “setting change button” is displayed under the setting change button 292 . These displays are visible through the transparent or translucent main control board storage case 210 . Note that "24V monitor LED" may be displayed instead of "LED1", and "SW1" may be displayed instead of "setting key SW". That is, the name or abbreviation of each component may be displayed, or the identification number or identification symbol may be displayed. At the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210, there is a sticker 210 printed with the control number of the housed board.
S is attached. Although this seal 210S is non-translucent, it may be transparent or translucent. Also, the seal may be a sticker with a seal or a handwritten display. Alternatively, it may be a display directly printed on the main control board storage case 210 instead of a sticker.

A power supply device 252 and a hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700 . The power supply device 252 includes a power control board 252B having the same configuration as the power control board 252B shown in FIG. The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) is housed in a transparent or translucent resin case. In FIG. 29(a), the power supply control 24V
Monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power switch 244 are shown. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) as light emitting means and the power switch 244 as operating means are provided on a common board (power control board 252B). Light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power control board 252B also passes through the transparent or translucent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. The case of the power supply device 252 is also provided with openings and notches so that the power switch 244 can be touched. Further, on the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a), as with the main control board 300B, an identification display is displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29A, "LED7" is displayed under the power control 24V monitor LED24PL, and "LED8" is displayed under the power control 5V monitor LED5PL. "Power S
W" is displayed. These indications are visible through a transparent or translucent case. The case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LED as the light emitting means and the switch as the operating means are provided on the surface of the metal case so that the light emitting means can be visually recognized and the operating means can be operated. An identification mark is also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The positions of the main control board 300B, the sub-control board 400B', and the power supply device 252 may be above or below the movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height position.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
1, but the slot machine 100 of this second embodiment
, the sub-control unit storage case 220' is arranged above the front door 102. As shown in FIG. That is, it is arranged behind the production device 160 . The sub-control unit storage case 220′ is also a transparent or translucent resin case and has translucency. A sub control board 400B' is housed in this sub control board housing case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is the first control board shown in FIG.
Although the effect control board is a combination of the sub control board 400B and the control board of the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.
may be configured only by the control board. In FIG. 29(a), the sub-control 24V monitor LED2
4SL and secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL are shown. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B′ shown in FIG. 29(a) also has a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL for monitoring the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control section 500 and a first selection switch 190 as an operating means. Implemented. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) as light-emitting means and the first selection switch 190 as operation means are provided on a common board (sub-control board 400B'). In addition, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or translucent sub-control board storage case 220', and passes through the sub-control board storage case 220'.
luminescence can be confirmed. Further, the sub-control board storage case 220′ is also provided with openings and notches so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. moreover,
Similarly to the main control board 300B, the sub control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29A also displays an identification display for each circuit component (board component). Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29A, "LED4" is displayed under the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, and "LED5" is displayed under the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL. "LED6" is displayed under the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed under the first selection switch 190. FIG. Also, the sub control board 400B'
In the lower right corner of , a display 4001 of "substrate control number 0002" printed in two stages on the resist layer of the substrate is displayed. Identification display for each circuit component and "Board management number 00
02" display 4001 is visible through the transparent or translucent sub-control board storage case 220'.

FIG. 29(b) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H1 in a standing posture.
c) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in a sitting posture.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views is in a state in which the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, and the side of the main body 100 is shown with the front door opened 90 degrees. 102 shows the front. Also, persons H1 and H shown in these side views
2 is a person such as a factory inspector or an amusement shop clerk who needs to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and is located directly in front of the main body 101. ing.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the visual field V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 are operated by hand, and each LE such as the LED 3ML for error monitoring mounted on the main control board 300B that emits light as a result
D can be visually recognized at the same time, or it can be visually recognized only by moving the line of sight slightly upward.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the visual field range V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the power supply 2 located below.
52, the reels 110 to 112 operated by hand and the respective LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the power supply device 252, which emits light as a result, can be visually recognized at the same time, or the line of sight can be slightly moved up and down. visible only. Also, the power supply device 252
and a hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 29(a)) placed next to it also fall within the visual range V2, and the hopper disc 182 (see FIG. 27) operated by hand and the power supply 252, which emits light as a result, are provided with Each LED such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL can be visually recognized at the same time, or can be visually recognized only by slightly moving the line of sight to the left or right.

29(b) and 29(c) schematically show the main control board 300B in an easy-to-understand manner. However, in reality, as shown in FIG.
It is on the rear side (deep side) of f. That is, the movable body unit protrudes from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand. Therefore, it is difficult to see the main control board 300B from below the main control board 300B because the reel unit 700 becomes an obstacle.

FIG. 30 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment.
That is, FIG. 30 is a view of the slot machine of the second embodiment viewed from above, with the lower side of the drawing being the front side and the upper side being the rear side.

FIG. 30(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is completely closed, and FIG. A state in which the door 102 is opened 90 degrees is shown.

Main body 101 in FIG. 30(a) shows main control board storage case 210 in which main control board 300B is stored, and reel unit 700. As shown in FIG. The main control board 300B has 3
Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a configuration key switch 281 are shown. A sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board housing case 210 is also shown.

The front door 102 in FIG. 30(a) shows a sub control board storage case 220' in which the sub control board 400B' is stored. The sub-control board 400B' has three LEDs (24S
L', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190 are shown.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, the reels 110 to 11
2 and the hopper disc 182, which emit light by operating the movable body by hand (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.), none can be visually recognized from the outside of the slot machine 100. FIG.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 30(b),
The range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches is schematically shown in gray. It should be noted that the way in which the reachable range of light is indicated here is a way of indicating that emphasizes the directivity of the LED, and in fact, the closer to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range are illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to back electromotive force is the front door 1 in the state of being opened 90 degrees.
Reaches part of 02. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to operate the first selection switch 190 even in a dark place. In addition, light reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 30(b)), and the circuit components can be visually recognized even in a dark place. . Furthermore, the identification display displayed for each circuit component can also be visually recognized. In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML
The light from the display 400 of "board control number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B'
1, making it possible to check the board control number even in a dark place. Also, Figure 2
The seal 210S described using 92(a) is non-translucent, but in a dark place, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the surroundings of the seal 210S, thereby displaying on the seal 210S. You will be able to check the contents of In addition, if the seal 210S is translucent, it is easier to confirm. In addition, the main control 24V monitor LE
The light from the D24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and if a sticker is attached to that part, the contents displayed on the sticker can also be confirmed. .

In addition, in this FIG. 30(b), only the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the counter electromotive force reaches is schematically shown, but the light due to the counter electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, and the sub control board Most of the storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are visible even in a dark place.

As described above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is
Sub-control board 400, which is a board different from the board on which D (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) is mounted
B' and its sub-control board storage case 220' containing the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, and may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for the light to reach. Also, on the contrary,
Light generated by counter electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub control board 400B' reaches the main control board housing case 210 and the main control board 300B.

In most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B', light generated by the back electromotive force is also emitted from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. reaches and becomes visible even in the dark. Furthermore, the main control board storage case 2
10 and most of the main control board 300B also receive light from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B due to back electromotive force, making it visible even in dark places.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 25 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.
Further, the same reference numerals as those used so far are used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

In the modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 31, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from a surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 for protecting the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power line. Also, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 for protecting the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. Protection circuit PT4
is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5
is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Also, Figure 2
The sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in 5 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is connected between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line.
is arranged, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power supply line. Also, the power control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG.
T10. Protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9 with large-capacity capacitors
, PT10 can absorb the amount of charge of the surge power, and can prevent circuit breakage due to the surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 absorb the charge amount of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are manually operated, none of the LEDs emit light when these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9 and PT10 are functioning. On the other hand, if a part of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10 is damaged, the damaged protection circuit cannot absorb the back electromotive force, and current due to the back electromotive force flows. , a luminous LED comes out. Therefore, the disk 182 and the reel 110~
By manually activating 112 and which LED lights up, it may be possible to locate a suspected damaged protection circuit PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(a), the protection circuit PT11 includes a reel motor drive IC 322i.
and the 24V power line. A protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 32(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(b), the protection circuit PT21 includes a reel motor drive IC 322i.
and the 24V power supply line, there is a diode connected in parallel with another element (resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like). Moreover, the protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG.
has a diode connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, the reverse surge current can be prevented from flowing due to the rectifying action of the diode.

The current due to the back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body such as the reel 110 is also
Due to the rectifying action of the diodes employed in the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21 and PT22, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5M do not flow.
L does not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, the current will not flow in either direction due to the insulated state, and the current due to the back electromotive force will not flow either. Even if the movable body such as 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not emit light, but if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, they become insulated. is connected in parallel to other elements, and the current due to the back electromotive force also flows.
may emit light. Therefore, unless the protection circuit PT3 with a large capacity capacitor is used (in the main control board 300B shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. control 24V capacitor 24MC is used), the main control 24V monitor LED 2
When 4ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML emit light, protection circuits PT11 and PT1
2, the diodes of PT21 and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, and the protection circuits PT11 and P
It is suspected that an unauthorized circuit has been installed by an unauthorized person to bypass the diode of T12.

The above description is the same for the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22, and the movable body includes a sprocket rotated by a payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 22), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a de-energized state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 22) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are turned on by this induced current if normal. do. Also, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P passes through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 22) and flows to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 22). Each substrate 182P, if any
, 160P are turned on. Furthermore, as the movable body, two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-controller, and two movable bodies that are driven by a motor that controls the rotation of the main control unit (for example, a crew). It may be a production movable body or the like.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power-off state, a light-emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. It is a requirement for the light emitting means to be visible.

In the above explanation, in order to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power failure state,
Although the adjusting resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used, any means that can adjust the impedance may be used, and is not limited to the adjusting resistors. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor L
ED5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED
5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5
PL, LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], motor [for example, motor 18
0 m, 110 m to 112 m, motor 163 m, payout motor, etc.] and a movable body operable by driving the motor [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111
, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.]
60U, payout device 152P, etc.], and a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness SD] that relays the substrate and the movable body unit, wherein the motor and the light-emitting means are electrically connected via the harness, and the board is provided with impedance adjusting means [for example, adjusting resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR , 5SR)], wherein the impedance adjusting means is operated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a de-energized state, so that an induced current generated by back electromotive force causes the light emitting means The impedance is adjusted so that the light is emitted, and the impedance is adjusted so as to regulate the flow of induced current in an energized state. When a motor is driven and a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in, light may be emitted.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light-emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light-emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the movable body can be operated manually to check whether the harness is properly connected. , the light emitting means is easily visible.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness is a motor-side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR1
2, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain substrate may be connected to the motor [e.g. motor 180m or motors 110m, 11
1 m, 112 m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
wherein the movable unit is electrically connected [for example, via a harness] to the light emitting means,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off.

After attaching the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance,
Whether or not the movable body unit and the light emitting means are normally electrically connected can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The power failure state may be a state in which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [eg, reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [eg, hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [eg, effect movable body unit 160U] (same below).

again,
"The light-emitting means is a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 4
00B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B)
, payout control board 170P, etc.],
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the amusement machine electrically checks whether the harness is properly connected or whether the harness is disconnected. It can be checked even if it is disconnected.

The board is a board having a main control unit [for example, main control boards 300B and 156P].
or a board having a sub-control section [for example, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P
or second sub-control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [e.g., payout control board 170P], or a board having a power control unit [e.g., power control board 252B, 182P], or a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901
B, relay board for reel 902B].

Further, the board and the movable unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, a plurality of harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series]. again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to check the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
When the light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in (hereinafter referred to as " In the first case, light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, 5
light emission is continued by the charge stored in the PC], and the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the harness is properly connected by manually operating the movable body. , the light emitting means is easily visible. In addition, the light emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow in. Therefore, the light emitting means may continue to emit light while the movable body is being preoccupied with manual operation. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the means, the light emission of the light emission means can be confirmed after the operation.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness is a motor-side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR1
2, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain substrate may be connected to the motor [e.g. motor 180m or motors 110m, 11
1 m, 112 m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). In some cases, light emission continues even when the motor stops driving [for example, light emission continues due to the electric charge stored in the capacitor].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed even if the movable body is stopped from being operated manually, and the light emission of the light emitting means can be easily confirmed. .

again,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, Sub-control 24V capacitor 2
4SC]. 』
was also explained.

A common electronic component called a capacitor can be used to make it easier to check the light emission of the light emitting means.

again,
"The light-emitting means is a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 4
00B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B)
, payout control board 170P, etc.],
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
was also explained.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor.
may emit light due to the inflow of
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may emit light even if you do it,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to check whether the connection of the first harness is normally performed, and manually operate the third movable body. When operated, it is possible to confirm whether the connection of the third harness is normally performed, and it is possible to independently confirm the connection of each of the two types of harnesses. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means is easily visible.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [e.g. motor 110m] is connected to the light emitting means and the harness [e.g.
3 harnesses MR1 to MR3 are gathered and electrically connected via one common harness],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness,
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor.
may emit light due to the inflow of
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether the harness is properly connected whether the first movable body is operated manually or the third movable body is operated manually. again,
The connection of one common type of harness can be confirmed by operating the first movable body and the third movable body, whichever is easier to manually operate. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means is easily visible.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, harnesses MR1 to MR
3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

After attaching the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance,
Whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are normally electrically connected can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emitted from the common light emitting means even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Further, even when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

In addition, the movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [eg, middle reel 111] operable by being driven by a fourth motor [eg, motor 111m].

again,
"The light-emitting means is a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 4
00B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B)
, payout control board 170P, etc.],
A detachable harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor
or harness MR1 to MR3 or harness MR11 and harness MR12 or harness MR
11 to MR31 and harnesses MR12 to 32]. 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit, which had been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance, is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor. harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the third movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
In a power-off state, the light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [eg, an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m]
]and,
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [e.g., motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [e.g., harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor.
may emit light due to the inflow of
The light-emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the de-energized state to drive the second motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, by manually operating the movable body (the first movable body) of the first movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether the first harness is properly connected. By operating the movable body (the second movable body) of the second movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the connection of the second harness is normally performed. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means is easily visible.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The first harness includes a first motor-side harness [eg, harness MR12] and a first light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MR11],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the first motor [e.g., motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [e.g., harness MR12],
The certain board includes the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the first light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MR11].
] and are electrically connected via
The second harness includes a second motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2] and a second light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain board includes the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the second light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1].
are electrically connected via
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power control 2
4V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m]
]and,
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game table comprising
The first movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, harness MR1
~connected via MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emission is used to determine whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when each movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

again,
"The light-emitting means is a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 4
00B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B)
, payout control board 170P, etc.],
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable body unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected, and the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the motion of the first movable body and the motion of the second movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, so that the light emitting means emits light due to the current [eg, induced current] generated by the back electromotive force. is,
The light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [for example, induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally can be confirmed and the second movable unit can be confirmed only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means. It becomes easy to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor L
ED5ML, secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, L for error monitoring
ED, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML, secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LE for error monitoring
D, a light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among the LED for signal monitoring, the 7-segment display, the set value display, etc.];
Operable by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR
1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state, and receiving a current (for example, an induced current) generated by the counter electromotive force generated by the motor. The second light-emitting means also receives a current (for example, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state. It may emit light by
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the common movable body, whether or not the connection of the common harness is normally performed can be confirmed by both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or out of order, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), these light emitting means are easily visible.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness is a motor-side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR1
2, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain substrate may be connected to the motor [e.g. motor 180m or motors 110m, 11
1 m, 112 m] and the motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness M
R12, MR22, MR32] are electrically connected,
The certain substrate is the first light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML].
and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR2
1, MR31],
The certain board includes the second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21,
MR31],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor L
ED5ML, secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, L for error monitoring
ED, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML, secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LE for error monitoring
D, a light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among the LED for signal monitoring, the 7-segment display, the set value display, etc.];
Can be operated by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game table comprising
The movable unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when power is cut off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when power is cut off.

After attaching the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning and maintenance,
Whether or not the movable body unit and the plurality of light emitting means are normally electrically connected can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission from the plurality of light emitting means even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is confirmed whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can be done. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power line of a first voltage [for example, 24 V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line of a second voltage [for example, 5 V]. may be connected to The first light emitting means is provided on a first substrate [eg, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second substrate [eg,
It may be provided on the power supply control board 252B]. Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

again,
"The first light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control boards 300B and 156P, the first sub-control boards 400B and 160P, the power supply control boards 252B and 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A detachable harness [for example, 24V and 5V
a harness for supplying power to both of the above. 』
was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this amusement machine, it becomes easy to visually check the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

again,
"The first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [eg, main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first substrate and the movable body unit;
A detachable harness that relays the first board and the second board [for example, a harness P
M] and
A game machine comprising: 』
was also explained.

According to this game table, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit and the first board, and the first board and the second board are electrically connected normally.

again,
``The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when it is energized [for example, always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to check the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
"The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained. According to this amusement machine, it is confirmed whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by causing the current to flow through the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means respectively. becomes easier to do.

again,
"First light emitting means [for example,
Main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML],
Second light emitting means [for example,
power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
Motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and movable bodies operable by driving the motors [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprockets, croons, etc.], and
A game table comprising
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first substrate;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
with
wherein the motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the one harness;
wherein the motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first substrate and the second harness;
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may emit light by operating the movable body by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

again,
"First light emitting means [for example,
Main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML],
a movable unit [
For example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700],
A game table comprising
a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B];
A detachable first harness [for example, harness MH2, harnesses MR12, MR22, MR
33] and
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31] that relays the relay board and the first board;
with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: ” was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.];
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 30(a)].
,
When the door is opened, the light emitting means and the movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 30(b) and FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
A board on which the light emitting means and the operating means are common [for example, a main control board 300B shown in FIG.
, the sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, and the power supply control board 252 of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG.
B],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches.
In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the game table [for example, FIG.
)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided above the movable unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, the LED provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)].
24PL, 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 40
0B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The sub control board may perform control based on commands transmitted from the main control board (the same shall apply hereinafter).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power failure state may be a state in which power cannot be received from the outside of the gaming machine (commercial power source) (same below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.] and a motor [for example, motor 180m
, 110 m to 112 m, motor 163 m, payout motor, etc.] movable body [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 11
2, shutter 163, sprocket, cloon, etc.],
A printed indication [for example, "board number 0 printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002" display 4001, and "board number 0001" pasted on the main control board storage case 210
A sticker 210S printed with
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL', the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', and the light from Fig. 30 (b) , the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The position to which the light from the light emitting means reaches may be, in other words, a position illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be a position within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. However, it may be a position where the light emitting means emits light even in a dark place so that it can be visually recognized (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain printed indication is, for example, connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs,
An indication of any of the substrate components such as CPU, ROM, RAM, switches, etc. (for example, display by silk printing), an indication of the control number of the substrate (for example, an indication printed on the resist layer of the substrate) (same hereafter).

Note that a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display) is used instead of a printed display.
may be

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, C
PU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain circuit component may be the light emitting means [e.g. main control 24V monitor LED 24ML
] is provided at a position where light from [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The certain circuit components are, for example, connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LS
I, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, etc. (hereinafter the same).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage case 220
, 220′, case of power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] emits light from the light-emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board housed therein, as well as the light shown in FIG. 30(b). , When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the LEDs 2 provided on the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 in a positional relationship of 90 degrees
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 』
was also explained.

Management information such as the management number of the board may be displayed on the certain board case. For example, a seal on which management information or the like is printed, management information is written, or a seal is displayed (for example, "board number 0001" attached to the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 29).
(Same below).

The certain substrate case may be the main control substrate storage case 210, the sub control substrate storage case 220, the first sub substrate case 162P, or the second sub substrate. It may be the case 165P, the dispensing board case 172P, the firing board case 176P, or the power board case 184P (hereinafter referred to as
same).

The certain substrate case may be a translucent case (e.g., a transparent resin case) or a non-translucent case (e.g., a metal case (case of a power supply device). good(
same as below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the harness [for example, the harness MH, the harnesses MR1 to MR3] [for example, the harness PM supplied via],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, a power supply device [for example, a power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage is provided, and the current converted to a predetermined voltage in the power supply device is transferred to the harness [for example, a harness MH and harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML].
According to this aspect, when the power is off, the motor can be manually driven to check whether or not the harness is connected by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. It is possible to check whether or not the power is normally supplied separately from whether or not the harness is connected.
Also, the movable body unit [eg, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700]
may be detachable from the gaming machine with the connectors of the harnesses [eg, the harnesses MH and the harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. When inspecting or cleaning the movable unit, the connector of the harness is removed before it is removed. Therefore, it is easy to cause connection failure or forgetting to connect the harness. It is possible to easily check whether or not connection is forgotten.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m] are connected via the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and first harnesses [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3]. is electrically connected to the
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED
5ML] is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM],
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED
5ML] allows the movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112] to be operated by hand even if connection failure occurs in the second harness [e.g., harness PM]. The motor is driven by the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in, which may cause light emission.
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor includes the light emitting means and harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to M
R3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, and harness SD].
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED
24ML)] and
A second light emitting means [e.g. a different LED (main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML) or an LED (sub-control 24V monitor L) provided on a board different from a certain board
ED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR
1 to MR3], and
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in ( hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
When the second light emitting means also emits light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [for example, a capacitor 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC continue to emit light due to the charge accumulated]
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The harness may be, for example, the harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m
is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via a harness MR1. In addition, the motor 110m is controlled by the sub-control 24
V monitor LED 24SL or sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and at least harness M
They are electrically connected via R1. That is, the motor 110m is controlled by the sub-control 24
V monitor LED 24SL is electrically connected via harness MR1, harness PM and harness PS1, and motor 110m is electrically connected via sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, harness MR1, harness PM and harness PS2. is connected to Therefore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor L
ED5ML, LED3ML for error monitoring],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5
V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring L
ED] and
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
A game table comprising
The motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR
1 to MR3], and
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, the main control board 300
B, first sub-control board 400B, and sub-control board 400B' different boards]
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5
SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 11
0, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.],
wherein the motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED
24ML)] and
A second light emitting means [e.g. a different LED (main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML) or an LED (sub-control 24V monitor L) provided on a board different from a certain board
ED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a first harness [for example, harness MR1
] and are electrically connected via
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a third harness [for example, harness MR3
] and are electrically connected via
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. There is a case where light is emitted due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), and the second light emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the power cut state. and drive the third motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in, causing light emission (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case"). is a
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light even when the driving of the first motor is stopped in the first case and the second case [ For example, when light emission is continued by electric charges stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC],
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light even when the driving of the third motor is stopped in the third case and the fourth case [ For example, if the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC continue to emit light],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first harness may be, for example, the harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, the motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is driven by the main control 24V monitor LED 24
It is electrically connected to ML or main control 5V monitor LED5ML via harness MR1. Also, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS1.
The motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

The third harness may be, for example, the harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, the motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is driven by the main control 24V monitor LED 24
It is electrically connected to ML or main control 5V monitor LED5ML via harness MR3. Also, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR3, the harness PM and the harness PS1.
The motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL via the harness MR3, the harness PM and the harness PS2. Therefore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be provided on the same substrate, or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor L
ED5ML, LED3ML for error monitoring],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5
V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring L
ED], and a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 7
00] and,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a first harness [for example, harness MR1
] and are electrically connected via
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a third harness [for example, harness MR3
] and are electrically connected via
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light-emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the third motor [for example, an induced current ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, the main control board 300
B, first sub-control board 400B, and sub-control board 400B' different boards]
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5
SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a first harness [for example, harness MR1
] and are electrically connected via
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is connected to the first light emitting means and a third harness [for example, harness MR3
] and are electrically connected via
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to drive the third motor by operating the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state, and to generate a current (for example, an induced current) caused by a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light-emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the third motor [for example, an induced current ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 30(a)].
,
When the door is open, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
A board on which the light emitting means and the operating means are common [for example, a main control board 300B shown in FIG.
, the sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, and the power supply control board 252 of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG.
B],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches.
In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the game table [for example, FIG.
)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided above the movable unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, the LED provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)].
24PL, 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture. According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 40
0B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A printed indication [for example, "board number 0 printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002" display 4001, and "board number 0001" pasted on the main control board storage case 210
is printed seal 210S],
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the main control 24
Light from the V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 30(b)
)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, instead of a certain printed display, a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display)
may be

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, C
PU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component may be the light emitting means [e.g. main control 24V monitor LED 24ML
] is provided at a position where light from [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage case 220
, 220′, case of power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
In addition to the light from the light emitting means [for example, the light from the LED provided on the board housed in the certain substrate case, the front door 102 shown in FIG.
In the open state, the light from the LED 24ML provided in the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 which has a positional relationship of 90 degrees] reaches.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness [for example, harness MR1] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the third harness [for example, harness MR3] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [eg, harness PM], and the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24
ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML] is connected to the second harness [for example, harness PM
], the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] flows due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
The light emitting means operates the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor even if the second harness [for example, the harness PM] has a connection failure, and the third motor causes the third motor to operate. It may emit light due to the inflow of current [for example, induced current] due to the generated back electromotive force,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5
ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL
, 5SL′, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring
, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means receives a current (for example, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

33 to 67, a game table (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 33 to 67 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. Figure 67
In the explanation using , priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. , the condition determined by the combination of symbols based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped is the predetermined payout condition,
This game machine advances a series of games in which game media are paid out if they match and the game ends without paying out game media if they do not match. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the store clerk.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113 approximately three times when viewed from the player, for a total of nine symbols.
One pattern is visible.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 34, the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure)
The symbol displayed on the left reel is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed on the middle stage of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is displayed on the bottom stage (position 7 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the middle reel symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is assumed. The right reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) is the right reel. Each of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. and,
By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel is determined, and the reel 110 is moved so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.
to 112 are stopped.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The active line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. It will be judged as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 34 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1 (BB1), a special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1 to 3, and small combinations 1 to 7 (eg, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) in the internal lottery
or a special game state, which will be described later, to the player. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a three-coin bet. However, the game can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 displays various internal information (for example,
This is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game) as a numerical value. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 11
0 to 112 will start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 13
8 and a right stop button 139 are provided. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". In addition, each stop button 1
Light emitters may be provided inside the 37 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. slot machine 1
00 includes an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 35(a)) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened.
is provided. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 is provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141.
, and a second chance button 166 are provided. A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. Left button 167 and right button 168
may move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in this case, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The top lamp 144T provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the front door 1
02, the left side lamp 144L provided on the left side and the right side lamp 144 provided on the right side.
4R is a decorative lamp for livening up the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The production device 160 includes two horizontally openable and closable right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163a.
A shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of 3b and an effect image display device 157 arranged on the back side of the shutter 163 are provided. When opened outward, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information.
segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 35(a) shows the front door 1.
02 is opened, the front view of the slot machine 100, and FIG.

The main body 101 includes an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, and a lower plate 26.
4 and a back plate 242, and is a box that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. below,
A reel unit 700 with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged. A side plate 260 on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side.
A sub-control board housing case 220 housing a sub-control board is arranged inside. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement arcade) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM,
Sound effects, error sounds, etc.) can be changed, and the power saving mode can be set. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device. The external collective terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Also, on the right side of the reel unit 700, there is a setting key switch 28 for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value.
1 is provided. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, which will be described in detail later. , includes a value (“payout rate”) for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine. This setting value can be set in a plurality of steps, for example, in 6 steps.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, the setting key switch 28
When a predetermined setting key is inserted into 1 and turned right, a setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects an ON state, and when turned left, the setting key switch sensor detects an OFF state.

Since the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101 like the first selection switch 190 described above, it can be operated only by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Also, the setting key switch 281
is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external common terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer).

The setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket 181) is arranged on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, there is a power supply having a power supply control board. A device 252 is provided and the power supply 252
A power switch 244 is arranged on the front. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply 252 . The power switch 244 can be used to power on (power ON) or power off (power OFF) the slot machine 100 . Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on the power control board. power supply 25
2 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. Furthermore, predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.)
A power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to the device for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days).

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the symbol display window 113 are a medal selector 170 and a medal selector 1 for selecting inserted medals.
Return path 2 through which medals pass when 70 drops illegal medals or the like into medal receiving tray 161
66 etc. are provided. This medal selector 170 will be further described later. A bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 35(b). The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 can also be operated only by those who can unlock the front door 102, like the setting key switch 281 and the like.

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled. Further, by pressing the reset switch 291 for a long time (pressing for a long time), the RAM of the main control unit can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . The operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This set value indicator 29
3 can display a display representing the game mode (set value) set by the setting change button 292 .

Although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 are provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. again,
The set value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. Also, Figure 3
6, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 35 are indicated by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171 . The medal blocker 172 distributes the medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266 . The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36 protrudes into the medal passage 171.
Medals passing through are guided (guided) by the protruding medal blocker 172 , pass through the return passage 266 , and are ejected from the medal payout port 155 . On the other hand, medal blocker 17
2 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181 . Medal blocker 172,
Projection into the medal passage 171 and retraction from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173 . On the other hand, when the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b. Figure 37 (
a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293. FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, six types of setting values are prepared, namely setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293 . That is, immediately after shipment from the factory, after clearing the RAM containing the storage area for storing the set values (RAM of the main control unit), or when the backup power supply for continuing the storage of the storage area for storing the set values is lost, the default set values is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player's profit acquisition is higher in setting 2 than in setting 1, higher in setting 4 than in setting 2, higher in setting 5 than in setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than in setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player's gain.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, setting b is provided in place of setting 3. FIG. Setting b is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of profit acquisition for the player. That is, the setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player's gain. This setting b is a 7-segment LED
, the display has a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If the unauthorized person thinks that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting and performs an unauthorized operation, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person misunderstands setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the dishonest person can be disadvantaged.

When the setting is changed, the display of the setting value display 293 changes from 1 to 1 by operating the setting change button 292.
It is updated as 2→4→5→6→b→1→2 . . . The display order other than "setting 1" which is displayed first may be any order.
It may be updated as 2->b->4->5->6->1->2.

FIG. 37(b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each set value.

Performance A is payout rate (sometimes referred to as ball output rate), performance B is special role (BB) first hit probability, performance C is AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT wins, Performance F is the probability of a small win A (eg watermelon), Performance G is the frequency and probability of appearance of a notification that suggests a setting value (setting suggestion notification), Performance H is a setting suggestion as a fixed notification. It becomes the appearance frequency/appearance probability of the notification. The performances A to F correspond to the performances representing the degree of advantage in gaining profits for the player, and have the relationship of setting b<setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 as described above. .

In the notification suggesting the setting of performance G, the notification suggesting the set value currently set is the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 1.
44L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, the upper speaker 272, and the like. The setting suggestion notification here includes not only a notification such as simply extinguishing a lamp or outputting a warning sound, but also a setting suggestion effect such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. be In addition, suggesting a set value also includes a case of suggesting a false set value (setting-related effect, setting-related notification). Furthermore, even if a set value is suggested, when notifying that a certain set value is 100% true (notification of setting confirmation)
is also included. When the setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off when the demonstration animation (demonstration animation) in the effect image display device 157 is started. , the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up. The demonstration animation is started when a predetermined time elapses without inserting medals (betting operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (turned on) while no betting operations are being performed at the time of the power outage, the demo animation will start, but if the setting change is started, the demo animation will be displayed after the setting change is completed. is started. Also, at the end of the chance zone, at the end of the battle production, at the end of the BB, AT
At the end, setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in the state where setting b is set. on the other hand,
In a state where setting values other than the setting b are set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where the setting b is set, the setting b confirmation notification may be performed once in a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). It should be noted that in a state in which the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification that the setting may be set b may not be performed, and only the setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when the setting b is set, the notification mode may include content suggesting that the player is disadvantaged (for example, text display or voice output such as "The tough battle will continue"). . The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) described above is such that the state in which setting b is set is the setting value other than setting b (setting 1
, 2, 4 to 6) are set, and are almost the same among setting values other than setting b.

With respect to performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is indicated as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmed notification not suggesting settings 1, 2, 4 to 6).
In a state in which setting values other than the set values are set, notification suggesting setting values other than those set as the setting suggestion notification may also be performed. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd-number confirmation notification indicates that the setting of an odd-numbered setting value is confirmed. When setting 2 is set, an even-numbered setting value is set. There is an even confirmation notification that notifies that what is done is confirmed. In addition, in the state where setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification for notifying that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, a setting of 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. A setting 2 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed, and a setting 5 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed. In the state where the setting 6 is set, the effect of notifying only the setting 6 as the setting suggestion notification (the setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a probability lower than the execution probability of the setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) described above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set Then higher (e.g. 50%) and the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, 5
) has approximately the same lower probability of execution (eg, 30%) than the state with setting 6 set.

FIGS. 37(c) to 37(f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157 ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). The setting-related notifications here are
It is a kind of notification performance.

FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing an example of an even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(c), the character "May be set even" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "May be even number setting" indicates that the setting value is 2, 4 or 6 (
even number setting). In addition, this even-number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even-number setting, or may be performed when the setting value is a setting other than an even-number setting (odd-number setting). may In this case, the setting value may be more likely to be notified when the even number setting is used than when the odd number setting is used.

FIG. 37(d) is a diagram showing an example of notification suggesting a setting of 5 or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(d), the character "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" suggests that the set value is likely to be 5 or 6. note that,
This setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the set value is 5 or 6, or may be performed when the set value is 4 or less. In this case, the setting value is 5
Alternatively, the case of 6 may be easier to be notified than the case of 4 or less. Note that when the set value is 4 or less, the setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 37(e) is a diagram showing an example of notification of confirmation of setting 2 or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(e), first of all, the characters "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The character itself, "Ah, it's a business sorting", corresponds to a notification suggesting setting 2 or higher. After that, an old woman character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. BBA, the character of the old woman, is displayed with characters such as "Isn't it better if it's 1? Is it better if it's 2 or more?" The notification by this dialogue denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the confirmation notification of the setting of 2 or more may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed in the case of the setting of 1 as well. Alternatively, setting 1
In the case of , the character BBA of the old woman may be prevented from appearing.

FIG. 37(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(f), first of all, the characters "Oh, God's revelation" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The word itself, "Ah, it's a revelation from God,"
This corresponds to notification suggesting setting b. After that, the god character KG is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen.
G appears and an announcement is issued. The god's character KGG is displayed with the message "A tough battle will continue" as a revelation. The notification by this notification is a notification that confirms that the setting is b. Note that the setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed in the case of other set values. However, in the case of setting values other than the setting b, the character PND of the panda and the character "Oh, God's revelation" may be displayed, and the character KGG of the god may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given assuming that the setting suggestion notification includes the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification includes the setting confirmation effect, but the setting suggestion notification may be read as the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification may be set. You may read it as a fixed production.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes valid (the setting value changing process is started), and the game mode (setting value) changes from 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2→· every time the setting change button 292 is pressed. , and the desired game mode can be selected. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, turn the setting key to the left (
By turning the setting key from ON to OFF), the set value change process is completed.

The period of the set value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise turn of the setting key to the last counterclockwise turn of the set value change operation is called the set value change mode. , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode. The start and end of setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the conditions for starting and ending the setting value change mode and setting value confirmation mode described in detail with reference to FIG. 3 may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
A basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300 is provided, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304 and a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, pattern arrangement of reels, and the like. and RAM 3 for temporarily storing data
08, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 operates from 0 to 65 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a.
The CPU 304 is provided with a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value within the range of 535, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. , When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (BET button 130 sensor, BET button 131 sensor,
Bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 1
38 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, index sensor for left reel 110, index sensor for middle reel 111, index sensor for right reel 112, etc.). monitoring the status.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 31 that received this signal
6 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores a random number used for lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

BET button 130 sensor, BET button 131 sensor, and BET button 132
A sensor is located on each of the corresponding bet buttons 130-132, and the RAM
308 detects an insertion operation when inserting medals electronically stored as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time.
Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving a motor provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 for driving a blocker solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (the effective line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121 , accumulated number display 125, game information display 126,
It has a drive circuit 328 for driving the payout number indicator 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300
Via this information output circuit 334, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 35). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-controller 400, the first sub-controller 4
00 cannot transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. First sub-controller 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. RAM 408 and I/O 4 for controlling input/output of various devices
10, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-controller 400 . An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164
, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first chance button 16
5, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163 . The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404
The state of the shutter sensor 428 is monitored for each interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . In addition, second chance button 166 and left button 167
, and the right button 168 are also detected by the switch sensor 427 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Also, the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402,
This first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to basic circuit 402 via switch sensor 427 and sensor circuit 426 .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

In addition, the second sub-controller 500 includes a VDP 534 (video display processor)
, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 receives a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 is provided to output The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, reels 110-112
reaches a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped. It should be noted that the minimum time required for one game (4.
1s) and suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. All reels 110-1
12 stops, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, C
It performs processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of the PU 304 to the stack area.

In step S203, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial set value (32 in this embodiment).
. 8 ms) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing),
The WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, subtracting the game interval timer,
Such processing is executed to update various timers according to respective time units.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 is strobe information (if ON,
data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command,
Input command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, production command associated with production lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to second accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139 Three press command, Reel 1
1st to 3rd stop commands associated with stops 10 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents. In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 and stored in the RAM 308.
A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least 8 used areas is derived, and the RAM 308
, and sets a power supply flag to ON to indicate that power-off processing has been performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, main controller initial setting processing (
The details of step S101) will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.
, interrupt mask setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 3
30 indicates that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment).
), it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. In addition, in this initialization, for example, the value of the setting value is initialized.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or momentary power failure (temporary voltage drop below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 40). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, whether the power flag is normal (on),
and the checksum are determined to be normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in the RAM 308 .

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Reset the pointer (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, the R of the main control unit 300
A power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the AM 308 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and effect state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data in the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. i.e.
This embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1005, if the setting key switch 281 is ON, step S
At 1013, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main controller initial setting process of FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40), and the process proceeds to step S1105. As a result, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and step S110
Go to 7.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. By processing here,
A provisional set value is displayed on the set value display 293 . After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In this embodiment, the setting change button 2
Each time 92 is pressed once, the provisional set value is changed to 1 according to the display order described with reference to FIG. 37(a).
When the setting switch is operated while the temporary set value is b, the temporary set value is set to 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, step S11.
Go to 07.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135 . When the set value is determined, the set value display 293 displays a display indicating that the set value has been determined (here, number 0). When the setting value is determined, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the determined setting value, may switch to blinking display, or may not be displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40) is executed. As a result, the effect image display device 157 ends the display of the display during setting change. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

42, the opening/closing state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed as the termination condition. good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281. FIG.

Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 43 (
a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 43(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 43(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, processing such as initialization of input/output ports and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 408 is performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. In addition, if backup is performed at the time of power failure,
The information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S305
to process.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the performance data is expanded and stored in the RAM
A process of setting device data in an effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, a process of setting effect data in an effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and further, based on the received command and information included in the command. Then, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the effect image display device 15
If there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to 7, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control section 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 40 as an unprocessed command.
8 is stored in the command storage area.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 43(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 44 (
a) is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; FIG. 44(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 44(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 44(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 44(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initialization and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 508 are performed. note that,
If backup has been performed at the time of power failure, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S405
to process.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409.
For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the first
The command output by the sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 44(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 44(d), step S4 in the main process of the second sub-control section 500
11 image control processing will be described. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 stores the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506) in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table,
After setting VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518 ), etc., an instruction to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 is set. VDP 516 is
Image data is transferred from the ROM 506 to the VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
Transfer to AM518. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in step S421, the CPU 504
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518, information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) of V
Instruct DP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504
516 is instructed to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S43
If not, go to 1 and wait for the end of production interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, setting changes in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be described. The setting change process is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG.

FIG. 45 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting the setting b by changing the setting and the state of the related components. In FIG. 45, each stage is assigned a code from (a) to (b).
Time passes in the order of zero sounds. Also, FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG.

FIG. 45 shows, as items of components, a power switch 244, a front door 102, an open sensor 294, a setting key switch 281, a set value display 293, an effect image display device 157, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left Items of side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown. 46 schematically shows a set value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and speakers (272, 277). It is

In FIG. 45(a), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also turned off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). In FIGS. 46(a) and (b), various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown in solid white with no pattern (same below).

In FIG. 45(a), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal even if the front door 102 is opened.

In FIG. 45C, the power switch 244 is turned on while the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state (power-on). As a result, the open sensor 294 begins to output a detection signal for open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Figure 4
In 6(c), the state where the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by left-downward hatching (the same applies hereinafter). As described above, the setting change processing in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244 . . When the setting change process is started, the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Further, when the setting change process is started, the effect image display device 157 displays a setting changing display to inform that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice (“Changing settings”) will be output to notify you of this.

In FIG. 45(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the set value display 293 displays "2" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and the set value display 293 displays "4" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the set value display 293 displays "5" as the temporary set value.

In FIG. 45(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in FIG.
is pressed twice, and "b" is displayed on the set value display 293 as a temporary set value. Figure 46 (G)
Comparing the set value display 293 shown in Fig. 2 with the set value display 293 shown in Fig. 1 (h), the only difference is whether the A segment is lit or not, and an attempt to illegally change the set value An unauthorized person may mistake display of "b" for display of "6".

In FIG. 45(vi), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value is determined. Here, the setting b is fixed. Incidentally, when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Alternatively, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281 instead of determining the set value by operating the start lever 135 .

In FIG. 45(J), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process is completed (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the 7 segments of the set value display 293 are extinguished. Also, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. When the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the power is turned on, the display of the demonstration animation starts immediately after the power is turned on. is started after the In this case, the display of the demonstration animation starts from the beginning. or,
The display of the demo animation was reproduced immediately after the power was turned on, but the display during setting change overlapped and could not be seen. Also, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 14
4T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 46(C), the top lamp 144T and the left side lamp 14
4L and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern, which is indicated by grid-like hatching (same below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit during the setting change, but is turned off when the setting change is completed, and remains in the off state until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . The extinguishing of the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the set value, more specifically, notification that the set value is set to a certain set value (the most disadvantageous set value for the player). Also, since the title panel lamp 164 is normally kept on,
The extinguishing of the title panel lamp 164 can also be regarded as notification of an abnormality (notification of an abnormality in the set value).

In FIG. 45 (S), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). speaker (2
72,277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed." The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 45 (ch), medals are inserted. That is, the maintenance of the medals or the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 are performed. As a result, from the speakers (272, 277),
A medal insertion sound is output, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demonstration animation to the normal effect background display (normal background display). Various lamps (164, 144T, 14
4L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern). In FIG. 46 (C), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R
is lit in a normal pattern by cross hatching (same below). On the other hand, the title panel lamp 164, which has continued to be turned off, also starts lighting up. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 may start lighting when the front door 102 is closed, may continue to turn off when the medal is inserted, and may start lighting when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135). It may start lighting at the third stop of the game, or may start lighting at the completion of the payout of the first game.

FIG. 47(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 47(a), each stage is labeled from (t) to (n), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. again,
FIG. 48 schematically shows the state of the components in each stage from (T) to (J) in FIG. 47(a).

In FIG. 47(a), the same items as those in FIG. 45 are shown as items of constituent elements,
, each component is schematically shown in the same manner as in FIG.

FIG. 47 (T) may be a continuation from FIG. 45 (T), and the game has already started with the setting b. For example, the game is started while ignoring the notification that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. In FIG. 47 (T), the third stop is performed, and reel stop sounds are output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 47(h), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses without the insertion of medals after the third stop. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R)
Among them, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R
switches from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if the setting b remains set, when the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is restored. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 may be extinguished and the setting-related notification may be started when a wide demonstration effect is started or when the demonstration state is entered, not limited to the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. .

In FIG. 47(c), the front door 102 is opened and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 14
4R) all initiate door open pattern lighting. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which has been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 48(T), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in the door open pattern, and are indicated by hatching downward to the right (same below). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG. Since the front door 102 is opened, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. From the speakers (272, 277), the sound "The door is open" begins to be output. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, but it is also possible to display the characters "Door is open" along with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 47(T), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses without the setting being changed after the front door 102 is opened. In order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 281 while the power switch 244 is turned off.
0 seconds), the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again, and the setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the setting. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from the door opening pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is terminated, and the lighting of the demonstration pattern is restored.

In FIG. 47(g), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound "The door is closed". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demonstration pattern. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues.

In FIG. 47(na), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is replaced with the same figure (
tsu).

In FIG. 47(2), the front door 1
02 is closed again. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 . At the speakers (272, 277), the voice "the door is open" is immediately switched to the voice "the door is closed". On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue the door open pattern lighting for the predetermined time after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the front door 10
2 is opened until the predetermined time has elapsed, setting-related notification by extinguishing of the title panel lamp 164 is not started. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 47(J), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 in FIG. 47(N) was opened. Again, as a result, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 was opened without the setting being changed, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and setting-related notification is started. . In addition, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. FIG. note that,
The title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. 47 (j) because the front door 102 is closed while the setting is set to b, and medals are not inserted until the predetermined time has elapsed. It can be seen that the setting-related notification has started by turning off the title panel lamp 1, and if medals are inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the title panel lamp 1
Setting-related notification is not started by extinguishing of 64 .

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a) described above, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to the setting b (FIG. 47(h)). The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off under certain conditions, for example, when entering a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, without following a specific pressing order navigation) The title panel lamp may also be turned off after releasing the third stop button. In the non-recommended game state, no lottery including the AT lottery is performed, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or slightly reduced, but the non-recommended game state continues until the predetermined number of medals is paid out. Therefore, it will take a considerable amount of time to return to a state where the number of medals can be increased. When entering the non-recommended gaming state, the effect image display device 157 may perform a suggestive display suggesting that the non-recommended gaming state is reached. It may be continuously displayed until the penalty bonus ends). Also, in the non-recommended game state, the demonstration animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain turned off during the game and during the non-game. It should be noted that regardless of the set value (other than the setting b) it may enter the non-recommended game state, or the non-recommended game state may be entered only when the set value is set to the setting b. may

FIG. 47(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 47(b), the checkout button 134 is operated at the timing of (ne) after one second from (t), starting from (t) in the same state as (t) shown in FIG. 47(a). . That is, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses without medals being inserted after the third stop is performed. When the settlement operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. Further, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the settlement pattern. Furthermore, a game medium payout sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). 207 (
(ne) schematically shows the state of the components in FIG. 47 (ne). This figure 48 (
n), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144
Horizontal hatching indicates that R is illuminated in the settlement pattern (the same applies hereinafter). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG.

In FIG. 47(no), the payout of game media is completed. In FIG. 48 (no), FIG. 47 (no)
The state of the constituent elements in is shown schematically. Even after the payout is completed, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are
The adjustment pattern lighting is switched to the demonstration pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 . Output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for extinguishing the title panel lamp 164 described above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while the setting b is set ((C) in FIG. 45), the setting b
is set (Fig. 47 (h), and Fig. 45 (ko) is also the same result), when setting b is set and the settlement operation is performed A case where the payout is completed (FIG. 47(f)) can be mentioned.

FIG. 49(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state where setting 1, which is the default setting value, is set. In FIG. 49(a), each stage is labeled from (c) to (f), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. again,
The upper part of FIG. 50 schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 49(a). (C) in FIG. 49A is the same as (T) shown in FIG. 47A, 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened. is not set to the setting b, the title panel lamp 164 is not turned off and remains lit in white. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is not illuminated in the demo pattern, but may be illuminated in white, in which case the demo pattern is illuminated. In FIG. 50(C), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by left-downward hatching.

In (H) in FIG. 49(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. The set value display 293 displays "1" which is the current set value. In addition, on the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a voice (“Confirming settings”) to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to illuminate in white, and the top lamp 1
44T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to the white lighting. The set value display 293 shown in FIG. 50(H) displays "1" as the current set value. Also, the title panel lamp 164 shown in FIG.
, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are all lit in white.

(f) in FIG. 49(a) is the same as (j) shown in FIG. 47(a), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. The point at which confirmation is completed and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white without being extinguished because the set value is not set to the setting b. In FIG. 50(f), the set value display 293 is hidden. In addition, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues lighting in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144T, 144R)
44L, 144R) are switched to the demonstration pattern lighting represented by the grid-like hatching.

(F) in FIG. 49(a) is the same state as (S) shown in FIG. 47(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. It becomes a point that continues to light up in white.

FIG. 49(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting 1 set. In this FIG. 49(b), (
) to (ke) are attached, and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, Fig. 5
0 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (1) to (1) in FIG. 49(b).

Fig. 49(b) shows a state 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened, which is the same as (c) shown in Fig. 49(a). Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode, as described with reference to FIG. 17(h). Also, the title panel lamp 164 is the same in that it continues to light in white without being extinguished, but the luminance is lowered (dimmed). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 50(f) shows that the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is darkened and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. It also shows that the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In FIG. 49(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started, similar to (h) in FIG. 49(a). .
Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or extinguished while the settings are being checked, and the lighting is the same as in the non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(K) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(H).

At (c) in FIG. 49(b), similarly to (f) shown at (a) in FIG. 49, the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and setting confirmation is completed. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is darkened, and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. Also, the top lamp 144
T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are extinguished.

FIG. 49(b) (v) is the same state as (f) shown in FIG. 49(a), with the front door 102 closed. Effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 14
4L, 144R), there is no change in dimming or extinguishing from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

FIG. 51(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b. In this FIG. 51(a), (te), (b), (ko), (sa)
Time passes in this order.

(te) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (te) shown in FIG. 47(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened, and is exactly the same state as (te). That is, the set value display 293 is not displayed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the demonstration animation. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (b) of FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 28 is pressed while the power is on.
1 is turned on, and set value confirmation is started. 49(a), the only difference is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. FIG. That is, in (b) in FIG. 51(a), the set value display 293 displays the current set value “b”. The set value display 293 shown in FIG. 52B displays the current set value "b". As in FIG. 50(H), in FIG. 52(B) as well, the setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed." It is The title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(J) in FIG. 51(a) is the same as (J) shown in FIG. 45, a setting key switch 281
is turned off, which is exactly the same as (co). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (Sa) shown in FIG. 45 where the front door 102 is closed, which is exactly the same as (Sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 51(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with the setting set to b. In FIG. 51(b), (
The symbols from ) to (ge) are attached, and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, Fig. 5
2 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (ga) to (ge) in FIG. 51(b).

(g) in FIG. 51(b) is the same state as (te) shown in FIG. 51(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened. Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 52(G) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is darkened. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), similarly to (b) shown at (a) in FIG. ,
It is exactly the same as (b). In other words, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or extinguished while the settings are being checked, and the lighting is the same as in the non-power saving mode. In addition, FIG.49(b)
The display of the set value display 293 and the like are different from those in . 52
"b" is displayed like the set value display 293 shown in (g).

In (g) in FIG. 51(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off as in (j) in FIG. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is dark, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (c) in FIG. 49(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is executed as shown in FIG.

(B) in FIG. 51(b) is the same state as (X) shown in FIG. 51(a), with the front door 102 closed. Effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 14
4L, 144R), there is no change in dimming or extinguishing from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be described.

<Regarding the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, examples of the winning probability and state transition of the winning hand group are shown, and the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate considering all hands including the replay which is a replay hand and the real payout rate considering the hand other than the replay. A slot machine capable of converging the payout rate within a suitable range by devising will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine according to this modified example, the states that can be controlled according to the progress of the game are a first state (RT2 described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as described later. , and the second situation (RT1, which will be described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate, so that the payout rate converges within a suitable range. can be made It is assumed that the slot machine in this modified example also has the technical matters described with reference to FIGS. Here, the payout rate is the total payout number of medals paid out after the symbols corresponding to the minor win are stopped.
A rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals bet set as the number of bets. In addition, the total payout rate considering all the combinations is, for example, when winning a replay in a game with a 3-bet wager, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay winning, and 3 medals are betted in the next game. means the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as the first payout rate. On the other hand, the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replays is, for example, when a replay win is made in a game with a 3-bet bet, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. It means a payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a coin is betted.

FIG. 53(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine according to this modification, RT0, which is a basic game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is completed, a state in which a setting change is triggered, etc.), and a predetermined state in RT0 RT1 that is transferred by winning a transitional combination A, and RT that is transferred by winning a predetermined transitional combination B in RT0
The game state transitions between a plurality of types of states including 2. In RT0 to RT2,
In either case, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to be three. After shifting to RT1 or RT2, the game is shifted to RT0 again by completing 100 games defined as the prescribed number of games. At RT0 in the slot machine of this modified example, in addition to the transitional hand A and the transitional hand B, a bonus hand, a replay hand, a small hand, etc. are selected by lottery to determine whether or not they will be won. It is determined to be In addition, in the slot machine according to this modified example, if a bonus combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the transition is made to a bonus state in which the payout rate is 1 or more. It is omitted from a). It should be noted that the slot machine in this modification may change the game state between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combinations to be selected for the winning combination lottery in RT1 and the level of winning probability. In RT1, bonus hand, replay a and replay b
, a small combination including a 3-card combination with a 3-card payout, and a push-up combination with a 15-card payout, etc. are determined to be targets of the lottery. The 3-card combination always wins in the winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the pushing order combination wins when operated in a predetermined pushing order (equivalent to the above-described advantageous operation mode) and 15 coins are paid out, but does not win when the pushing order is not operated in a prescribed order. It may be a winning combination (for example, a single winning combination).

The winning probability of the bonus combination is determined to be 1/250 when the set values are 'b', '1' and '2', and 1/200 when the set values are '4' to '6'. is determined to be Therefore, the winning probability of the bonus combination in RT1 is the set values "b", "1
, "2" and when the set value is "4" to "6". In addition, the probability of winning the replay b among the replay roles is low regardless of the set value (for example,
5/200), on the other hand, the winning probability of the winning combination among the small winnings is determined to be a high probability (eg, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. . It should be noted that even if the player wins the first prize in RT1, the navigation effect that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode is not executed (that is, it is not controlled by AT). Therefore, even if the player wins the winning role, for example, the player wins with a probability of 1/6 and does not win with a probability of 5/6.

On the other hand, with respect to the winning probability of Replay a among the replaying roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the small roles, the total winning probability is uniform (for example, 50/200). ,
The ratio of winning probability of replay a and 3-card combination is determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are “b” and “6”, replay a has a low probability (for example, 1
5/200, etc.), while the 3-card combination is determined to have a high probability (eg, 35/200, etc.). When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the 3-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200, etc.). When the set values are "2" and "4", the replay a has a high probability (for example, 35/200), while the 3-card hand has a low probability (for example, 15/200). ing.

FIG. 53(c) is a diagram for explaining a part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of the winning probability in RT2. In RT2, as in RT1, bonus hands, replay hands including replay a and replay b, etc., 3-card hands with 3-card payouts, small wins including 15-card payouts, etc. are subject to lottery. is determined to be The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is determined to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other hands is the same as in RT1. It is determined to be Further, when winning the pushing order in RT2, unlike in RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when winning the winning combination in RT2, 15 medals will be paid out by winning the winning combination unless the operation mode is mistaken. In addition, the role to be the target of the role lottery in RT2 is
It is not limited to what is defined in the same way as and may be defined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the combined winning probability of replay a and 3-card combination (which is also the combined winning probability since winning is guaranteed) is uniform regardless of the set value. However, if the total payout rate and the actual payout rate are compared, they differ for each set value. For example, when the set values are "b" and "6", the winning/winning probability of replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the set value " 1”
and "5", the difference becomes relatively large, and when the set values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate becomes maximum. Further, in any of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, which affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small. It is determined so as to include a set value at which the difference from the actual payout rate is relatively large and a set value at which the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximized.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG.
It should be noted that the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is 3, and in FIG.
A case where the bonus combination is not won in is illustrated. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set is 10/100 (=
(15+5)/200), it can be expected to win 10 times on average during 100 games (G). Therefore, in FIG. 54(a), 1 replay is performed during 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set.
An example of "total IN number", "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "actual OUT number" when winning 0 times is shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. Note that "total number of wins" and "actual number of wins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but "total number of wins" is the number of medals including the number of bets automatically set after winning a replay. On the other hand, the "actual IN number" is the number excluding the number of bets automatically set after the replay win (the number of bets after the replay win is set to "0"). In addition, "total number of out" and "actual number of out" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a minor role, but "total number of out" means that 3 medals were paid out when winning a replay. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number that is assumed to be 0 at the time of winning the replay.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), when 10 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3).
The actual number of IN sheets" is "270" (=300 sheets−10 times×3 sheets). Also, the "total number of OUT sheets" is assumed to be "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (
= 150-10 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≒120÷2
70), the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

Next, FIG.54(b) is demonstrated. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 20/100 (= (35 + 5)
/200), it can be expected to win an average of 20 times during 100 games (G). For this reason, in FIG. 54(b), when the replay wins 20 times in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set, " Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. Figure 54(b)
), if 20 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3), and the "actual number of IN" is It becomes “240” (=300 sheets−20 times×3 sheets). Also, the "total number of OUTs" is shown in FIG.
54(a)
and "150" in the same way as in , and the "actual number of OUTs" in this case is "90" (=
150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (=90/240
), the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

As described above, during RT1, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate. 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN" and the "total number of OUT" are the same as in FIG. 54(a), etc., because the total probability of the number of games played, replay a, and 3-card hand is uniform. Also, the number of replay wins, the "substantial IN number" and the "substantial OUT number" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). From this, 1
During 00 games (G), the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate. again,
During RT1, the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is a disadvantageous state for the player. can do.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate varies depending on the set value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value). is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning the replay during RT2 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 30/100 (=(15+45)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 30 prizes in between. In FIG. 54(c), 100 games (G
) when the replay wins 30 times, the “total IN number”, “actual IN number”,
Examples of "T number" and "actual OUT number" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. RT2 over 100 games (G) as shown in FIG.
If the replay wins 30 times, the "total number of IN" will be "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3), and the "actual number of IN" will be "210" (= 300 - 30 times x 3). ). Also, the "total number of out" is assumed to be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "actual number of out" in this case is "510" (=600-30 times×3). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.429 (≒510÷210), while the total payout rate is
2.000 (=600/300).

Next, FIG.54(d) is demonstrated. The probability of winning the replay during RT2 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 40/100 (= (35 + 45
)/200), it can be expected to win an average of 40 times during 100 games (G). In FIG. 54(d), "
Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(d), when the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), "Total I
N number of cards" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3 cards), and the "actual IN number" is "1
80” (=300 sheets−40 times×3 sheets). Also, the "total number of OUT sheets" is shown in FIG. 53(c).
As shown in , the total probability of replay a and 3-card hand is uniform, so it is assumed to be "600" as in FIG. 54(c). (= 600
-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.667 (≈480/180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600/300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate differs depending on the set value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even at the set value of . In addition, R
100 games (G) during T2 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN" and "total number of OUT" are the same as in FIG. Also, the number of replay wins, the "substantial IN number" and the "substantial OUT number" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 54(d). From this, it can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. Become. In addition, during RT2, even though the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. state can be

As described above, in the slot machine according to this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, attention is paid to the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all hands including replays and the actual payout rate that takes into account hands other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 54(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range, compared to a gaming machine in which only one payout rate is high.

The transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination A, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, the completion of a predetermined number of games, or the winning of a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the shift from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination B, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, completion of a predetermined number of games, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the timing of transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the fact that the game is completed a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined role, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, and the winning of a predetermined lottery. It may be established by doing. Also, R
The opportunity to shift from T2 to RT0 is not limited to being established by completing the game a predetermined number of times, but also winning a predetermined role, stopping a specific winning combination of symbols, and winning a predetermined lottery. It may be established by, for example.

In addition, the transitional combination A wins simultaneously with other winnings a, b, etc. in the combination lottery, and the operation mode of winning the transitional combination A according to the type of the other combination in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, (push order) may be determined differently. Also, the transitional hand B is won at the same time as the other hand a, b, etc. in the hand lottery, and the transitional hand B is won according to the type of the other hand in which the transitional hand B is simultaneously won (for example, (push order) may be determined differently. In addition, the transition winning combination A, the transition winning combination B, and the other winning combinations a and b are simultaneously won in the winning combination lottery, and the transition winning combination A is won according to the types of other winning combinations simultaneously won. ,
and the transitional combination B may be determined differently. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or the transition winning combination B is won at RT0, by generating a pushing order guessing game, the interest in the game at RT0 can be improved.

For example, the transition hand A is an RT1 transition replay, and the other normal replay a and normal replay b
It is determined that the operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) to win the RT1 transition replay is different according to the type of other normal replays that are simultaneously won in the role lottery and the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won. may Specifically, as a winning situation at RT0,
A winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b are provided, and the left first stop is made in the winning situation a. While the reel control to win the RT1 transition replay is performed by , the reel control to win the normal replay a is performed by stopping the reels other than the left first. Reel control for winning RT1 transition replay is performed by 1 stop, while normal replay b is performed by left first stop
A reel control may be performed to win a prize.

In addition, the transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, and the other normal replay a and normal replay b are simultaneously won in the role lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is won simultaneously according to the type of other normal replay in which the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won. may be set so that the operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize is different. Specifically, as the winning status at RT0, R
Winning situation c in which T2 transition replay is won at the same time as normal replay a, and winning situation d in which RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as normal replay b are provided. While the reel control to win the RT2 transition replay is performed by , the reel control to win the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left, whereas the reel control to win the normal replay a is performed when the winning situation is d. Reel control may be performed to win the RT2 transition replay by the 1st stop, while reel control to win the normal replay b may be performed by the left first stop.

At RT0 in this case, by notifying that it is a push order guessing game when one of the winning situations a to d occurs (for example, when winning situations a and b, "Pinch! Avoid pushing order!" Displaying a message, and displaying a message such as ``Chance! Give the correct answer on your own!'' in the winning situations c and d, etc.), it is possible to provide the player with the fun of thinking about which pressing order to perform the stop operation. , RT0 can be improved.

FIG. 53(a) exemplifies the game state transition between RT0 and RT2. Focusing on this, if a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur as shown in FIG. is not limited to

53(b) and 53(c), when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs for each set value. Also, in any of the set values "b", "1", "2" and the set values "4" to "6" that affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is It has been explained that there are a relatively small set value, a set value with a relatively large difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate, and a set value with the maximum difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate. However, as shown in FIG. 54(e), the winning probability is such that a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur. A lottery (e.g. 0% or 10% chance of winning a replay)
If it is not set to 0%, etc.), it will be the target of the game state transition shown in FIG. It is not limited to the role and winning probability.

To summarize the features of the slot machine according to the modified example described above,
"A gaming machine that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and can provide game values according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped,
Determining whether or not any of a plurality of roles including a granting role accompanying the awarding of the game value and a re-playing role enabling the next game to be started without newly using the game value is won. A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
Stop control means for performing stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning lottery;
setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total awarded number, which is the total number of game values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the award combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the bet number, In a game played with a predetermined number of bets set, when the symbol corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped, the predetermined number of game values is given as a result of the game, and the number of bets is set in the next game. A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets. The gaming value given in the next game is set to 0, and the gaming value set as the bet number in the next game is counted as 0. The second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate. A first situation in which the rate is higher and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate,
In the notification state for notifying the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of any set value among the plurality of types of set values. becomes high, and in the non-notification state in which the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery is not notified, the first is higher than the payout rate of
At least a first set value with the most advantageous degree of advantage and a second set value with the most unfavorable degree of advantage are provided as the plurality of types of set values, and the second set value is set. The ratio of the first situation is higher when the first set value is set, and the second set value is set more than when the first set value is set. A game machine characterized in that the second situation is more likely to occur when the game machine is present. 』
become.

Also, according to the descriptions after FIG. 33,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, the CP of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change processing shown in FIG.
U304] and
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period refers to a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281].
is a period of time after the execution of
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is executed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained by the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by both game shop clerks and players. In the case of a store clerk, this would be confirmation of setting changes before the store opens, and in the case of a player, this would be important information that would benefit oneself (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to perform the setting-related notification during the first period (hereinafter the same).

The first period may be a period from when the operation for ending the setting change is performed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the same shall apply hereinafter). Also, the setting-related notification may be notification suggesting that a predetermined set value is set (selected) as the set value (the same shall apply hereinafter). The predetermined set value may be a set value that provides the lowest degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of types of set values (hereinafter the same). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage by the setting-related notification before opening the store, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

The setting-related notification can be read as setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as effect means (hereinafter the same).

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
A setting change means for performing a setting change process for changing the set value that has been set to a new set value selected from [for example, C of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304] and
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period refers to a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281].
is a period of time after the execution of
The notification means is configured to set values different from the one set value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6
] is set, the setting-related notification is not executed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is executed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained by the setting-related notification. Also, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set in the first period. It may not be.

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
Setting change means for changing the set value that has been set to a new set value selected from [for example, C of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304] and
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period refers to a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281].
is a period of time after the execution of
The notification means is configured to set values different from the one set value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6
] is set, the frequency of executing the setting-related notification is higher when the one setting value is set [for example, performance G or performance H],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is not executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, and is executed only when the certain setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a set value different from the one set value is set, including false notification. However, the execution frequency is as above.

In the first period, the notifying means may be configured such that, in the first period, the set value is higher when the one set value is set than when the set value different from the one set value is set. The frequency of executing the related notification may be high, or a period different from the first period (for example, a period after the start of the game (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of the battle production, at the end of the BB) , AT
at the time of termination, etc.), the setting-related notification is executed more when the one setting value is set than when the setting value different from the one setting value is set. The frequency may be high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
Setting change means for changing the set value that has been set to a new set value selected from [for example, C of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304] and
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 37(a)];
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period refers to a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281].
is a period of time after the execution of
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value, which is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
the second setting value is a setting value [for example, setting b] that provides a lower degree of advantage to the player than the first setting value [for example, setting 1];
The predetermined display order is an order in which the second setting value [e.g., setting b] is displayed after the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is executed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained by the setting-related notification. In addition, since the second set value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first set value, the fraudulent person who illegally changes the set value may There is a case where the setting value is changed to the second setting value, and a disadvantageous game can be played.

The second set value may be the one set value, and the notifying means may provide the setting-related notification related to one set value among the plurality of types of set values. It may be one that can execute notification (hereinafter the same).

The set value display means may display the currently set set value (the same shall apply hereinafter).

setting value display means for displaying a setting value currently set; The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
Setting change means for changing the set value that has been set to a new set value selected from [for example, C of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304] and
Notifying means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value;
A game table comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period refers to a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281].
is a period of time after the execution of
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value, which is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value [e.g., setting b] that provides a lower degree of advantage to the player than the first set value [e.g., setting 1];
The set value display means includes a default set value to be displayed first [for example, a set value to be displayed first immediately after shipment from the factory, a RAM including a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) for storing the set value.
The setting value that is displayed first after clearing or the setting value that is displayed first when the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area for storing the setting value is lost] as the first setting value [
For example, setting 1] is a means of displaying
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. Also, even if the game clerk forgets to change the setting and the default setting value remains, the player can easily play the game.

The default setting value to be displayed first is the setting value to be displayed first when the gaming machine is initialized. That is, when the gaming machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

setting value display means for displaying a setting value that is currently set; The values are changed according to a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be a setting value positioned at the top of the predetermined order.

again,
"The first period refers to the period after the gaming machine is powered on [for example, from Fig. 45(c)].
A period in which the game has not been started [for example, the game has not been started by operating the start lever 135].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the setting-related notification during a period in which no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never started may mean that the start lever has never been operated while the number of bets is set to 1 or more.

again,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification when an operation regarding the setting change is performed.

The certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change (hereinafter the same).

again,
"The certain operation means that the set value is confirmed [for example, step S1115 in FIG.
], which is the operation performed after
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the setting value is determined.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation (setting change key (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"Equipped with operating means [for example, setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation to switch the operating means in the ON state to the OFF state [for example, FIG. 45 (ko)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the operation means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation to switch off an operation means (for example, a setting change key) that is switched to an on state when starting the setting change, and the on state may be a start state. Alternatively, the off state may be the end state (same below). i.e.
The operation means may be means for switching between starting and ending the setting change by being operated (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification during the first period [for example, setting value display 2 shown in FIG.
93],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this amusement machine, since the information about the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, redundant display is not performed by the setting value display means, and the control load is reduced. be.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
In the first period, the notification means may execute the setting-related notification with the door opened [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, even when the door body is open, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification.

The operation means may be one that can be operated when the door is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the setting value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may not be visible when the door is closed (same below). In other words, it may be display means that is normally invisible to players (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The notification means may execute door opening notification when the door is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door opening notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door closed [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, even when the door body is closed, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification.

Even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the door open notification. (same below).

The notification means may perform the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door is open, and may perform the setting-related notification even when the door is closed during the first period. may be executed (hereinafter the same).

The setting-related notification may continue regardless of whether the door is opened or closed, and may end when the number of bets equal to or greater than 1 is set (hereinafter the same).

again,
"The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain set value is set as the set value.

The one set value may be a set value with the lowest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of types of set values (the same shall apply hereinafter). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before the opening of the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

I will continue to explain. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing games with a three-coin bet. However, the game can be played even with two bets. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is in the normal game state that the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state is the normal game state. When the coin bet bonus game is completed, the gaming state becomes a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the double bet bonus non-internal winning state is entered. Further, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the initialization is automatically performed, resulting in a double bet bonus non-internal winning state.

It should be noted that when the setting change process is started, the initialization may not be automatically performed, but it may be possible to select whether or not to perform the initialization. For example, a setting change procedure may be used to initialize the setting values and the game state. More specifically,
The setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is off, just as when changing the setting. Next, in turning on the power switch 244, if the power switch 244 is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes 1 and the game state becomes 2.
A non-internal winning state of the bet bonus may be entered. In addition, it may also be in a non-advantageous section state. Also, the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 42) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, but the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the bet-two bonus game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display suggesting that the bet-two bonus game is in progress (for example, display of a flower figure). ). In addition, the remaining number of payouts, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining cards during consumption"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting b that is not originally set, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player, is prepared from the viewpoint of countermeasures against fraudulent players. can be avoided. However, even though the setting change process prevents the player from being significantly disadvantaged, the player remains at a disadvantage in the event that the two bet bonus is not won internally. Therefore, a notification is made to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state has been reached.

In the following description, the first gaming state means the non-internal winning state of the bet-two bonus, and the second gaming state means the internal winning state of the two-bet bonus. The first gaming state includes a non-advantageous section state, a non-internal winning state not limited to double bets, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b The second game state can be applied to a state that is more advantageous than those, such as an advantageous section state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal game state, items and points or set to one of settings 1, 2, 4-6.

Also, the first voice is a warning notification of "please confirm". The first display is a character display of "Please confirm", and this character display is also an alert notification.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "completed". The second display is notification by text display of "Completed".

Furthermore, when the game is started in the non-internal winning state of the 2-bet bonus, the effect image display device 1
In 57, there is a display suggesting that the transition to the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is being attempted, a display suggesting that the 2-bet bonus is not internal winning state, or a 2-bet bonus internal winning state. A message prompting you to move to Hereinafter, notifications by these displays are collectively referred to as "fourth notification". As the fourth notification, for example, "returning games" is displayed, and the number of games played in the state where the double bet bonus is not won is displayed.
A player who knows this fourth notification can know that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. The fourth notification may be displayed only when the game is played with two bets, or may be displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 55 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed. In FIG. 55, the steps (1) to (11) are assigned to each step, and time elapses in order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 55 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 1
44R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown. Also, at the bottom, an item of game state is provided.

In FIG. 55(1), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144
R) and the monitor LED are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 55(2), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 55(3), the setting key switch 281 is on and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started.
The set value display 293 displays "1" as the default set value. In the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if the initialization is not performed, the set value at the time of power interruption stored in the power interruption processing of step S221 is displayed. On the effect image display device 157, a setting change in progress display is displayed to inform that the setting is being changed, and a sound ("Setting is being changed") is also emitted from the speaker (272, 277) to inform that the setting is being changed. ) will be output. In addition, since the power is turned on, the open sensor 294
starts to output a detection signal for open detection, and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 1
44R) all start lighting up. Furthermore, the monitor LED also starts to light as the setting key switch 281 is turned on. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal is output from the external common terminal board 248 to the external device.
Also, the gaming state is the first gaming state (double bet bonus non-internal winning state) because the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the game state at the time of power interruption stored in the power interruption processing of step S221 is entered. For this reason, there may be a second gaming state (two bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated each time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 55(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Since the setting key switch 281 remains on even if the set value is determined, the monitor L
ED continues lighting. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The setting is being changed", it may be arranged to output a voice saying "The setting has been changed."

In FIG. 55(5), turning the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 to the left turns it off. As a result, the setting change process is terminated (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the 7 segments of the setting value display 293 are turned off. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to "the door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The voice output of "the door is open" switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 1
44T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start the demo pattern lighting. The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. If the game state is the first game state when the setting change process is completed, the main control unit 300 transmits the first notification command to the first sub-control unit 400 . Sub-controller side (
The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) execute notification control (effect control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the first character display such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification.

In FIG. 55 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level close detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 55(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to an L-level closed detection signal, the main control section 300 transmits a door close command to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please confirm." is output. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 55(7), the front door 102 is opened and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L
, 144R) all start the door open pattern lighting. Further, in the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is continued, and since the game state remains the first game state, the first display such as "Please confirm" is also continuously displayed. is the speaker (272,2
The audio from 77) reverts to the warning audio "the door is open". That is, the output of the first sound is started when the front door 102 is closed and ended when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the game parlor clerk has already noticed that the first game state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. To avoid this, the output of the first voice is terminated. It should be noted that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened a predetermined number of times, which is two times or more. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during the game due to a hopper error, ball clogging, etc., if the predetermined number of times is two or more, the surrounding players may find it annoying. There is

In FIG. 55(8), the front door 102 is closed again while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). From the speakers (272, 277), a voice saying "The door is closed" is output, and repeated alerting notification is not executed. However, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display such as "Please confirm" along with the display of the demonstration animation. Of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R restart demo pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 restarts white lighting. .

In FIG. 55(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. The medal insertion here is a two-coin bet. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, the 2-coin bet is often operated by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the demonstration animation display to the normal effect background display (normal background display). However, the first display, which is an alerting notification that the player is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. In addition, various lamps (164, 144T, 144L
, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern).

In FIG. 55(10), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when a game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 55(7), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when a game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting 2 and the internal winning of the 2-betting bonus is won, a notification indicating the internal winning is made. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a navigation effect is also performed to avoid winning the double bet bonus. In this navigation effect, a sound calling attention is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 displays information about the stop positions of the reels at which bonus winning can be avoided.

In FIG. 55(11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, the first operation of the start lever 135 obtains the two-bet bonus internal winning state, and the stop operation avoiding the winning of the bonus changes the game state to the second game state. On the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 56 summarizes the state of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. It is a table. In FIG. 56, (1) to (5) and (21) to (23) are shown in each stage.
) and (11).

In FIG. 56 as well, the same items as in FIG. 55 are shown as items of constituent elements, and an item of game state is provided at the bottom (same as in FIG. 61).

(1) to (5) in FIG. 56 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 56 (21), after the setting change process is completed, medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed while the front door 102 remains open. The insertion of medals here is a bet of 2 medals. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, 2
Betting is often an operation performed by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a sound of inserting a medal, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demonstration animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), indicating that the player is in the first game state. The first display, which is an alert notification, is continuously displayed. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start door open pattern lighting.

In FIG. 56 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when a game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 56 (21), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when a game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed. Since the front door 102 remains open, all lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 56 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is not output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first voice such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification. In the example in FIG. 56, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The first game state can be alerted by voice to the store clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate. Among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 starts white lighting. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the normal background and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 56(11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 56 (11) corresponds to FIG. 55 (1
This is the same as 1), and the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state becomes the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 57 shows the relationship in the case where the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occurs while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of the components that In FIG. 57, (1) to (5), (2
1), (22), and (25) to (27) are attached, and time elapses in the order of the description of these symbols.

(1) to (5) in FIG. 57 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

(21) and (22) of FIG. 57 are the same as (21) and (22) of FIG. 55, so the description of (21) and (22) of FIG. Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 57 (25), in the middle of a game with two bets (reels 110 to 11
2), the power supply is interrupted, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 57(1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

Next, in FIG. 57 (26), the power is restored, and the reels 110 to 11 just before the power is cut off in the state of betting two coins.
Return to state 2. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power failure, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power failure starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. Further, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) also return to door open pattern lighting. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 57 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is not output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. It will be. If the power is cut off and restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice "Please check". This is so that the amusement arcade clerk can concentrate on checking the rotation of the reels after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state.

FIG. 58 is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout of the inserted medals before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. This figure 5
8, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (31) and (32) are assigned to the respective stages, and time elapses in the order of the description of these symbols.

(1) to (5) in FIG. 58 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 58(21) is the same as FIG. 55(21), the description of FIG. 55(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 58 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of betting two coins, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the two-coin medals and credit medals.
In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display even after the payout is started. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R)
Start lighting the payment pattern. In addition, "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the following FIG. 58 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state,
The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation,
In the example in FIG. 58, the front door 102 is closed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed while the game state is the first game state, the speaker (272, 277) will output a message "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 59 shows a configuration related to the case where the power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settling the inserted medals before closing the front door 102 after the setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of elements. In FIG. 59, (1) to (5), (21), (31) are shown in each stage.
), (35) to (37) are attached, and time elapses in the order of the description of these symbols.

(1) to (5) in FIG. 59 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 59(21) is the same as FIG. 55(21), the description of FIG. 55(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 59(31) is the same as FIG. 58(31), the explanation of FIG. 58(31) is used and the detailed explanation is omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 59(35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 59(1). However, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is
Necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of .

Next, in FIG. 59 (36), the power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not been paid out is started. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. In addition, the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the speaker (272, 277) resumes outputting the payout sound. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 59 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state during payout, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (L level closed detection). signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. Become. If power failure and power recovery occurs before the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed,
The speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice such as "Please confirm", and the output of the payout sound continues. The reason why the first sound is not output is to allow the store clerk to concentrate on confirming the payout after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state. Part or all of the payout sound may not be output during the payout period of the remaining medals after returning.

FIG. 60 is a table summarizing the states of related components when front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. In FIG. 60, the steps (1) to (5), (41), and (42) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

Since (1) to (5) in FIG. 60 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG. 55, (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 60(41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 60(5), is turned on again. The state shown in FIG. 60 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the OFF state to the ON state. , the set value display 293 displays "1" which is the current set value.
Also, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external common terminal board 248 start to light up. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. Also, the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a voice (“Confirming settings”) to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light white, and the top lamp 1
44T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to the white lighting.

In FIG. 60 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first game state during setting confirmation, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 60 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. That's what it means. In this case, the speaker (272,
277) outputs the first voice "Please check" instead of the voice "Confirming settings". Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the setting confirmation display, and also continues to display the first display. In the explanation in FIG. 60, the character display such as "Please confirm" which is an alert notification is called the first display, but the setting confirmation display is called the first display, and the first voice is the first display. In the example of FIG. 60, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 61 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. In FIG. 61, (1) to (5) are shown in each stage.
), (21), (22), (45) and (46) are attached, and time elapses in the order of the description of these symbols.

Since (1) to (5) in FIG. 61 are the same as (1) to (5) in FIG. 55, (1) to (5) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

(21) and (22) of FIG. 61 are the same as (21) and (22) of FIG. 55, so the description of (21) and (22) of FIG. Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 61 (45), the third stop operation is performed while the front door 102 is open, the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state changes to the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. Also, the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed".

In FIG. 61 (46), the front door 102 is closed and the detection signal (H
level signal) is no longer output (switches to an L level close detection signal). Figure 61 (4
The closing operation of the front door 102 in 6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second game state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the main control section 300 transmits the door close command to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please check." is output, but
Even if it is output, there is no problem at all, and rather there is an advantage that the control processing does not become complicated. In other words, the clerk understands the situation and is playing a game with a two-coin bet, and the third stop stage (Fig. 6)
1 (45)), the second display is displayed and the second sound is output, and furthermore, the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game to be started after this, The store clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game has transitioned to the second game state.

In the examples of FIGS. 55 to 61 described above, after the setting change processing is performed,
This is an example in which a closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the game state changes to the first game state. If the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting is changed, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has shifted to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. That is, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed without performing the setting change processing, the first sound is not output, but the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed after the reset switch 291 is pressed for a long time. A first voice may be output when the voice is heard. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first game state regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed.

FIG. 62 shows the state of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summary table. In FIG. 62, each stage is labeled from (50) to (59), and time elapses in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 62 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 1
44R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown, and at the bottom is an item of medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. The game state is always the second game state (same up to FIG. 66).

In FIG. 62 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. The setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external collective terminal board 248 are off. A display of the demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the top lamp 144T and the left side lamp 14 are displayed.
4L and the right side lamp 144R are illuminated in a demo pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 is illuminated in white. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181 . Hereinafter, a state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or retraction is referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 62 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open detection signal (H
level signal) is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door opening pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "the door is open". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, in a state where the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started.
The set value display 293 displays "1", which is the current set value, and the monitor LED starts lighting. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("Settings are being checked") to notify that the settings are being checked. Title panel lamp 164
is switched to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also switched to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155 . Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protruding state is referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, it is impossible to care for the medals from the medal slot 141. - 特許庁
That is, it is impossible to insert three medals, four or more medals, or one or two medals. In addition, the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is disabled. Furthermore, the operation of the start lever 135 and the settlement operation are not accepted, or are invalidated even if they are accepted.

In FIG. 62 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The setting value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. speaker (27
2,277) switches to "the door is open". On the effect image display device 157, display of the demonstration animation is started, and various lamps (164, 144T, 14
4L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start the demo pattern lighting. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is deactivated.

In FIG. 62 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding open/close piece is pushed down by hand, and the front door 102 is pseudo-closed so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect the open/close piece. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. There is no audio output such as "the door is open" from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 62 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is the ON operation in the state where the closed detection signal is output from the open sensor 294 . 62 (51), etc., the setting confirmation process is started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the front door 102 is open and the power is turned on. Strictly speaking, it starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. For this reason,
In FIG. 62 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 displays the demonstration animation. The display continues and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, setting key switch 2
81 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

In FIG. 62 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since it is not in the process of confirming settings, medals can be inserted.
A medal insertion sound is output from the speaker (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even when the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where bet operation, start operation, and settlement operation can be performed. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 62 (57), the hand holding down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, the opening sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece, and an open detection signal is output. Various lamps (16
4, 144T, 144L, 144R) all start the door open pattern lighting, and the speaker (2
72,277) outputs an audio warning "the door is open". Figure 22
In the state of 1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already on. Also, FIG. 62 (
In the state of 57), the bet number of 1 or more is also set. Setting key switch 28
1 is already on, and in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, open sensor 294
Even if an open detection signal is output from the
At 57, the normal background display continues. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (58), the payout button 134 is pressed to start the payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. again,
A "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 62 (59), the payout is completed. In the state of FIG. 62 (59), the setting key switch 281 has already been turned on, and the payout has been completed (the number of bets has not been set).
, and an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294 . In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . Also, the speaker (
272, 277) will also output a voice such as "Confirming settings".
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example of FIG. 62 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 62), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation in progress display). is not displayed), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure).
((59) in the same figure).

FIG. 63 summarizes the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 63, the steps (50) to (57), (61) and (62) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

In FIG. 63 as well, the same items as in FIG. 64 are shown as items of constituent elements (same as in FIG. 66).

(50) to (57) in FIG. 63 are the same as (50) to (57) in FIG.
0) to (57) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, and medals are inserted. is performed, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 63 (61), the start lever 135 is operated to start the game. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. Top lamp 144T, left side lamp 14
4L and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 63 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. 63 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state, the game is finished (the bet number is not set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. is in a state of In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . again,
A sound such as "Setting confirmation is in progress" is also output from the speakers (272, 277). The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144
T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 63), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays during setting confirmation). is not displayed), and the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game is finished, the setting confirmation process is started (indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) corresponds to the example.

62 and 63 are summarized, the setting key switch 28
1 is already on and an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, if the number of bets is not set, a setting confirmation process is started and the effect image display device is started. At 157, a setting confirming display is displayed.

FIG. 64 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 64, at each stage (
Reference numerals 1) to (3) and (71) to (78) are assigned, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

(1) to (3) in FIG. 64 are the same as (1) to (3) in FIG.
), and the detailed description is omitted here, the setting change process has started.

In FIG. 64 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as the state of FIG. 64(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 64 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also turned off while the power switch 244 remains off, and the power switch 244 is turned on in the following figure (73). Power switch 2
44 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 41 is started. First, initial setting at startup (step S1001) restores the state immediately before the power failure. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 has been turned off, the fact that the setting key switch 281 was on just before the power was cut off is stored, and the set value display 293 displays the setting just before the power cut off. A value of "1" is displayed. In addition, the sub-control unit side (400, 500) also returns the backed-up information when the power is cut off, and the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display, and the speaker (2
72, 277) outputs a voice such as "Confirming settings". All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in a game machine that does not store a backup when the power is cut off, the state immediately before the power cut-off is being changed. , a setting changing command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the sub-control unit side (400, 500) displays a setting checking display based on this setting changing command. is displayed, and a voice such as "Checking settings" is output.

As shown in the main control unit main process in FIG. 39, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) in FIG. 41 is executed only when power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, step S1005
is determined as No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 64 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 64(76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1
013) is started. In FIG. 64 (76), the set value display 293 displays the set value "1", and the monitor LED starts lighting. In addition, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs "Setting changing".
sound is output. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R
) all start lighting up. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 64 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Even if the setting value is determined, the monitor LED continues lighting because the setting key switch 281 remains on. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice such as "The setting is being changed", it may be configured to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed." Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 64 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the setting value display 293 is hidden. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the voice "Door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 65 shows a case where after the setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components; In this figure 65, (50) at each stage
.

(50) to (54) in FIG. 65 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG.
0) to (54) are used, and the detailed description is omitted here, but after the setting confirmation is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 65 (81), when the front door 102 is in a quasi-closed state, token insertion such as handling of tokens or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144
R begins to light up in a normal pattern. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals have been inserted, in FIG. 65 (82), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the opening sensor 294
, the setting confirmation process is not started, the set value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background. It continues and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). again,
Medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

(57) to (59) in FIG. 65 are the same as (57) to (59) in FIG.
Although the descriptions of 7) to (59) are used and detailed descriptions are omitted here, the pseudo-close of the front door 102 is completed, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. After that, the settlement operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example of FIG. 65 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 65), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.) A settlement operation is performed in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set ((58) in the same figure). The processing is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59
)) corresponds to the example.

FIG. 66 shows the configuration elements related to the case where the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game is played. is a table summarizing the states of In FIG. 66, (50) to (54), (8)
1), (82), (57), (61), and (62) are assigned, and time elapses in the order of the description of these symbols.

(50) to (54) in FIG. 66 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG.
0) to (54) are used, and the detailed description is omitted here, but after the setting confirmation is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

(81) and (82) of FIG. 66 are the same as (81) and (82) of FIG. 65, so the explanation of (81) and (82) of FIG. Although omitted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted. i.e. 1
The setting key switch 281 is turned on with the above bet numbers set.

Since FIG. 66 (57) is the same as FIG. 62 (57), the explanation of FIG. 62 (57) is used and detailed explanation is omitted here. Become.

(61) and (62) in FIG. 66 are the same as (61) and (62) in FIG. 63, so the explanation of (61) and (62) in FIG. Although omitted, the start lever 135 is operated to start a game, and when the game ends after the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 66 described above is an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the bet number of 1 or more is set, the game can be continued with the set bet number. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. Prioritize setting the number of bets,
The game with the number of bets is continued, and after the game is finished, the process (setting confirmation process) corresponding to the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 is started.

In the example of FIG. 66, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 66), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more (
The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), the game is started with the set number of bets ((61) in the figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the same figure).

65 and 66, when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the setting confirmation process is not started. The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the image display device 157, and a state different from the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, payout processing is completed or the game is finished), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, when the bet number of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the set value is not displayed on the set value display 293, and the bet number of 1 or more is set. When a state different from the state in which the bet number is set (a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, a state in which the payout process has been completed or a state in which the game has ended) value is displayed.

65(57) and FIG. 66(57), when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the number of bets of 1 or more is set (FIG. 65 (82), which corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIGS. 65(57) and 66(57), the opening sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened by releasing the hand holding down the opening/closing piece while the number of bets of 1 or more is set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation in progress display.

The items described above with reference to FIGS. 45 to 66 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150P for temporarily storing game balls is provided in the upper rear portion of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through a communication hole formed in the bottom of 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the back surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is rotatable by a dispensing motor, and the tank rail 154
The game balls that have passed through P and flowed down into the payout device 152P are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle, so that the temporarily retained game balls are released to the payout device 1.
It is configured to send out one by one to the lower side of 52P. That is, the dispensing device 152P
It is a type of ball feeding device that conveys game balls by applying a driving force to the game balls.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either a high or low signal is output to a payout control unit (not shown). A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail and reach an upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P satisfies a prescribed condition for giving. Based on this, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is awarded (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs A second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that
, a payout board case 172P that houses a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls and that has an error release switch 168P that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch board case 176P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs shooting, a power switch 178P that constitutes a power control unit that supplies power to various electrical game machines and that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk, and a power supply The main control unit 300 outputs a RAM clear signal by being operated at the time of power-on.
A power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P having a RAM clear switch 180P that outputs to and a CR interface section 186P that transmits and receives signals between the payout control section and the card unit are provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a character ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main substrate 156P. This pachinko machine 100
Even in P, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, at least one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities can be set. Processing is started. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P, and the clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while confirming this. Also, the main body 104
is opened, the power switch 178P is turned on, and then the setting change key 192P is turned on, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P. The setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on. , setting change key 192 at power-on
The configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when P is operated.

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 has settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. are displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as . Also, setting b is the most unfavorable set value for the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the set value for the player.

The character item ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156P and arranged inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. Note that the role product ratio/setting display device 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, and detects the opening of the main body (not shown). corresponds to the open sensor 294, and the setting change key 192
P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the character ratio/setting indicator 196P is the set value indicator 2.
93. Also, the main substrate 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 and the external centralized terminal board (not shown) are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. In addition, a liquid crystal display device and speakers used for various effects are also provided. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game frame is provided with a game frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
"A first gaming state [for example, a bet-2-bonus non-internal winning state or setting b is set] and a second gaming state [for example, a bet-2-bonus internal winning state or setting 1 is set. A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one game state out of a plurality of game states including the state],
A first notification [e.g., the first voice of "Please confirm" or turn off of the title panel lamp 164] with an executable notification means [e.g., the speaker (272, 277) or the title panel lamp 164] ,
A game machine comprising
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first game state. is a means,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it.

The first gaming state is a state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is the first number being betted and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internally elected state in which a lottery has been elected (the same shall apply hereinafter). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is won, and the second gaming state is a second gaming state that is greater than the first number. It may also be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the number of coins (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The second game state is a normal game state or an initial setting game state, and the first game state is a state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state [for example, a penalty bonus state,
The first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a bonus non-matching state, a state in which points or items have not been obtained, and the like. (same below).

A door is provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door is open, or an operation to close the door ( The same applies below).

The first notification is a notification suggesting the first gaming state or a notification to make the player aware of the first gaming state [for example, a notification saying "I am in the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be an alert notification that does not specify an alert target [for example, a notification such as "Please check"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes first notification means [for example, speakers (272, 277)], second notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164], and third notification means [for example, effect image display device 157] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the game state when the setting b is set may be the first game state, and in that case, the game mode may change during the game state with RT=game mode (the same applies below ).

Furthermore, instead of the game state control means, "game control means for controlling a game based on the setting of the first set value and a game based on the setting of the second set value ”, and the game executed based on the setting of the first set value (
The first game) may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game (second game) executed based on the setting of the second set value (the same applies below). Further, the first game state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second game state can be read as a state in which the second set value is set (hereinafter (same for

Also, in place of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain hand is internally won as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of bets, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not in the internal winning state" and the non-internal winning state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (same below). Also, the first game state can be read as the non-internally elected state, and the second game state can be read as the internally elected state (same below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] Game state control means [eg, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
and,
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called.

the reel is capable of starting to rotate before the certain operation is performed;
The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] Game state control means [eg, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
and,
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The reel is capable of starting to rotate before the certain operation is performed [
For example, FIG. 56 (22), FIG. 57 (22)],
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
In the case where power failure and power recovery occurs before the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating [for example, (25) to (26) in FIG. 57], the notification means 57 (27
)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] Game state control means [eg, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
and,
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the payout process in the payout means [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The payout means is means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed. It may be means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process started by a checkout operation after inserting medals,
The processing may be performed based on the result of the reel stop operation through the start operation after the medal insertion.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] Game state control means [eg, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
and,
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The payout means is means capable of starting payout processing before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 58 (31) or FIG. 59 (31)],
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
When power failure and power recovery occurs during the period of the payout process and before the certain operation is performed [for example, (35) to (36) in FIG. Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the processing [for example, FIG. 59 (37
)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained. It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] Game state control means [eg, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
and,
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, character display of "Please check"] [for example, FIG. 6)
],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. Further, even while the store clerk is performing maintenance to check whether the display on the display means is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The display means is means capable of starting display of the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is capable of starting the display of the first display while the first display is being displayed. may be means that may execute the first notification when is performed.

again,
"The gaming state control means, when a certain condition [for example, the condition that a bonus combination is won with a predetermined number of bets and the bonus combination is not won] is established, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state." A means for executing control to transition to a game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial setting.

again,
"The certain condition is a condition that includes the execution of one or more games[
For example, one or more games must be played to win the bonus combination],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

When the store clerk runs the game before the store opens, the player can start playing from the second game state.

The certain condition is that one or a plurality of games are executed with a predetermined number of bets;
It is a condition including winning a certain hand. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be met by winning a certain hand after playing a game with a predetermined number of bets. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain combination but not winning the certain combination. What has been described here also applies to the following.

again,
``The notifying means is a means for not executing the first notifying [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In many cases, the store clerk has already noticed the certain operation after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), so redundant notification can be avoided.

again,
``The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [for example, a second voice of 'Completed]'] when the first game state transitions to the second game state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By the second notification, it can be confirmed that the game state disadvantageous to the player has been resolved.

The second notification is a notification suggesting that the second game state has been entered or a notification suggesting that the game state is in the second game state [for example, a notification such as "second game state"]. There may also be an alert notification that does not specify the alert target [e.g., "Completed", "
It may be a notification saying "I'm back"] (the same applies below).

again,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
Setting change means for changing the set value that has been set to a new set value selected from [for example, C of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU 304],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process [for example, the process including operating the power switch 244, the setting key switch 281, etc., which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened] is completed. is an operation with
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first game state after the setting change process is started, when the game state is the first game state. is a means [for example, FIG. 55(6)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the player is still at a disadvantage in the first game state even though the setting change processing is started and the adjustment of the player's advantage degree is started, the notification means executes the first notification. , the first game state can be noticed by the person who performs the setting change.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is opened (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
``The notifying means is means capable of executing a third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 55 (3)] and before the certain operation is performed [for example, Figure 55 (
5)],
The third notification is a notification [for example, "
The door is open" or "The setting has been changed."
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

Even if the third notification is a notification that the setting change processing has ended or a notification that suggests that the setting change processing has ended [for example, a notification such as "The setting change has been completed"] Alternatively, it may be a notification about the state of the gaming machine [for example, a notification such as "the door is open"] (same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
A setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among [for example,
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player.

The game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game is finished, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is finished. good.

If the operation means is operated while medals have not been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, the game may not be started when the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no betting operation is performed.

The case where the operation means has been operated means the case where the setting confirmation process has not been executed. A setting change means for performing a setting change process for changing a setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, wherein the operation means It may also be a means to be operated when changing settings (same hereafter)
.

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
A setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among [for example,
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. )],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 66 (52)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor for detecting that the door has opened [for example,
open sensor 294], and the display means displays the first display when the operation means is operated while the sensor detects that the door is open [ For example, FIG. 62 (52)] means for not displaying the first display when the operation means is operated while the sensor is in a non-detection state [for example, FIG. 62 (55)] means may be

Also, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for players [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]
A setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among [for example,
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
operation means (for example, setting key switch 281) operated when confirming the setting; display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. )],
When the operation means is operated, the display means may display a first display [e.g., "setting confirmation in progress display] [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [
For example, FIG. 65 (82)], the settlement operation is performed in the first state [for example, FIG.
)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59)
],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes. Further, even when the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed.
Fraud can be discovered, and the fraudulent person can be exposed in some cases.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] for detecting that the door is opened are provided, and the display means indicates that the sensor indicates that the door is open. 62 (52)] for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is detecting the When the operation means is operated in the state of detection, the first display is not displayed [for example, FIG.
(55)] means.

again,
"Medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
a first passageway;
a second passageway [e.g., reservoir passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, a medal blocker 172] that sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into one of the first passage and the second passage;
with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266];
The medal blocker may distribute the medals inserted from the medal slot to the first passage when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG.
52)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

After operating the operating means, the game store clerk can check how the medals have passed. In addition, since the game cannot be started after the operation means is operated, the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake. The medal return path is a path leading to a medal ejection port [for example, medal ejection port 155].

The second path is a medal storage path [for example, the storage path 173], and medals passing through the medal storage path are stored in a bucket (storage tank) [for example, the bucket 181].

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The operation means is means that can be operated when the door is in the open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
``The operation means can be operated even in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. is a means that may be
The medal blocker sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operation means is operated in the second state [for example, FIG. 55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

A sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] is provided to detect that the door is open, the operation means is means that becomes operable by opening the door, and the second state is the It may also mean that the sensor is in a non-detection state.

Further, the medal blocker may sort the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second path when the operation means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 62(55)].

again,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the operating means is operated [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the operating means is being operated normally. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
``When the operation means is operated, a signal [for example, a hall computer] is sent to the outside [
For example, a transmission means capable of transmitting a setting key switch-on signal [for example, an external centralized terminal board 2
48]. 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
The display means is in a first state [for example, medal care or bet buttons 130-13
65 (81) or FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted such as operation 2], when the first operation [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed ( 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means The first display is displayed [eg FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)]
,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
The display means is in a first state [for example, medal care or bet buttons 130-13
66 (81) state in which medals have been inserted such as operation 2], when the first operation [for example, the operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first case ), the means for not displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 65 (82)
Or FIG. 66 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means The first display is displayed [eg, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is maintained after the first case. means not to display [for example, FIG. 65 (57) or FIG. 66 (57)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor for detecting that the door has opened [for example,
open sensor 294], and the second operation may be an operation of causing the sensor to detect that the door is opened.

Also, according to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]'];
setting value display means capable of displaying setting values [for example, setting value display 293];
, wherein the display means is the first display means in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), the first display is not displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout due to settlement operation or end of game with the bet amount set in the first state] (hereinafter referred to as "second ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 65 (
59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The setting value display means is means capable of displaying the setting value in the second case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The set value may be selected from a plurality of types of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display displayed during execution of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

note that,
"The display means is means for not displaying the setting value in the first case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with higher priority.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is open [for example, (52), (82), (52), (82) in FIG. 65]. is
A playground characterized by: ” was also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
"The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

again,
"Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying setting values,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player. For example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special combination or a big win, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may differ. Different (same below).

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the first operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
``When the first operation is performed, a transmitting means [eg, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [eg, a setting key switch ON signal] to an external device [eg, a hall computer]
] is provided. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the first operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to check from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
"An operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by an operation,
A gaming machine comprising setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying setting values,
The set value display means is means for displaying the set value when there is an ON operation [for example, FIG. 65 (52) or FIG. 66 (52)],
The ON operation is an operation to switch the operation means from the OFF state to the ON state,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In other words, the setting value display means is means for displaying the setting value and not displaying the setting value when the ON operation is performed.

Even if an unauthorized person illegally performs the ON operation during business hours, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized person from confirming the setting value.

A door and a sensor for detecting that the door is open, and the set value display means is operated when the ON operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door is open. and means for not displaying the set value when the operation means is operated while the sensor is in a non-detection state.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The ON operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is in an open state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
"The set value display means may display the set value when the operation means is in the OFF state [for example, FIG. 64 (73)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The setting value can be checked even when the operating means is in the OFF state, and the workability of the maintenance work by the store clerk may be improved.

When power is restored while the operating means is in the ON state and the power is restored after switching the operating means to the OFF state, the display means displays the set value display.

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the ON operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the ON operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
"Transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the ON operation is performed.
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the ON operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

68 to 167, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 68 to 167 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 68 to 167 in principle.
In the explanation using FIG. 167, the symbols shown in FIGS. 68 to 167 are prioritized.

In the slot machine explained below, information equivalent to the number of real medals (number of virtual medals)
, so-called medal-less configuration is adopted, but in the following explanation, this information is described as "
"Number of medals" shall be used.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are applied thereto, a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received to start rotation of the reels. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the combination of symbols based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and finished. This is a gaming machine that advances a series of games that ends without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if they do not match.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention.
A main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 are provided. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the lower symbol of the left reel, and the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the reel 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel.
The symbols displayed on the upper stage are called right reel upper stage symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 are called right reel middle stage symbols, and the symbols displayed on the right reel 112 are called right reel lower stage symbols, respectively. Each symbol 110 to 112 is displayed on each reel 1 through a display window 113.
10 to 112 are displayed three vertically, for a total of nine. and each reel 110
By rotating 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Also, the slot machine 10 shown in FIG.
0, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. If the book is valid and 3 medals are bet,
The 5 lines to which the right lower winning line and the right upper winning line are added are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the bottom right pay line. Five lines, ie, the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. It is a lamp that informs the player. Game medal insertable lamp 12
4 is a lamp for informing that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When the button is pressed once, one sheet is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of two sheets) is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of three sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are thrown. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. It should be noted that, hereinafter, the expression "given to the player" may be used in the same sense as "payout to the player". The game information display 126 and the number-of-payouts display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, by operating the bet button 130 or 132, the start lever 1
Actuation of 35 causes reels 110-112 to start spinning. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 13
8 and a right stop button 139 are provided. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is the "forward pushing operation order" or simply The stop operation is called "forward push", the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110. referred to as "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A luminous body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the stop buttons 137 to 13
When the operation of 9 is possible, the player can be notified by lighting the light emitter.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information about the order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 . This indication monitor 125 also has a 7-segment (SEG)
Consists of a display. For example, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138,
When instructing to operate the right stop button 139 in order, the instruction monitor 125 displays "
"1" is displayed, and "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125 when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 138 in this order.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (the number of bets) to the medal number control section 350 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, as shown in FIG.
3 is a device for displaying the number of game medals recorded by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The count button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the production device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. This production device 160 includes a shutter (
Shielding device) 163 and effect image display device 157 (
When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). side). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular,
The whole is configured so that the player can visually recognize it. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

A lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is sometimes called a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100 .

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. the other one is,
This is a membership card, which is a game storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member of a game arcade. An IC card is used as the card.

Valuable value is stored in the card. Valuable values stored in the card include "number of medals possessed" and "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (credits)". The “number of game medals (number of credits)” is data that can be used for setting the number of bets and can be converted into “number of medals possessed”. The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "monetary balance" of the card or the "number of medals possessed". In addition, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning prizes. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) electromagnetically stored. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The “number of medals possessed” is a value obtained by converting the “number of game medals (number of credits)” into a numerical value.
This "number of medals possessed" is stored so as to be identifiable by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of owned medals", which can be stored in the card. The "number of owned medals" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of owned medals installed in the game arcade.

On the front side of the lending machine 700, a banknote insertion slot 701 for inserting banknotes is provided at the top, and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting cards is provided at the bottom. A card reader/writer receives a member card or visitor card inserted into the card slot 702, and reads information stored in the card. The bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified for authenticity and bill type, and the denomination of the bill is stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance".

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701 . This information display 7
03 is a display for providing operation guidance of the lending machine 700, status of the slot machine 100, etc. by characters and images. It should be noted that the surface may be composed of a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed items with a finger.

Under the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two stages, one above the other. The "money balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 is displayed on the money balance display 705 as the amount. On the other hand, the medal balance display 706 displays the "number of medals" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702.
is displayed as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided at the central portion of the lending machine 700 in the vertical direction. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation for withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 and obtaining the "number of game medals." Specifically, when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible.
By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the money to be withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Also, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" corresponding to the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing the "number of medals" stored in the card. good. A card return button 708 is operated by the player when the game ends, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card slot 702 and ejecting the card. is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is the card insertion slot 702
After subtracting the number of medals converted into the "number of game medals" from the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card inserted in the card, the number of game medals counted by the counting operation is added to the number of medals. Each of the data of "monetary balance", "number of medals", and "number of game medals" described above is stored in the order of "money balance" and "number of medals" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals". will be converted. In this way, the "number of medals possessed" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment converts the "number of medals"
Since it is possible to set the number of bets using the number of game medals,
To provide a new slot machine that does not use real medals without confusing players accustomed to conventional slot machines in which credits are secured by inserting the real medals and the number of bets is set using the credits. It is possible to provide a game by a slot machine (management game machine).

Although this specification does not mention "the number of stored medals", this "the number of stored medals" is the number of owned medals deposited in the game hall rather than being stored in the card. In the game arcade, the number of medals acquired by the player in the game is managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. number" may be managed. When both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, the "number of owned medals" is preferentially withdrawn. again,
Both the "number of medals possessed" and the "number of medals saved" are sent to the host server (intermediate management terminal 8 shown in FIG. 72).
10 or management server 820) in association with the card number. In the case of the visitor card, the "number of medals possessed" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals possessed" may be stored in the host server in association with the card number. When the card number is stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the host server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and ejected. As for the "monetary balance", the card (membership card, visitor card) is directly written and ejected. The timing at which the "number of medals possessed" is stored in a card (member card, visitor card) or the host server is, for example, the timing at which the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the card may be stored collectively when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals possessed" stored in the lending machine 700 is once stored in the hall management terminal 800 as accumulated medals. When the player reinserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 on the same day as the card is returned, only the "number of medals possessed" for that day, which was once stored as accumulated medals, is returned to the lending machine. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals possessed" to enable a game to be played.

Also, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR sensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by a game hall attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.
It was possible to withdraw the "monetary balance" stored on the card by operating , but it may be possible to withdraw the "number of medals" recorded on the card and convert it to "number of game medals". . Specifically, a coin holding button is provided in the lending machine 700, and when the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of holding medals", an LED lamp built into the holding medal button can be pulled out. Lights up in a manner that represents By operating the possess medal button in this state, if the number of possess medals is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 50), the predetermined number (eg, 50) of "game medal count" is added. In addition, the above-described number of medals acquired by the player in the game is stored in the card as "points" during the day, or managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. When there is a "score", the built-in LED lamp of the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
It has a game control unit 302 for controlling the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 for controlling the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of game value control means. In the game control unit 302, C
PU 304, ROM 306 storing control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery for winning combination, reel pattern arrangement and stop position, etc., and R for temporarily storing data.
AM 308, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown)
is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and in this regard, the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 50, which will be described later, may be used.
The same is true for 0. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. CPU 304 determines an interrupt request for each interrupt time.
Send to The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 controls 0 to 65 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown).
Equipped with a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value within the range of 535, and a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 starts game control (starts the main control unit main process described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 activates each bet button 13 at each interrupt time.
0, 132, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, checkout button 13
4 states are monitored. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process of electronically inserting medals electronically stored in the medal number control section 350 as medals to be inserted into a game is executed. When it detects that the start lever 135 has been turned on, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit. The random number generating circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal count control section 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls various sensors 318 (
The state of the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is also monitored. Optical sensor for left reel 110, middle reel 111
, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112, each reel 110-112
is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base, and becomes L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the motors 110m to 112m (Fig. 7) provided for the reels 110 to 112.
0), a driving circuit 324 for driving display devices such as an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127, various lamps 336 (
A winning line display lamp 120, an announcement lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, and a game start lamp 121 are provided with a driving circuit 326 for driving them.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, set values are set to give different degrees of advantage to the players. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. The game control unit 302 includes a setting change button 175 that is operated when changing the setting value.
is connected.

In addition, the information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300
, through this information output circuit 328, the external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 72)
The game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output to the information input circuit 650 provided in the slot machine 100 .

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 respectively.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-controller 400, the first sub-controller 4
00 cannot transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 .

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also has a CPU 354 and a ROM 3
56, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 362 for measuring time and number of times. CPU 304 and CPU
354 are provided on the same substrate and connected via a buffer IC. This will
By causing the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, the ROM 356 and the RAM 35
CPU 354 is allowed to use ROM 356 and RAM 358 without using 8,
Do not use ROM 306 and RAM 308 . A WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. The interrupt request is sent to the CP every this interrupt time.
Send to U354. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. This medal number control section 350 interrupts at 0.745 ms (medal number control section timer interrupt processing described later).
to run. Further, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also includes a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
U354 also starts medal count control (starts medal count control unit main processing, which will be described later) when a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit.

A basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is connected to a game medal number display device 170 composed of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171 and a game medal number clear button 172 .

In addition, the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is also connected to the lending machine 700 via a lending machine connection terminal board 790 . The medal count control section 350 performs two-way communication with the lending machine 700 .

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302 . The game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350 . That is, the communication between the medal count control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also two-way communication.

Also, the medal count control unit 350 stores the “game medal count” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 . Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the “game medal count” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. As the addition processing, processing based on a payout command transmitted from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command transmitted from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 is given. On the other hand, as subtraction processing, there are counting processing based on operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on an input command transmitted from the game control section 302 .

Note that the number-of-game-medals clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if the number of game medals remains "2" and the player is absent, "
It became difficult to judge whether or not the player who left 2" had the intention to continue playing, and other players could not start playing, but it was possible to clear the number of game medals by the operation of the store clerk. If so, another player can be welcomed early. When the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared.
If the number of game medals is 2 or less, the game is cleared, and if the number is 3 or more, the counting button 17
Counting may be performed in the same manner as if 1 were manipulated. If the counting button 171 fails to recognize that the counting button 171 has been operated, the ``number of game medals'' cannot be converted into the ``number of medals possessed,'' and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. However, if the counter can be counted by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the store clerk, there is no cost increase. It should be noted that clearing and counting may not be determined by judging the number of game medals, and clearing and counting may be determined according to the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172 . For example, it is cleared when pressed for a short time, and counted when pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, it is cleared when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, and is counted when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time. It is less likely that you will make a mistake in operation, and you can easily choose between clearing and counting.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. First sub-controller 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command.
404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling lighting patterns of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. Sound source IC418
controls audio output from amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . Sound source IC 418 stores S-ROM (sound R
OM) are connected, and audio data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from speakers 272 and 277 . Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the rendering means.

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of effect means.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404
The state of the shutter sensor 428 is monitored for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the effect device 1 including display control of the effect image display device 157 .
60 various controls. It should be noted that the second sub-control unit 500, for example, the effect image display device 157
It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as a control unit that controls the display of , and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Also, the second sub-controller 500 includes a VDP 516 (video display processor)
, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 70 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 109, and an effect movable body unit 160U.
The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V alternating current is applied to the power supply control board 252B by 24V.
V DC voltage, 12V DC voltage, and 5V DC voltage. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 70 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. In addition, power supply control 5V monitor L
ED5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC are also shown. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an L for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while 24V DC current is flowing.
The ED lamp and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. A power switch 244 is also shown.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

Note that the main control board 300B also has voltages of 24 V and 5 V, like the first sub-control board 400B.
may be supplied in separate harnesses. Also, the main control board 3
You may supply 24V and 5V with a common harness like 00B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . Also, the main control board 3 shown in FIG.
00B also has a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LE connected to the 5V power line.
D5ML is also shown. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or flashes while a 24V direct current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LE
D5ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. ing.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1. 10
9 is connected by a harness MR2, and the reel motor drive IC 3 is also connected.
22i and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 109 includes a reel motor drive IC 322i
Each of the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the harness MR
1 to 3, respectively, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel
becomes drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the side of the reel unit 109 are combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the side of the main control board 300B.
may be made into one connector and connected by one common harness. However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector S of the first sub-control board 400B
C4 is connected by harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, the first
The sub-control 24V monitor LED connected to the 24V power supply line is also provided on the sub-control board 400B.
24SL and secondary control 24V capacitor 24SC and secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line are also shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL is 24V
The sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights or blinks while a DC current of 5V is flowing. be. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has
A basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 69 is configured, and an integrated circuit that configures other drive circuits 424, 426 and the like is also mounted.

Connector S to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i of the first sub-control board 400B is connected
C3 and connector DC1 of production movable body unit 160U are connected by harness SD.
In the effect movable body unit 160U, 24
A direct current of V and a direct current of 5V are supplied through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the effect movable body unit 160U can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 has a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG.
Although not shown in FIG. 70, the second sub-control board is also supplied with direct current of 24 V and direct current of 5 V from the power supply control board 252B through a harness (not shown). Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 connect the harnesses MR1 to MR1.
3 are electrically connected. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 16
0U is electrically connected by harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power failure state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter.
). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 (the power control 24V monitor LE
D24PL, power control 5V monitor LED5PL, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor L
ED5SL) is also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 70) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and flows from the reel driving IC 322i to the 24V power line and 5.
It is supplied to each of the V power supply lines. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. Main control 24V monitor LE
D24ML is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML is connected to the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5
Since the resistance value is adjusted by the MR, it is lit by an induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. Power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is connected between the power control 24V and ground.
A V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. Power supply control 24V monitor LED24P
L is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is connected to the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5P.
Since the resistance value is adjusted by R, it is lit by an induced current. here,
LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B and LEDs (2) on the power supply control board 252B
4PL, 5PL) are emitting light from a plurality of substrates. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further passes through the harness PS1 to the first
It flows into the sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power supply line from the connector SC1. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5 is connected between the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground.
SR is provided. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is connected to the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 2
Lighting is caused by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by 4SR. again,
The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LED (24
ML, 5ML), the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line.
continues lighting. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, the harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (
or insufficient insertion), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the
None of the monitor LEDs shown at 0 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, any monitor LED or the main control 24V monitor LED2 shown in FIG.
If 4ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up, it is possible to suspect an abnormality in the harness MR1 or poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected, or if the connector MC5 or/and the connector PC
2, if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24
Although the V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up, the sub control 24V
Monitor LED24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED2
4PL and power control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not illuminated. As a result, left reel 110
is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5
Although ML is lit, the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED
If 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not lit, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2.

In addition, the main control board 300B is connected to the power supply control board 25 during cleaning, maintenance, or in the manufacturing stage.
2B, by manually rotating the left reel 110, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B can be turned on.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected, or if the connector PC3 or/and the connector S
If the connection to C1 is not normal, only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 will not light up when the left reel 110 is manually rotated. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
If only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up, there is a problem with the harness PS1 or the connector PC3.
, SC1 may be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Monitor L
Only ED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the
If only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described. The same is true when rotating. Also, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LE
D becomes brighter. For example, left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 1
12 simultaneously causes the monitor LED to illuminate brighter than if only the left reel 110 were manually rotated.

In addition, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub-control 2
4V monitor LED24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LE
Even LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs such as D24PL and power control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that emit light when an error occurs, signal monitoring LEDs, etc.) If the left reel 110 is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 5V power supply line, it will emit light when the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power failure state unless there is an electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 68 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (
70), a current (induced current) is generated by the back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. Also, the first sub-control board 400
The induced current that has flowed into B also passes through the harness PS2 and flows into the power supply control board 252B,
It is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power supply line. Power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL also
Since the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR, the LED is lit by an induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24
Since the resistance value is adjusted by PR, it is lit by the induced current, and the power supply control 5
The V monitor LED 5PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LED (2
4PL, 5PL), the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B.

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, any monitor LED, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5 shown in FIG.
If SL does not light up, an abnormality in the harness SD or poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is broken, or if the connector SC1 or/and the connector P
If it is not connected to C3 normally, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 2
The 4V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but power supply control 2
The 4V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. In addition, the harness PS2
However, if the wire is broken or the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4 are not properly connected, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24S
L and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected, or if the connector PC2 or/and the connector MC
5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5M of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
Only L does not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 71 shows the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 1 shown in FIG.
09 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the terminals. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 70 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 71, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. Main control board 300B and reel unit 10 shown in FIG.
9, a reel relay board 902B is shown.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also, the connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected
and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, the connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and the connector R of the reel unit 109
A connector RRR3 is also provided to which a harness MR32 connected to C3 is connected.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 71, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, if normal, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED
A monitor LED such as 5ML lights up. However, the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109
21, If MR32 is disconnected or not connected properly, main control 24V monitor LE
Monitor LEDs such as D24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 71, the provision of the reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and the number of connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. is becoming more sexual. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, and the shutter 163 are described as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and may be motor-driven movable bodies.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible. These light emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor and is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, in order to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power failure state,
Although the adjusting resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used, any means that can adjust the impedance may be used, and is not limited to the adjusting resistors. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

In addition, the configuration described above is
light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state to drive the motor, and receiving a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 72 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the gaming system S has a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, a lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. The rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it has storage means.

Hall management terminal 800 is a computer separate from hall computer 600.
It is installed in each of the two game halls (halls) H1, H2, . Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100 , the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700 .
To the hall management terminal 800, information about the number of medals (counting information and lending information) performed between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 and information about the operating state of the slot machine 100 are input. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided for overall management of the gaming system 1, and includes information on the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Management server 820 is connected to hall management terminals 800 of many halls via intermediate management terminals 810, and information obtained by communicating with hall management terminals 800, that is, information on the number of medals, slot Information such as the operating state of the machine 100 is also managed.

<<Communication sequence and communication contents>>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 .
The game control unit 302 sends a game control unit command (
Game control state command, game control priority command) is transmitted. On the other hand, the medal count control section 35
0 transmits a medal count control command (medal count control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Also, in the medal number control unit 350,
A response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

Communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, and the medal number control unit 350
and the rental machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 73(a) is roughly divided into advantageous state information, setting state information,
Three pieces of status information are included, such as front door status information. The advantageous state information includes information (RB information) indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB, information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It consists of information (AT information) indicating whether or not. The setting state information includes information indicating whether or not the setting state is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. information). The front door state information is stored in the front door 10
2 becomes information (door open information) indicating whether or not it is in the open state. Note that the AT state is a game state in which auxiliary functions such as notification of the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of symbols to be aimed and stopped are activated so that the player can obtain advantageous results.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) includes total inserted number information, total payout number information, MY counter value information, total role payout number information, continuous role total payout number information, number of games played information, role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total inserted number information is information representing the accumulated number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The total payout number information is information representing the cumulative number of payout medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power is turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which the order of stop operations for internally won hands is notified, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the number of net increase in medals after shifting to this state. The information on the total payout number of the accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous accessory total payout number information is information representing the payout number of medals due to the operation of the RB accumulated since the power was turned on. The number-of-games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role ratio, continuous role ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructed role ratio, role state ratio) for evaluating the gambling nature of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c) includes two types of information, ie, game control section information and medal count control section information. The game control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the game control section 302, the maker code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control section 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 74, from the left, the first sub-control section 400, the game control section 302, the medal number control section 350
, and a rental machine 700 are shown.

First, before explaining the game control state command, the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 7
00 will be explained. A token amount control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700 , and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the token number control section 350 and the lending machine 700 . Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 takes 300 ms.
done in cycles.

As shown in FIG. 74, the game machine information notification and the count notification are transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . In addition, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 , and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control section 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700 .

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the details of communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the data structure of messages exchanged in communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for the count notification, and the lending serial number for the lending notice and the lending reception result response notice. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when reaching 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. In the data part,
Various types of data are stored, and the checksum stores the lower 1 byte of the sum of the data from the message length to the data part.

FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of the game machine, such as pachinko type game machine, reel type game machine, and arrange ball game machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described with reference to FIG. The game machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing the details of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information.

The information on the number of game medals is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350 .

The information on the number of inserted medals is the number of inserted medals, and the number of returned medals when there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 68) is operated. Minute information (-3 to 3 sheets). That is, the medal count control section 3
It is information based on the information on the number of medals inserted and the information on the number of settlements included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to 50 .

The paid-out medal number information is information representing the number of paid-out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on information on the number of payout medals included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 73(a) described using FIG. In addition, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error state information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 76(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b), the medal count control state commands, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error generation command).

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. The medal number control disconnection is an error when the game control unit 302 detects the disconnection of the medal number control unit 350, and the game control disconnection is
Conversely, this is an error when the medal count control section 350 detects disconnection of the game control section 302 . The game order abnormality is an error that the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error that the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is out of the range of 0 to 15 sheets. That is, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of coins for one payout is fifteen. The settlement number mismatch is an error when the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is equal to or greater than the input number. Chip ID number disagreement is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control section information shown in FIG. 73(c) is different from the previous information. Medal number control RAM error
This error indicates that the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 is defective. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error such that a lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state, which will be described later in detail. 76(b), all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. Also, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

The gaming machine fraud information includes setting state information and front door information shown in FIG. 73(a) described using FIG. It contains information, a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected, and the like.

The information on the number of game information is the information on the current bet amount and the information on the payout amount. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. The current bet number is included in the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. bet is the current bet value. Also, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the number of payouts is the value of the number of payouts included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 75(b), 300
The gaming machine information notification transmitted at ms intervals contains the gaming machine information of the code designated by the gaming machine information type. That is, when the value of the game machine information type is 0, the game machine performance information,
When the value of the game machine information type is 1, the game machine installation information is stored, and when the value of the game machine information type is 2, the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (for example, 180 seconds), The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time period (eg, 60 seconds), and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified at the shortest third time period (eg, 300 ms of notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hall control/fraud monitoring information with the highest number of notifications.

FIG. 75(c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the count notification is sent within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 99 to be described later. Also, although the details will be described later, the count button 171 shown in FIG.
is pressed once, the number of medals to be counted increases by one, and when the counting button 171 is pressed a plurality of times until the cycle of 300 ms arrives, the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the number of medals to be counted. .
On the other hand, when the cycle of 300 ms arrives while the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more, the number of sheets to be counted is 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet, or 50 sheets can be set at once. However, if the number of counted medals exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the number of counted medals. The medal number information is information representing the number of medals to be counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The number of counted accumulated medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. FIG. 75(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending notification sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 at intervals of 300 ms.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control section 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. In the medal count control unit 350, FIG.
01, the lending notification interval timer set to 170 ms monitors whether or not the lending notification has been sent within 170 ms. Rental machine 700 shown in FIG.
When the loan button 707 is operated, the "monetary balance" of the card reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 100
0 yen) or more, the number of medals corresponding to a predetermined amount (for example, 50) becomes the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals corresponding to the operation of the loan button 707 in this way. It should be noted that the predetermined amount and the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount can be set in the lending machine 700 in advance.

FIG. 75(e) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control section 350 to the lending machine 700. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the medal count control unit 350
Then, if the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, or if the RAM 358
is less than the threshold for lending (for example, 15000 medals), or
It determines whether or not counting processing is being performed, etc., and decides whether the loaned medal number reception result is normal or abnormal. This receipt result is sent to the lending machine 700 in the lending receipt result response.

Next, the game control state commands that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

FIG. 77 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. FIG. 77 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms, setting state information (setting change information, setting confirmation information)
is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms elapses, a command representing front door state information (door open information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 13H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 14H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of payouts in 3 bytes (total number of payouts information) is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 16H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 17H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 batches of 1 byte each and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. i.e.
When 2.98 ms has passed after the first byte is sent with the command type whose upper byte is 19H,
When 2.98 ms has passed after the second byte is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte being 1AH,
The upper byte is 1BH and the 3rd byte of the command type is transmitted.

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of payouts of the role product in 3 bytes (information on the total number of payouts of the role product) is divided into three 1-byte portions three times at intervals of 2.98 ms. Send with That is, the upper byte is the command type of 1CH, and the 1st byte is transmitted.
. After 98 ms has passed, the second byte is transmitted with the command type of 1DH in the upper byte, and 2
. When 98 ms has passed, the third byte of the command type with the upper byte being 1EH is transmitted.

Then, when 2.98 ms elapses, information representing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (continuous bonuses total payout number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms elapses, information representing the number of games in 2 bytes (number of games information)
is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 22H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 23H is transmitted.

Then, after 2.98 ms, the role ratio monitor information is changed to 2.98 ms over 5 commands.
Transmit at intervals of s. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits the information indicating the role ratio, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information indicating the continuous role ratio with the command type of the upper byte of 26H, and the advantageous section ratio is sent with the command type with the upper byte of 26H. and the upper byte is 27
The command type of H is used to transmit the information representing the instruction-included role product ratio, and the command type of the upper byte is 28H to transmit the information representing the role product state ratio. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has passed, the game control unit information is changed to 2.98 over 15 commands.
Transmit at an interval of ms. That is, the information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 by 4 bytes is divided into 4 times by 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, the information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, the information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 8 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, it returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 77 are repeatedly transmitted one by one at intervals of 2.98 ms. In addition, when there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

FIG. 78 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control state command is also a 16-bit command, and the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicate the command type, and the lower byte indicates the content. FIG. 78 also shows command offsets used for transmission. The medal count control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information, and may include other information.

Next, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358
is divided into 1-byte upper and lower 1-byte information and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the upper byte of the command type is 02H, and the lower 1 byte is transmitted.
. After 96 ms has passed, the upper byte of the command type with 03H in the upper byte is transmitted.

Then, when 5.96 ms elapses, information indicating the counted number of sheets (counted number of sheets information) is transmitted.
. When 96 ms elapses, information indicating the number of rented sheets (rented number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained using FIG. 76(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal count control state command shown in FIG. 78 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, when there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms will be described.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "
Information representing the number of game medals, information representing the number of counted medals, information representing the number of loaned medals, and the like are included. The information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the number of counted tokens, and the information representing the number of loaned tokens are the information transmitted from the medal count control section 350 by the medal count control state command.

Various processing commands are also transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to setting value changes, a setting change end command including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and the number of input sheets. a bet command including a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed; an effect information command including effect information; a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been received; Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, game information commands including game information, payout start commands representing the start of payout, and the like. Errors in the error generation command and the error cancellation command include, in addition to errors indicated by the error codes described with reference to FIG.
It includes a door open error in which the front door 102 is opened, a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, and the like.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350. As shown in FIG.

The game control priority command is a command transmitted with priority over the game control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again if there is a retransmission request from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command. Drawing 80 (a) is a figure showing the details of a game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350, the medal number control section 35
There are two types: one in which a response command is returned from 0, and another in which the medal number control state command is continued without this response command being returned. The former game control priority command is called a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is a game control priority command 2.
called. FIG. 79 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insertion command, and a settlement command. The payout command is a command type whose upper byte is 04H, and the number of payouts (0 to 15
), then a command serial number with a command type of 05H in the upper byte, and finally a checksum with a command type of 06H in the upper byte. That is, in the transmission of the payout command, three commands are transmitted continuously.

The input command transmits the number of inserted sheets (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of which the upper byte is 07H, then transmits the command serial number with a command type of which the upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type of which the upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when an input command is transmitted.

For the settlement command, the number of sheets to be settled (0 to 3 sheets) is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0AH, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0BH, and finally the command type with the upper byte of 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when the settlement command is transmitted.

When receiving the game control priority command 1, the medal count control section 350 shown in FIG. 79 transmits a response command.

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG.

The response command is sent in response to the payout command (payout response), in response to the input command (input response), and in response to the settlement command (
settlement response). The response command has a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the value of the command type. The payout response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request for the payout command. Here, normal corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold value (for example, 16383) due to payout.

The input response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the input command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to completion of loading, and abnormal corresponds to failure of loading or invalidity of loading.

The settlement response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-request of the settlement command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the settlement threshold value (for example, 16383) due to settlement. The settlement threshold is the same value as the payout threshold described above.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, R
It includes an AM clear command and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and is a command that includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 76(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and the RAM 308 normality determined by the game control unit 302 or the RAM 308 defect determined by the game control unit 302 is included.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type with the upper byte of 03H.
3) is a command containing information representing 3).

《Pattern arrangement》
Each reel 110 to 112 is provided with a predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types. The slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In the game, an internal winning combination is determined by lottery at the start of the game, and a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination is possible in the game. Depending on the combination, the result of internal winning may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of game status》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the state changes to change the degree of advantage to improve the interest of the game.

《Overview of processing》
Processing of the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the present embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual number of medals) is used without using actual medals. number” shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter, which will be described later) are initialized. , permits the WDT 314 to operate, sets initial values, and the like. note that,
When the setting is changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, when it is determined that the backup data in the RAM 308 is abnormal in the recovery process, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been completed normally is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S102, medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (lottery for a combination) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. , to determine internally elected hands. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302 .

In step S106, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, reels 110-112
reaches a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped. It should be noted that the minimum time required for one game (4.
1s) and suppress gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. All reels 110-1
12 stops, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 . In step S109, a medal awarding process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, details of the medal insertion/start lever reception processing (step S102) in the game control unit main processing of FIG. 82 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, an error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed.
The process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interrupt time standby process is executed, and step S100
Proceed to 4.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If the operation of the setting key is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if the operation of the setting key is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, processing for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350 . If the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S1008 to
If the L signal is off, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever reception processing is terminated.

In step S1010, the current bet number (current bet number) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number). If the current bet number is smaller than the startable number, step S1
The process proceeds to 011, and if the current bet number is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, processing during medal insertion is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the processing during medal insertion will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is the start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is terminated.

Next, details of the processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing of FIG. 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. This figure is a flow chart of the process during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted, step S110
2, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, a checkout button process is executed, and this process during medal insertion ends. Details of the settlement button process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not any of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been operated. If the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has not been accepted, the processing during medal insertion ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1106.
This requested number is a value used for setting the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350 .

In step S1106, the current bet amount and the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current bet amount is not equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.
In step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current bet amount from the maximum bet amount is set as the required number of coins, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation
is the one bet button 130 or not. If the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have accepted the operation are the one bet button 130, step S1109.
otherwise proceed to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

From step S1105 to step S1109, the requested number of coins becomes 0 if the current bet number is the maximum bet number. Also, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, if the maximum bet amount is 3 and the current bet amount is 0, the requested number is 3, and if the current bet amount is 1. , the requested number is 2, and if the current bet number is 2, the requested number is 1. In addition, when the bet-one button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the requested number of bets is 1.
becomes.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is an input command.

In step S1111, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed.
Proceed to 1112. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is waited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number is added to the current bet amount, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this processing during medal insertion ends.

Next, details of the checkout button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, this settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is the settlement command.

In step S1205, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal count control unit is executed.
Proceed to 1206. The details of the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", step S1207
, and if the response result is not "normal", this settlement button processing is terminated.

At step S1207, the current bet number is set to 0, and the settlement button process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion processing of FIG. ), and variation information transmission processing (step S1605) addressed to the medal count control unit in the medal awarding processing of FIG. Figure 8
4, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit in FIGS.
It is a flow chart of step S1205 and step S1605).

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control section 350, but if it is not overwritten (no response), it indicates "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is some kind of error status, this processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (a value corresponding to 100 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the response wait timer, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process advances to step S1307.
If the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the process of transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. The details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal count control section 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

At step S1310, if the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the reception result is other than that, step S1311.
proceed to

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal number control section 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 87, the details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control section of FIG. 86 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1405, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command serial number is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1409, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, priority command transmission processing (step S1014) to the medal count control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing of FIG. 83 and priority command transmission to the medal count control unit in the triple command transmission processing of FIG. Command transmission processing (steps S1403, S14
06, step S1409) will be described in detail. 83 and 87, priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406
, step S1409).

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S1502,
If the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section, and this priority command transmission processing addressed to the medal number control section ends.

Next, using FIG. 89, details of the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 82 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the payout number is set as the requested number, and step S160
Proceed to 4.

In step S1603, an error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed.
The process advances to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a variation information transmission process (FIG. 86) to the medal number control unit is executed.
The process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the response to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", step S1607
, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process ends.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit,
The process advances to step S1601.

<< Game control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the game control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part timer interruption process.

The game control unit 302 is provided with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49 ms in this embodiment). load processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, C
It performs processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of the PU 304 to the stack area.

In step S202, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial set value (32 in this embodiment).
. 8 ms) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing),
WDT 314 periodically (in this embodiment, 1.49, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt
ms) restart.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, the medal count control unit 350
It performs processing to deal with various errors such as an abnormality in the communication state with the device and an abnormality in the open/closed state of the door.
If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, a medal count control command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S207, game control command transmission processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, effect command transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main processing of the game control unit 302, timer interrupt processing, etc. are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. ~ 14 are command types (for example, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 to 139 operation acceptance) First to third press commands, first to third stop commands associated with stopping the reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands accompanying medal payout processing, game state update commands, etc.), bits 0 to Reference numeral 10 consists of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the game control unit 302, and is included in the output schedule information Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities and medal payout abnormalities is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, various lamps 336 and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, 1
A security command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 every 00ms period. This security command contains VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. , information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, subtracting the game interval timer,
Such processing is executed to update various timers according to respective time units.

In step S212, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal has been received (power cutoff has been detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal has not been received (power cutoff has not been detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, a timer interrupt termination process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. Then, it returns to the game control part main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power supply status is set to "normal".

Next, referring to FIG. 91, error monitoring processing (
The details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of step S203), will be described. Fig. 90
2 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of error monitoring processing (step S203) in .

First, in step S2001 executed first, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, step S2005.
proceed to

In step S2003, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process ends. step S2
At 006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is some error status, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 92, the details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG.

First, in step S2101 executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is OFF, this medal count control command reception processing is terminated.

In step S2102, based on the command received from the medal count control section 350, the RA
The information in M308 is updated. These commands include six types of medal count control state commands (Fig. 78) and response commands (Fig. 80(b)), and the command type can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the upper byte of the received command is referenced to identify the command type, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is some error status, this medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command containing an error code (an error code in the medal count control section 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal number control section 350, an error code indicating normality is set in the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, using FIG. 93, the details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be described. The figure is a flow chart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, step S2202
, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 77) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 77, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in order from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350 . The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the medal number control section 350 sends the transmission content.
Set in the destination send buffer.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, the last command (command transmitted 41st) is a check generated based on the transmission contents of the commands up to that point. It has become Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and the command offset is 41.
Then, the updated checksum is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S2203 and S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350 are output to the medal number control section 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal number control section 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control section 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

At step S2211, the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

<<Medal number control unit main processing>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the medal count control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control section 350 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal count control section.

As described above, the medal count control section 350 is provided with an activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs an activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the medal number control section main processing shown in FIG.

When power is turned on, power-on processing is first performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9 V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt period is set. be done. In addition, communication circuit settings and the like are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S303, preparation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparatory processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In step S304, processing for transmitting gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S306, reception confirmation processing of the rental notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S307, if the lending notification reception flag is ON, proceed to step S308,
If the same flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a lending reception result response transmission process is executed, and step S30 is performed again.
Proceed to 4. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002; if the power status is other than "normal", step S3005
proceed to

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358,
The process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power failure. , and if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal, and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 96, the normal RAM clear processing has the fewest clear targets. In the RAM 358, in addition to the area for storing information during the game, an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information on the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and an area for storing information received from the game control unit 302 Although there is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, in normal RAM clear processing, the area that mainly stores the information during the game is cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear processing, all RAM clear processing has the largest number of clear targets,
All areas are cleared as shown in FIG.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.
At step S3008, if the number of game medals clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to ON.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination processing is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not the game control unit RAM clear command of the game control priority command shown in FIG. 80(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3020.

At step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command is information indicating clearing "normal", the process proceeds to step S3018, and if not information indicating "normal", the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. This process
As shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. This process
As shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information and the like is cleared.

In step S3020, if the information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021. do.

In step S3021, information (error code E8) indicating "RAM defect" is set as the error request set value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 97, error request setting processing (
The details of step S3022) will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like.

First, in step S3101 executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code is already set, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

At step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process proceeds to step S3104; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

At step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 76B, the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

At step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the error request setting process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 98, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described. This figure shows the preparation process (step S3) in FIG.
03).

First, in step S3201 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, chip information (ID, manufacturer code,
product code) is updated. These pieces of information are stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, while the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is ON, this processing is repeatedly executed, and when the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, step S320
Proceed to 5.

In step S3205, the game machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to the initial value (6 in this embodiment).
A value corresponding to 0.196 seconds) is set.

In step S3206, the game machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to the initial value (1 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 80.588 seconds) is set.

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to 0.
This process is repeatedly executed until the value of the timer becomes 0, and the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, the game machine information notification interval timer is set to the initial value (300 in this embodiment).
. A value corresponding to 98 ms) is set. In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set as the count notification interval timer value.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3306, preparations for transmission of various game machine information corresponding to the game machine information type are performed. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prepared, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prepared, and the game is played. If the device information type value is 2, preparations are made for transmission of hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

At step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the number of payout medals is set to zero.

At step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various types of gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (FIG. 75(a) and (
b) see) are transmitted sequentially. It should be noted that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, using FIG. 100, the details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process of FIG. 99 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, step S340.
Proceed to 4.

In step S3402, the game machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to the initial value (6 in this embodiment).
A value corresponding to 0.196 seconds) is set.

In step S3403, 1 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

At step S3404, 2 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, step S
Proceeding to 3406, if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition processing is terminated.

In step S3406, the game machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to the initial value (1 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 80.588 seconds) is set.

In step S3407, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 101, the details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG.

First, in step S3501, which is executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment) is set to the rental notification interval timer.

From step S3503 to step S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. If this VL signal is normal, the rental machine 700
This is a signal that is always sent to the medal count control section 350 from the .

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the expected number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for count determination is set as the counted number.

In step S3512, the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3514, the value of the number of counted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the number of counted medals is added to the total number of medals counted. In step S 3518 , the total number of medals counted is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

In step S3519, the checksum is sent to the lending machine 700. FIG. The checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the lending machine 700 in this counting notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the count serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notice reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the lending notice reception flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the rental notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

At step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the flow advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state.

In step S3604, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this lending notification reception confirmation processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 103, the details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described. 94. This figure is a flow chart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG.

First, in step S3701 that is executed first, the initial value (
5) is set in this embodiment.

In step S3702, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loaned number of sheets reception result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3704; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the rental serial number is set as the rental serial number for confirmation. The lending serial number for confirmation is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 106).
This step S3705 is provided for this comparison.

In step S3706, the lending serial number for confirmation is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

From step S3707 to step S3711, the message length, command type, normal lending sequence number, lending number receipt result, and checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700 . note that,
The checksum is an updated value based on previous transmissions.

At step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending receipt result response transmission process ends.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission in steps S3707 to S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned tokens is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process is terminated.

《Timer interrupt processing of medal number control section》
Next, referring to FIG. 104, the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of the medal count control section.

The medal number control section 350 has a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is started at predetermined intervals.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, C
It performs processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of the PU to the stack area.

In step S402, the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the WDT count value does not exceed the initial set value and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). (Once every 0.745 ms, which is the interrupt period).

In step S403, input port state update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal state storage area within the RAM 358 .

In step S404, lending notification reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S405, update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S408, processing for transmitting a medal number control command addressed to the game control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S409, a display device display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers in units of time.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the medal count control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power supply status is set to "normal". In addition, the game control unit 3
02 also detects the interruption of the power supply and similar processing (step S214 in FIG. 90) is executed, but if the processing here ends before the processing on the game control unit 302 side ends,
Commands from the game control unit 302 cannot be received. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring in the present embodiment, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here is terminated after the processing on the game control section 302 side is completed.

Next, using FIG. 105, the details of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG.

First, in step S4001 executed first, the lending notice reception flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if the rental notification from the rental machine 700 is received, step S
Proceeding to 4003, if not received, this lending notification reception processing is terminated.

In step S4003, the information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the rental notification is stored in RAM 358 .

In step S4004, a lending number determination process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4005, the determination result of step S4004 is set as the loan number receipt result.

In step S4006, the lending notice reception flag is set to ON, and this lending notice reception processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 106, the details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification reception process of FIG. 105 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in FIG.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received rental notification data.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notice is
It is compared with the value calculated in 4102, and if both are equal, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S4104.

In step S4104, the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice and the RAM 358
If both are equal, the process advances to step S4105. If the previous rental notification was received normally, the rental serial number for confirmation here is
, S3706 (updated lending serial number received last time).

In step S4105, if each information of the message length and command type of the received rental notification is information corresponding to the rental notification, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S4106. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rented sheets included in the received rent notice is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the number of game medals is less than 15000, step S
Proceeding to 4108, if the same value is 15000 or more, this lending number determination processing is terminated.

In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine information type value of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification is 2, that is, whether or not the gaming machine information notification is about hall control/illegal monitoring information. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109.

In step S4109, if the value of the number of counted sheets in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination processing ends.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rented cards included in the received rent notification is 50 or less, the flow advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the loaned number determination processing ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and the lending number determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 107, the details of the counted number update processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the medal number control section of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, this update processing for the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the same button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long-press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205.
If the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the count long-press timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the initial value (500 ms in this embodiment).
) is set, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the count long-press timer value is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

In step S4209, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

In step S4210, the counting button 171 was operated immediately before (counting button 171
is released), the process advances to step S4211; otherwise, this processing for updating the planned number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long-press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4212.
If the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long-press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, 0 is set to the value of the count long-press timer.

In step S4215, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the game control section command reception processing (step S406) in the medal count control section timer interrupt processing of FIG. 104 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG.

First, in step S4301 executed first, if the switch from off to on of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, proceed to step S4302, otherwise this game control unit command reception processing exit.

In step S4302, the game control command disconnection timer initial value (in this embodiment, 1
A value corresponding to 90 ms) is set.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not the game control state command (game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4304, game control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4305, game control priority command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, using FIG. 109, details of the game control state command reception processing (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 108 will be described. 108
It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control section 350, and the final command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. It is a command to send sum. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the content of the received command, and the game control state command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4404, the value of the checksum updated by the content of the 1st to 40th command in step S4403 and the value of the checksum included in the command received from the game control unit 302 are compared, and if both are equal, it is normal. It determines, it progresses to step S4405, and if both differ, this game control state command reception processing will be complete|finished.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

At step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off step S
Proceeding to step S4408, if the flag is ON, proceed to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, the chip ID stored in RAM 358 and step S4
If the acquired chip IDs acquired in step 408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4414.

At step S4410, the value of the game machine installation information buffer (the value of the game machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer. The values of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) are set in the RAM 358 by steps S4411 and S4412.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 108 will be described. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG.

First, in step S4501 executed first, if a triple command has been received, the process advances to step S4502.
Proceed to 14. As described above, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the error occurrence command, RAM clear command, start lever reception command excluding these commands is received, the step of FIG. 111 The process proceeds to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, step S
Proceed to 4504, otherwise proceed to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 to store the contents in the receive buffer.
When the last command is received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the reception buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 and the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command are compared. If different, this game control priority command reception processing is terminated.

In step S4507, if the later-described game control command serial number update flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4510. In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer and the value of the game control command serial number (game control command serial number updated in the previous S4511 (command serial number for judgment)) are equal, step S4511 If the two are different, step S4
Proceed to 512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and step S in FIG.
Proceed to 4514.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is terminated.

At step S4514 in FIG. 111, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, step S451
7, and otherwise proceeds to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, step S451
9, otherwise proceed to step S4520.

In step S4519, settlement command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process proceeds to step S4521; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, step S452
3, and otherwise proceeds to step S4524.

In step S4523, a payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4523, error occurrence command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, details of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. Figure 1
11 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in 11. FIG.

First, in step S4601 executed first, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4603,
If the same flag is ON, this input command reception processing is terminated.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the three consecutive commands), the process proceeds to step S4605; End the reception process.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the current bet value.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 113, the details of the settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. Figure 1
11 is a flowchart of settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in 11. FIG.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of game medals.
In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command reception process ends.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "unmatched number of sheets to be settled" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this settlement command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 114, the details of the start lever reception command reception processing (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure shows the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.
) is a flowchart.

First, in step S4801 executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON.

At step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the abnormal game interval timer is set to the initial value (4.1 in this embodiment).
s) is set.

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set to the type information setting value, and in subsequent step S4805 the value of the received command (current bet number in game control unit 302)
is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the renting machine 700 .

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever reception command reception processing is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4807, information (error code E5) indicating "game interval abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process of FIG. 114 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 and 1
16 is a flowchart of game information setting processing (steps S4806, S4A19) in 16. FIG.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, 1 is added to the number of game information.

At step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, as type information 1, the type information set value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114 or step S4A14 in FIG. 116) is set.

In step S4904, the value of the count information set value is set as count information 1, and the game information setting process is terminated. Here, when the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 114 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 116 is set as type information 1. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114) is set as type information 2. FIG.

In step S4906, the value of the count information set value (Fig. 114
(value set in step S4805 in step S4805) is set, and the game information setting process is terminated.

In addition, the type information 2 and the count information 2 indicate that the game starts quickly after the payout (the rental machine 700
provision is made to transmit information about both of these in order to do so (within the transmission period to the That is, when payout information (step S4A14 in FIG. 116, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and count information 1, the current bet amount information (FIG. 11
4, step S4804, etc.) may be set in the type information 2 and the count information 2. It should be noted that, from the start of the game to the payout, the reels rotate and stop, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be transmitted to the lending machine 700 (cleared). 2 and the count information is never set to 2.

Next, using FIG. 116, the details of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. Figure 1
11 is a flowchart of payout command reception processing (step S4523) in 11. FIG.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, game medal clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is ON, step S4A03
, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the regame has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, 0 is set to the additional value for the number of game medals.

In step S4A05, information (error code E4) indicating "abnormal number of payouts" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A08, the game medal addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands). Step S4A09
, information (error code E2) indicating "abnormal game order" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A11, game medal overflow confirmation processing is executed. note that,
Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", step S4
Proceed to A13, and otherwise terminate this payout command reception process.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

At step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set to the type information set value.

In step S4A15, if the player wins the replay role, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is set as the count information set value. The first command of the payout commands here includes the number of payouts in the game control section 302, and the number of payouts is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

At step S4A17, the current bet number is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current bet number is set as the count information set value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 115 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 117, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 will be described. 116
10 is a flowchart of game medal number overflow confirmation processing (step S4A11) in .

First, in step S4B01 executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, step S4B04
, and when the value of the addition result is larger than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation processing is terminated. In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 118, the details of the error occurrence command reception processing (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG.

First, in step S4C01 executed first, an error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error of the game control unit 302 is preferentially processed.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C03.

At step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating "abnormal game order" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

At step S4C05, if information (error code E8) indicating "medal count control RAM error" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, the received command contains information indicating "game control RAM failure" (
If the error code rE) is set, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the error generation command reception process is terminated.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and the error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 110).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG.

First, in step S4D01 executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and step S4D0
Proceed to 4.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, step S4D0
Proceed to 5, and if the same value is not 1, terminate this error monitoring process.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, step S
Proceeding to 4D06, if the flag is ON, this error monitoring process is terminated.

In step S4D06, information (error code E9) indicating "rental machine communication error" is set as the error request set value.

At step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and the error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 120, the details of the game control unit addressed medal number control command transmission process (step S408) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. 104. This figure shows the process of sending a medal number control command to the game control unit in FIG. 104 (step S408).
is a flow chart.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, information on the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on flag is off, step S4E0
Proceeding to 3, if the same flag is ON, this process of transmitting the medal count control command to the game control section is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be transmitted to the game control unit 302 (Fig. 11
2 insertion command reception processing, settlement command reception processing of FIG. 113, or response command set in any of the payout command reception processing of FIG. 116) is not set, step S4
The process advances to E05, and if any response command is set, the process advances to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 3
02, the medal count control state commands (six types of commands) described with reference to FIG. 78 are repeatedly transmitted in order. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the target information of this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper bytes and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands. Among them, the value of the number of game medals obtained when the previous command was transmitted is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insertion command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any one of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, step S4E1
Proceed to 0, and if the same value is greater than 3, proceed to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

At step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. Note that this value is 0
It is repeatedly updated within the range of ~7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is the game control unit 30
2, and the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control unit is terminated. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, using FIG. 121, the details of the indicator display processing (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG.

First, in step S4F01 executed first, if the value of the number of game medals differs from the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if both are the same, step S4 is performed.
Go to F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the number of display game medals.

In step S4F05, 1 is subtracted from the number of display game medals.

In step S4F06, a value corresponding to 4 ms is set as the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display device display processing is terminated.

<<Modification 1>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as Modified Example 1) of the medal insertion process will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. FIG. 122 is a modification of the processing during medal insertion in FIG.
23 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the input command reception process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 122, step S1121 is provided between steps S1107 and S1108 in the processing shown in FIG. 84, and step S1122 is provided between steps S1109 and S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 84 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the content of the response is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modification shown in FIG. 123, step S1402 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG.
A step S1421 is provided. This processing will be described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 124, step S4603 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Further, step S46 is newly added after the No route in the determination of step S4604.
21, S4622 and S4623 are provided, and step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the received command (the first command of the triple commands)
, and if the flag is off, step S462
2, and if the same flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the received command (the first command among the triple commands)
For the received command value storing the value of the requested number contained in , the value is set as the value of the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command (the first command among the triple commands)
is set to 0 for the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in , and the flow advances to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

<<Modification 2>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 125 . FIG. 125 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 125, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long-press timer is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171. FIG.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the count button 171. FIG.

<<Modification 3>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 126 . FIG. 126 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 126, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. again,
Step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value corresponding to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic count flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic count flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210,
If the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4236.

At step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213,
If the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, Fig. 12
7(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 127(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 127(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.
First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the gaming state.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S505
to process.

In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed. For details of this command processing, see FIG.
) will be described later.

In step S509, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . For this preparation, for example:
Processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a shutter control instruction in the effect data read out in step S509, the shutter control corresponding to this instruction is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed for setting transmission of a control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509,
The setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302 . In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is used as an unprocessed command in RA
It is stored in the command storage area provided in M408.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127(c). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment),
Triggered by this timer interrupt, timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 127(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S515, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-controller main processing of FIG. 127(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 127(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 127(a).

First, in step S541 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S543; otherwise, the command processing is terminated.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-controller 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, Fig. 12
8(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 128(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 128(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S605
to process.

In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609.
For example, if there is an image control command in the performance data read out in step S609,
Image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 128(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S603. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment),
Triggered by this timer interrupt, timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 128(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 128(d), step S in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500
The image control processing of 611 will be described. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 stores the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506) in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table,
After setting VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518 ), etc., an instruction to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 is set. VDP 516 is
Image data is transferred from the ROM 506 to the VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
Transfer to AM518. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S625, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in step S621, the CPU 504
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518, information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) of V
Instruct DP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504
516 is instructed to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S63
If not, go to 1 and wait for the end of production interrupt signal to be input.

In step S631, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Operation at power-on]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clear processing is performed, and the state at the time of power off is restored (determination of Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 95). When the power is turned on for the first time, the initial state is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (determination of No in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored in the RAM failure information, so that information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in steps S3006 and S3020 of FIG. 95). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 97). This error information is transmitted to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 120), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S in FIGS. 92 and 83).
1002). The game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if an error is received from the medal number control unit 350. FIG. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, so that various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit state command is received (Fig. 95 step S3007, step S in FIG.
determination of Yes in 4407).

Also, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 82). The medal count control section 350 that receives this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control section 302 (Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 95). In this case, the medal number control unit 350 temporarily permits the interrupt processing, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, prohibits the interrupt processing and performs subsequent processing. It is possible to reliably execute the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 95). Further, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while the interrupt is enabled, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 95).

In addition, the number of game medals can be initialized in the number of game medals control unit 350 by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (step S3008 in FIG. 95).
judgment of Yes). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the game medal count clear detection information. (FIG. 99). The game medal clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 116).

[Transmission of game control state command (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 77) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. . Specifically, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are sequentially transmitted one by one to the medal count control unit. set in the buffer (
(determination of Yes in step S2201 of FIG. 93). However, when the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After the game control state command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (step S2208 in FIG. 93). judgment of Yes). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control section 350 receives the command.
The strobe signal is turned off in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No in step S2208 in FIG. 93), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. . This makes it possible to stabilize reception of commands on the medal number control section 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (step S in FIG. 93).
determination of Yes in 2201). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time the interrupt process is executed. In addition, the transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the output of the command itself continues for 2.98 ms), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (0.745 ms interrupt processing twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt processing, but the game control priority command is prioritized according to the game situation in the game control unit main processing. It is sent to the number control unit 350 . More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the process of the game control command transmission process (FIG. 93), the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is is set in the transmission buffer), by setting the game control priority command in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing, this game control priority command is given priority over the game control state command and the number of medals control unit 350. Game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with the operation to insert game medals, a settlement command associated with the operation to settle the game medals currently set in the bet amount, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of the start lever operation, and a game medal There are a payout command associated with payout, an error occurrence command associated with error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with RAM clear (FIG. 80(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command each consist of three commands. Among these, the first command is a command containing information on the number of game medals to be targeted, and the second command is the communication number of the game control priority command (
command serial number), and the third command is a command containing a checksum based on the contents of the previous two commands. Since these commands are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands, they are sometimes referred to as triple commands. Also, the values of the high-order bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

If the response command from the medal number control section 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control section 350 includes information indicating "request", the command is resent. (Determination of No in step S1308 in FIG. 86, N in step S1310
o), if the upper limit number of retransmissions is exceeded, information indicating "abnormal" is set as the response result from the medal number control unit 350 (step S1302, step S1).
No judgment in 306).

In addition, when information other than "request" is included in the response command from the medal number control section 350, this information is set in the response result from the medal control section, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (Fig. 86 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (transmission of the insertion command, etc.)]
When a game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals requested by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 84). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a betting operation using two types of bet buttons, ie, a 1 bet button and a MAX bet button. When the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required for setting the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 84), and when the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is added to the requested number. It is set (step S1109 in FIG. 84). However, when the current bet amount is the maximum bet amount, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the input operation (determination of No in step S1106 in FIG. 84).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a loading command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of sheets (the first command among the commands that make up the loading command).
is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1110 in FIG. 84,
S1111, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 (step S22 in FIG. 93).
No determination at 01).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing (determination of No in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated,
In addition, the upper byte data is incremented by 1 to update it to the value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second command among the commands that make up the input command) is the number of medals. It is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the control unit 350 (FIG. 87).
, steps S1404 to S1407, FIG. 88). Then, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the processing (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and further, 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. value, and a command (the third command among the commands that make up the insertion command) consisting of low-order byte data indicating the checksum is sent to the medal count control unit 35.
0 is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1408 to S1411 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88)
. Then, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the next game control command transmission processing of the game control section timer interrupt processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93).

The insertion command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 84).

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is given (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the input command is not executed (determination of No in step S1104 in FIG. 84).

Also, during the period from when the input command is transmitted until when the response command is received from the medal count control unit 350, the input command is not transmitted even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 84 is the response command received). (Wait until the

Also, when the bet button is operated, the first sub-control unit 40
0 (step S1114 in FIG. 84). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet number is added accordingly, but the adjustment button 134 is operated (
By performing the settlement operation), it is possible to settle the game medals currently set to the number of bets.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current bet number is the number of game medals requested in the settlement operation (required number)
(No in step S1101 in FIG. 84, step S1203 in FIG. 85)
.

Next, a command consisting of high-order byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and low-order byte data indicating the requested number of sheets (the first command in the settlement command).
is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1204 in FIG. 85,
S1205, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 (step S22 in FIG. 93).
No determination at 01).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that for the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the above flow. If the response command to this command includes information indicating "normal", the value of the current bet number is set to 0. It is set (determination of Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 85).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after receiving the response command (when the response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is decremented). In the state before receiving the response command, the current bet value has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added in the medal number control section 350 which received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If no response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is not decremented and an error occurs (determination of No in step S1206 in FIG. 85), but this error is avoided by some means. In this case, the value of the current bet amount is not subtracted. As a result, the number of medals increases by the amount added to the number of game medals by the medal number control unit 350, and the game medals are obtained illegally by the settlement operation. It will be. Therefore, the current bet value may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is transmitted, and a configuration may be adopted in which a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). In addition, although there is a possibility that errors in the communication state cannot be detected in this configuration that does not use the response command, communication quality is not degraded because errors in the communication state can be detected by adopting a configuration that uses the response command for the input command. can be made It should be noted that command indexes may be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, and an error may occur when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an operation based on incorrect information.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal number control section 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16384, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is granted (the replay flag is ON), the above-described settlement command processing is not executed (determination of No in step S1202 in FIG. 85).

Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not the settlement command has been transmitted, and regardless of the content of the response command from the medal count control section 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 85). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the checkout button 134 .

[Operation of game control unit 302 by start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is greater than or equal to the startable number,
A command (start lever acceptance command) consisting of high-order byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and low-order byte data representing the current bet amount is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 ( Steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 83).
Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (FIG. 83).
step S1014). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of the number of payouts is set to the number of game medals requested for the payout (requested number of medals) (step S1602 in FIG. 89). continue,
A command consisting of upper byte data indicating the payout command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of sheets (the first command of the payout command) is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the transmission buffer. set (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89)
, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).
judgment).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that of the input command, the explanation is omitted. The payout command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the above flow.
00 (step S1607 in FIG. 89). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request,
Since the number of game medals has overflowed and payment cannot be accepted,
A command indicating this state is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (step S in FIG. 89).
1608). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. It should be noted that, if the overflow state is not resolved, retransmission of the payout command is repeated, and the game cannot proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 . When the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can proceed. In other words, when the game cannot be progressed due to overflow, the player himself/herself can deal with it without calling a clerk.

[Operation when medal number control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 92), the type of this command (game control state command (FIG. 78) or response command (FIG. 80 (b)) is identified, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the command type (step S2102 in FIG. 92). Also, if the command received here is a command containing an error code, on condition that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set, this error code is an error in the game control unit 302 status (step S210 in FIG. 92).
4).

[Send medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, medal count control state commands consisting of six types (see FIG. 78)
is sent to the game control unit 302 . Specifically, the medal count control command transmission processing to the game control unit of the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing of the medal count control unit 350 (step S4 in FIG. 104
08, FIG. 120), medal number control state commands are sequentially set one by one in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit (determination of Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 120). However, when the response command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 first, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S4E04 in FIG. 120).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are then output to the game control section 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 120). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 120),
The command is received on the game control unit 302 side. In managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that adds 1 for each interrupt within the range of 0 to 7 is used. 4 to 7 are set to OFF (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 120). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 120).
That is, in the medal number control section 350, one command is transmitted while the interrupt processing is executed eight times, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every time the interrupt processing is executed four times. .
In addition, the transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (1.49 ms interrupt processing twice), so the command It is possible to prevent spillage.

[Operation when game control state command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control state command, game control state command reception processing (FIG. 108 step S4304 of FIG.
09).

As for the game control state command, 41 types of commands (FIG. 77) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of FIG. 109). judgment). And the 41st command (
If the contents of the checksum are normal, the checksum is cleared, and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S440 in FIG. 109).
6, S4410-S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, the role ratio monitor information buffer, and the gaming machine performance information buffer, the chip ID stored in the RAM
and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 109). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 109). Also, when all the RAMs are cleared in the medal number control section 350, the chip IDs stored in the RAMs have already been cleared. update processing is executed (game control unit chip ID acquisition flag ON in FIG. 95, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 109).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control priority command, game control priority command reception processing (FIG. 108 step S4305 of FIG.
10, FIG. 111) is executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error generation command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are once stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 110), the third command , the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer. (step S4 in FIG. 110)
504 to S4606).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is ON, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF (Fig. 110 determination of Yes in step S4507). It should be noted that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 118).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 110). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S13 in FIG. 86).
12, step S4511 in FIG. 110), these values will match if there is no abnormality. If these values do not match, error code E3 is set in the error request (
No determination in step S4510 of FIG. 110).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

[Operation when input command is received]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, an input command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). In this processing, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of inserted medals) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the number of inserted medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the current bet number, After the requested number of medals to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 112). If the requested number of inserted medals is greater than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (steps S4603 and S4603 in FIG. 112).
No judgment in 4604). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (
Step S3509 in FIG. 101), if this flag is ON, information indicating "request" is set in the response command (determination of No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 112).
.

[Operation when settlement command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 111, FIG. 113). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S in FIG. 113).
4701). If the current bet amount is 0, the number of bills requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, and after the number of bills requested for settlement is added to the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (determination of Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 113). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (step S470 in FIG. 113).
No judgment in 2).

[Operation when the start lever acceptance command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 114). If this flag is not set to ON, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 114), the initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 114), further game information is set 114 is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 114). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value,
This value indicates acceptance of the start lever. Also, the current bet number is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by accepting the start lever is stored as game information. In addition, the game information is stored in the rental machine 7
00, and the number of this information is initialized each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99). If the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (step S48 in FIG. 114).
No judgment in 02). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 82) in the game control unit 302. By using this timer also in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving payout command]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, the number of game medals clear detection information is first cleared. This information is information set by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on.
This information is configured to be transmitted to the rental machine 700 .

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not ON, an error code E2 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4A02 of FIG. 116). This flag is a flag that is set to ON when the start lever acceptance command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever acceptance command has not been received. Used for fraud prevention.

Next, if the player has won the replay, 0 is set to the game medal addition value (step S4A04 in FIG. 116). In cases other than replay wins, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) is 15 or less, the number of payouts and the additional value for the number of game medals are set to the number of payouts (Fig. 116). steps S4A07, S4A08). The number of paid-out medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 99). If the payout number is greater than 15, an error code E4 is set as an error request (step S4A0 in FIG. 116).
5, determination of No in step S4A06).

Subsequently, game medal count overflow confirmation processing is executed (step S4 in FIG. 116).
A11, Fig. 117). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is 16383 or less, which is the upper limit value of the number of game medals for payout, this total value is taken as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. information is set (step S4B03 in FIG. 117
judgment of Yes). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit value of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (Fig. 117).
determination of No in step S4B03). Regarding the determination of the number of game medals here,
As will be described later (see [Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]), in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the payout cannot be increased (response command "abnormal"), and if the actual threshold is not exceeded, the output can be increased (response command "normal"). Then, for 16383), any processing can be used,
For example, the actual threshold need not be the same as the processing decision value.

If information indicating “abnormality” is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process is terminated, and this response command is transmitted to the game control unit 302 .

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 116). Further, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 116). Here, 21H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates that there was a payout. again,
The number of payouts (the current number of bets in the case of winning a replay) is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. The game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99).

[Notification of gaming machine information (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, the game machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S304 in FIG. 94, FIG. 99). This game machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a game machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 99). In addition, 90 ms is set to the counting notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the counting notification executed after the game machine information notification is transmitted (step S3303 in FIG. 99).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set in the number of game medals for count determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (moving the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set to the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and as this gaming machine information, one of three types of gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected (Fig. 75). (b)).
Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 100). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at intervals of about 60 seconds, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at intervals of about 180 seconds, and otherwise 2 is set to the gaming machine information type. . That is, in the game machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the game machine information mainly includes hall control/fraud monitoring information, but the game machine installation information is included in the game machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the game machine information is notified at intervals of about 180 seconds. The gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 75(a) and (b)), including gaming machine information corresponding to these gaming machine information types, is set in the lending machine destination transmission buffer (step S3306 in FIG. 99). ) are transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S in FIG. 99).
3317). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3 in FIG. 99).
318).

Hall con/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes game information corresponding to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of game information. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (determination of Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 99).

[Counting notification (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the main processing of the medal count control unit (Fig. 9
4 step S305, FIG. 101). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed after 90 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S in FIG. 99).
3303, step S3501 in FIG. 101).

In the count notification transmission process, the data to be counted ((a) and (c) in FIG. 75) are set in the transmission buffer for the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S35 in FIG. 101).
05, S3513, S3518, S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 101).

This notification of counting includes information on the number of sheets to be counted. When the number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (determination of No in step S3508 in FIG. 101, step S3513).
). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, when a value other than 0 is set as the number to be counted, the number to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101), and the number of game medals is subtracted (
step S3514 in FIG. 101). In addition, the setting of the number of counting and the subtraction of the number of game medals are
It is executed in a state where the input operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 101).
. Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control section (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107).

[Setting the number of medals to be counted (medal number control section 350)]
In the medal number control section 350, the processing for updating the scheduled count number is executed in the medal number control section timer interrupt processing (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107). The number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the set number of sheets to be counted in this process, and a count notification including this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

First, the case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S42 in FIG. 107).
06), the count button 1
Since 71 is released, the count long-press flag is not set to ON (Yes is not determined in step S4207 in FIG. 107). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted (determination of Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 107, step S4212).

Next, the case where the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or longer will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107).
), when the value of the same timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the button was pressed), the count long-press flag is set to ON and the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 (step S42 in FIG. 107).
07). After that, while the count button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long-press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and the number of sheets to be counted based on this scheduled number of sheets is counted each time the counting notification is sent. will be set. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released while the counting long-press flag is ON, the counting long-pressing flag is set to OFF, the counting long-pressing timer is set to 0, and the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S42 in FIG. 107).
10, determination of Yes, determination of No in step S4211).

[Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
Upon receiving the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the medal number control section 350 updates the content of the RAM based on the content of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 105). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification matches the checksum included in the rental notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 106). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lending serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the lending serial number included in the lending notice (
Step S4104 in FIG. 106). The lending serial number for confirmation holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 103).
If the communication is normal, they are configured to match. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. When an abnormality is determined by these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above judgment, if the number of loans included in the loan notification is 0, the judgment result is "normal"
(determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 106). On the other hand, if the number of rented sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (determination of No in step S4106 in FIG. 106).

First, if the number of game medals is 15000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, when the number of game medals is 15000 or more, it is configured so that it cannot be increased by lending. In addition, in this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14999, it cannot be increased by lending, and 1499
If it does not exceed 9 (if it is 14999 or less), it will be an operation that can be increased by lending.
In realizing this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is allowed. will behave the same. Also, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase by lending. In other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the operation is the same as in the present embodiment. As described above, in the actual operation, the number of game medals is the actual threshold value (1499 in the above case).
9) If it exceeds the threshold, the loan cannot be increased, and if the actual threshold is not exceeded, the loan can be increased. In the form 15000), any processing may be used, and for example, the actual threshold need not be the same as the processing decision value.

Further, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals to be added instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value including the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. That is, in this configuration as well, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value in the actual operation, the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending.
If the actual threshold is not exceeded, it can be said that the structure is such that it can be increased through lending.

Next, if the game machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (
No determination in step S4108 of FIG. 106). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2. FIG.

Next, if the number of counted sheets is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (see FIG. 10).
No determination in step S4109 of 6). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the loaned number is not 0, the number of game medals is added.

Finally, if the loaned number of sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4110 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets to be lent out per one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (see FIG. 106).
determination of Yes in steps S4107 to S4110).

The determination result of the above process is set to the loan number reception result, and the loan notice reception flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 105).

In addition to the lending notification reception process described above, the medal count control unit 350 executes lending notification reception confirmation processing in the medal count control unit main processing (step S306 in FIG. 94, FIG. 102).
In this lending notice reception confirmation processing, it is checked whether the lending notice reception flag is turned on for 170 ms from the start of the counting notice transmission processing (step S3502 in FIG. 101, FIG.
02 steps S3601 and S3602). This lending notice reception flag is set in the lending notice receiving processing of the medal count control section timer interrupt processing (step S404 in FIG. 104).
, FIG. 105).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the lending notification reception flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( step S3604 in FIG. 102). The value of this lending machine communication error counter is initialized when the lending machine reception result response transmission is executed (step S370 in FIG. 103).
1) An error occurs when the value of the lending machine communication error counter becomes 1 (step S4 in FIG. 119).
D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control section 350, if the lending notice reception flag is set to ON after the lending notice reception confirmation processing, lending receipt result response transmission processing is executed in the medal count control section main processing (step in FIG. 94). S308, FIG. 103).

In this lending reception result response transmission process, parameters related to lending machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 103).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 103). again,
After the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notification is set as the rental serial number for confirmation, 1 is added to the value of the rental serial number for confirmation (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103). In other words, the value of the lending serial number for confirmation here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notice.

Subsequently, the data ((a) and (e) in FIG. 103) to be the target of the lending receipt result response are set in the lending machine-addressed transmission buffer and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S3701 in FIG. 103).
1). With the above processing, if the loaned number receipt result is "normal", the currently received lending serial number is sent, and if the lending number receipt result is "abnormal", the previously received lending serial number is sent. . It should be noted that if the lending number reception result is "normal", the value of the lending number is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103).

[Operation for error (game control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 90). For example, if a strobe signal is not detected for a certain period of time when a command is sent from the medal count control section 350, a medal count control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 91). In the state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302 , the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350 . If the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 83, step S1603 in FIG. 89). Therefore, an error on the game control unit 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control unit 350 side.
If there is no error on the 2nd side, an error on the medal count control section 350 side will be reported. Also, the error status is sent to the medal number control unit 350 by the error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 90).

[Operation in response to an error (medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 95, step S4414 in FIG. 109, step S4512 in FIG. 110, step S4706 in FIG. 113, step S4706 in FIG. Step S4807, Step S4A05 in FIG. 116, Step S4A09 in FIG. 116, Step S4 in FIG.
D02, step S4D06 in FIG. 119, FIG. 97). Information of this error code is transmitted to the game control section 302 by means of a medal count control state command. In addition, when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 118). As a result, the error on the game control unit 302 side is
It is configured to be processed with priority over the side error.

[Modified example for input operation]
FIG. 122 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be. The operation of these processes will be described below.

84, the required number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current bet number, and an insertion command including this information is transmitted to the medal number control section 350. (Fig. 87). On the other hand, in FIG. 122, the MAX bet button (
When the bet button 132) is operated, the limited number of inputs flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 122), and when the one bet button (BET button 130) is operated, the limited number of inputs flag is set to OFF. (step S1122 in FIG. 122). Then, an input command including the information of the input number limited flag is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (see FIG. 123).
).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 124, if the number of game medals exceeds the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is changed. Returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (determination of Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG.
The number-of-throwing-in limited flag is referred to (determination of No in step S4604 in FIG. 124). When the number-of-throwing-in limited flag is ON, the process for the requested number is not performed, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (determination of No in step S4621 in FIG. 124). In the game control section 302 which received this response command, the value returned by this response command, 0, is added to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122), so the current bet number is maintained without change. It will be.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 124, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number and the insertion number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the required number (see FIG. 124). YES is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in step S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is changed to the game control unit 3 by the response command.
02. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the above modification, when the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested by the insertion command is not sufficient, 0 is returned for the requested number of medals if the number-of-insertion limited flag is on, and if the number-of-insertion limitation flag is off. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number of sheets. When the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot respond to the requested number of medals from the game control unit 302, this configuration uses information (the number of inserted limited flag) is transmitted together with the requested number of sheets. In this configuration,
For example, in a configuration where the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet amount, it may be possible to prevent the current bet amount from becoming a disadvantageous value unintentionally.

In this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a value necessary for setting the maximum bet number is set as the required number of bets. A configuration may be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets.

Also, for example, when adopting a configuration in which the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number, one
When the bet number button 130 is operated and the number of bets is currently 1, if the MAX bet button 132 is operated to send an input command to set the maximum number of bets as the requested number,
The requested number of medals cannot be accepted by the medal number control unit 350 (the maximum number of bets is exceeded).
. Also in this case, the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot cope with the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302 . In such a case as well, by transmitting the information for proper use and the requested number of sheets together, an operation that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, 0 is returned as a response command).
, and the action of responding as much as possible (for example, returning the maximum number of bets as a response command).

《Example of operation》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Operation example related to counting process]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a first example in which the counting button 171 is operated. Figure 129(a)
is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 2(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), time elapses from left to right. The same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), (i) to (
v) are labeled with corresponding arrows. These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170 .

Also, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG.
The timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the rental machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of game values transmitted to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. again,
The value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "count number". Furthermore, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown below it.

In the first example shown in FIG. 129, when the "number of game medals" is 250, the count button 17 is pressed.
1 operation is started. As shown in (i) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 1
At 70, the number "250" is displayed.

Even if the first counting timing comes after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the counting button 171 remains operated. Before long, after the start of operation of the count button 171, 0.0.
Five seconds (500 ms) elapse. Even when 0.5 seconds have passed, the counting button 171 is still operated and is long-pressed, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted (FIG. 107).
step S4209 of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. In the following description, operation of the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is called long press, and operation of the count button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting operation is called short press. The scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. 107 is executed at a cycle of 0.7 ms. It continues to be overwritten to the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the operation of the count button 171, when the first count timing arrives while the count button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 200. Figure 129
As shown in (ii) of (b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is performed by displaying a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms by the display processing shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 is suddenly changed from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. A display (a display performed before displaying the number of game medals after the number of game medals is reduced by 50, and a display for recognizing that the number of game medals will change) is performed. and about 200m
When s elapses, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 17
The number "200" is displayed for 0.

When the next counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the number of counts is set again based on the value of the number of counts to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. A sheet count notification is sent again. The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 1
At 70, a change display is displayed in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, after about 200 ms has passed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 129(b).

Furthermore, when the timing for counting the third time arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, the medal number control unit 350 sends a count notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is 50. Decrease to 100 sheets. After that, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the “number of game medals” remains at 100 as well. Note that the change display is performed in a time (about 200 ms) shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms. , the operation of the count button 171 is terminated, the number of game medals corresponding to the number can be left.

Also, when the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing after the operation of the counting button 171 is started (when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow A shown in FIG. 129(a)), 1 is added to the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S421 shown in FIG. 107).
2) When the timing for counting arrives, one of them is sent as a notification of counting. The “number of game medals” is reduced by one to 249, and the number “249” is displayed on the display device 170 for number of game medals.

Also, when the count button 171 is operated a plurality of times before the first count timing comes after the first operation of the count button 171 is started, that is, when the count button 171 is pressed a plurality of times before the count timing arrives. , the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the timing of counting arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, it corresponds to the number of times of single pressing), and the value of the number of times short-pressed until then is transmitted as a notification of counting.

On the other hand, when counting button 171 is released after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of counting button 171 and before the first counting timing has arrived (as indicated by arrow B in FIG. 129(a)). 107), even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "count" is 0 (a count notification indicating that the counted number of sheets is 0 is transmitted). Similarly, when the display of the number of game medals 170 changes from 250 to 200 in about 200 ms, and the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives (Fig. 129(a)). ), the count notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted, and the "count" value becomes 0 (the count notification of 0 is transmitted). ).

FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting.

FIG. 130 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272 . As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a period of 100 ms contains information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the count button 171 is pressed for a short time and one card is counted, no display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that counting is being performed. , its display continues. Also, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272 . For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, the output is continued. If the count sound is output with a small number, it may be mixed with other effects sounds, and may give the player an expectation different from the expectation that the other effects sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If the number of counting sounds is large, the output time is long, so there is little possibility that the sound will be mixed with other sound effects, and there will be little influence on other sound effects. It should be noted that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be output in the same manner as when one sheet is counted.

On the other hand, when the count button 171 is long pressed and 50 sheets are counted, the effect image display device 1
A display informing that counting is being performed is displayed at 57, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. FIG. That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a period of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. In the first sub-control section 400, when information indicating 50 sheets is transmitted as the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, a counting sound is output. In addition, when the second sub-controller 500 also receives the information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the counted number of sheets via the first sub-controller 400, it displays the in-counting notification.

Furthermore, the long press continues, and during continuous counting where 50 sheets are counted every 0.3 seconds,
As shown in FIG. 130, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "continuous counting". This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. again,
From the speaker 272, a counting sound (for example, a notification sound "piyopiyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or longer is output. Since the length of the counting sound output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and sounds like continuous output. For example, if the counting sound has a length of 0.5 seconds or more, it overlaps with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and the continuity is maintained, and the counting sound is generated in the continuous counting period. continue without interruption. It is recognized that continuous counting is being performed by the character display of "Continuous counting" and the continuous counting sound.

Note that when the counted number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) of 2 or more and less than 50, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long pressing may be output. By doing so, for example, when the short press is repeated, it is possible to make the user recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, medal count control section 35
A state in which the remaining number of game medals stored in 0 is less than 50 (for example, 10 remaining)
When the button is pressed for a long time, 10 sheets are counted instead of 50 sheets, so that it is possible to recognize that there are only a few remaining sheets from the change in the effect sound. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the count button 171 was operated and the bet number was not zero.
In this embodiment, operating the counting button 171 does not change the value of the current bet.
At 31, if the current bet number is not 0 when the count button 171 is operated, the settlement process (sets the current bet number to 0 and adds the decrement to the number of game medals) is performed before executing the counting process. This is a modified example.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the start lever 1
If the counting button 171 is operated before operating 35, settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed.

FIG. 131 shows the “current number of bets”, and below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. In addition, below that, the value of the number of counts is shown,
The operation mode of the count button 171 is shown at the bottom.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is 3. R.A.
The "number of game medals" stored in M358 has been reduced from 68 to 65 by subtracting 3 in response to this betting operation. Before long, instead of operating the start lever 135, the counting button 171 is operated. When the count button 171 is operated, the count button 17
The up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of 1 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, first, the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals". As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to become 68. That is, the game returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After performing this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed long, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, 50 medals are counted, and the "number of game medals" is reduced by 50 to 18.
become a sheet.

In this example, by operating the counting button 171, the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. I will end up doing it. In this configuration, if it is desired to change only the current number of bets, the adjustment button 134 should be operated. For example, after betting 3 coins, if you want to change to betting 1 coin, operate the checkout button 134 to temporarily return the 3 coins that have been bet to the "number of game medals", and then bet again for betting 1 coin. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Note that the settlement button 134 may not be provided because the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 .

FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information indicating the counted number of coins included in the security command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets transmitted in the security command until the counted number of sheets transmitted reaches 0, and when it reaches 0 (when the counting is completed) Executes the counting end production with . The counting end effect here is an effect corresponding to the quantity of counting performed at once.

FIG. 132(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). On the effect image display device 157, during counting, a counting effect (for example, character display of "Continuous counting" and output of counting sound described with reference to FIG. 130) is performed. , the effect image display device 157 performs a counting end effect 1 in which a character display of "counting end" is displayed. On the other hand, FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1000). When the counting of a predetermined number or more is finished, the counting end effect 2 is performed, and the effect image display device 157 adds a warning display of ``be careful not to store too much'' in addition to the character display of ``counting finished''.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store up to 16383 "game medal numbers". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear. Therefore, the slot machine 100
It is desired that the player does not continue to store too many "game medal counts". Therefore, it is preferable to issue a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171 . Figure 13
2(b) is an example of notification for increasing the frequency of operation of the count button 171, prompting the renting machine 700 to appropriately transfer the game value. note that,
The counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative counted number of sheets. For example, when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets), a counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative counted number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets) or more, the counting effect B is performed. shall be performed. Further, the counting performance A is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an appropriate state, and the counting performance B is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an inappropriate state. It is possible to give the player an unfavorable impression that the accumulated number of coins is large.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such a conventional slot machine, not only the betted medals but also the stored medals are included in the settlement process of real medals (for example, the maximum number of bets is 3 and the maximum number of stored medals is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be settled). When this settlement process ends, a demonstration command is output to the first sub-controller 400 , and the second sub-controller 500 may execute a process of displaying a demonstration screen on the effect image display device 157 . That is, there is a certain amount of time while the checkout process, which may involve the physical ejection of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command. Move to a demonstration production based on the command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require real medals, the object of settlement is the medals bet (current bet number, maximum 3), and physical medals are not ejected. The processing time related to settlement is a short amount of time. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time for payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-controller 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is made to execute an effect based on the execution of the settlement process, this effect will be performed only for a short time before the demonstration effect, and there is a risk that the player will conversely feel uncomfortable. There is

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 133, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, an effect based on this settlement button command is output. (output of settlement tone, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 133, when the bet operation is performed and the "current number of bets" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform the settlement operation. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (three) is added to the "number of game medals", which increases from 65 to 68.

FIG. 133 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. Even if the settlement operation is performed, the settlement sound is not output from the speaker 272 . Further, the game background display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 133 is immediately switched to the demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demonstration command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration clearer.

It should be noted that the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While the settlement performance is being executed, even if the demonstration performance is started, the settlement performance is continued so that both performances are executed together. Although it is expected that the frequency of settlement operations will be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is a possibility that settlement operations will be performed due to fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so there are settlement processes around. make it known.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes according to the length of operation time of the count button 171 will be described.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. Note that in this example, instead of the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 107, the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 125 is adopted.

FIG. 134(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long-press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. In this table, the count long-press timer value is set for each long-press step value. That is, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the counting long-press timer decreases by a predetermined time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the count long-press timer is shortened step by step. Then, when the value of the long-press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 134(b) is a table showing specific values of the planned number of sheets used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the planned number of sheets update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press step value. In other words, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted increases as the long-press step value increases.
As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases step by step according to the operation time of the counting button 171 . Note that even if the same value is set a plurality of times, the number of sheets to be counted will eventually increase step by step. For example, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→3
Even if it is set to 0 . . . , it eventually increases step by step. Then, when the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 134(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long-press timer shown in FIG. 134(a) and the expected number of counted sheets shown in FIG. 134(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 134(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart is shown a timing chart showing the ON state when the count button 171 is being operated.

A count long-press timer (a value for 1.2 seconds) with a long-press stage value of 1 is set from the time when the count button 171 changes from the OFF state to the ON state (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125),
When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value of the timer becomes "1",
10 is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). When the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (a value for 0.9 seconds) with a long-press step value of 2 is set (step shown in FIG. 125). S4221
). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.9 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, the 10 sheets set as the number to be counted will reach 0.9 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S422 shown in FIG. 125).
2). Subsequently, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long-press step value of 3 is set (shown in FIG. 125). step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.6 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 20 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at the timing of 0.6 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long-press step value of 4 is set (step shown in FIG. 125). S42
21). The count button 171 is pressed until 0.3 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses.
is maintained, the 30 sheets set as the number to be counted will be counted when the counting timing arrives.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125).
Thereafter, the count long-press timer is repeatedly set to a value of 0.3 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and the expected number of sheets to be counted is repeatedly set to 50 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, if the count button 171 is kept pressed, 50 sheets are counted every time the count timing comes.

In the example described here, as the operation time of the counting button 171 increases, the value of the counting long-press timer decreases and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases.
As the operation time of 1 becomes longer, the value of the long-press timer for counting becomes longer, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase. may decrease, the value of the count long-press timer may decrease, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, the value set in the counting long-press timer is gradually shortened, and the value of the expected number of medals to be counted is gradually increased. You can

FIG. 135(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 134(c), after the long-press step value reaches 4, the count long-press timer value becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the maximum number of sheets to be counted is constant at 50. become. RAM3
This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in 58 becomes 0, but when the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300), the final game process is executed. You may make it The term "final stage processing" as used herein refers to a process of increasing the value of the count long-press timer and decreasing the value of the number of tokens to be counted as the number of game medals decreases.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 135(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the expected number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets.
The "number of game medals" is 299, and the "number of game medals" is below a certain value (300).

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set again as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Further, when the count button 171 is in the ON state and the timer value becomes "0", the count long-press timer value is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).
become longer.

Eventually, when the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S422 shown in FIG. 125).
2). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value for 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125) and becomes longer again.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and is further lengthened.

Then, when the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set again as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125).
). In addition, the number of sheets less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set again to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the value of the count long-press timer exceeds the value for 1.2 seconds (for example, the value for 1.5 seconds)
may be set. In the example shown in FIG. 135(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches nine, the count button 171 is released and the count button 171 is turned off. As a result, counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage processing described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and the value of the count long-press timer increases. It is possible to reduce the number of "game medals" becoming 0. If it is desired to set the "number of game medals" to 0, the counting button 171 should be operated until the display of the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 135(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off when the number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 in the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(b), the count button 17 is kept pressed until the power is restored after the power is cut off.
1 remains in the operated state. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, even if you know that the power has been cut, count button 1
Some players never let go of 71. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, the medal number control unit 350 determines the maximum number of medals to be counted (50 in this example). ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Even if control is once interrupted due to a power failure, continued operation of the counting button 171 for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets (for example, 30 sheets) that is slightly smaller than the maximum number of sheets may be set. Alternatively, the planned number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

Also, although the description here is about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the long-press counting timer. That is, when power is restored while the count button 171 is being operated, the medal number control section 350 sets the count long-press timer value to the value for the shortest time (300 in this example).
ms) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example employing the update processing of the planned number of sheets shown in FIG.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released, and 0.3 seconds is counted. Each time the timing comes, 50 cards are counted. This automatic counting is stored in the RAM 358 as "
This is continued until the value of "number of game medals" becomes zero. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly set to 0 by an operation that does not take time and effort.

It should be noted that when the automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 described with reference to FIG.
Decrease in units of 0. In the 7-segment display, which is the game medal number display device 170, the change display in which 1 is decremented at intervals of about 4 ms is such that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to afterimages. It may look like Moreover,
If the changing display is continued until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" becomes 0, it may rather become difficult to understand the current number of displayed medals. Players who select automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" to 0, and there may be little need to change the display to show that the number of game medals is being decremented by one. be.

In addition, since the player does not operate during the period when the automatic counting is performed, it is preferable to inform the player that the automatic counting is being performed by means of a lamp or the like. Also, if there is a payout based on the game result during the automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and is included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. When the counting button 171 is operated for 2.0 seconds, automatic counting is started, and 50 sheets are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 137(a), RAM3
The value of the "number of game medals" stored in 58 is also shown. In this example, the count button 171 is released when the "number of game medals" reaches 147.
The number of gaming medals” continues to decline. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting automatically ends, and the count button 171 must be operated. , the "number of game medals" will not decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. When it is desired to continue the game after the automatic counting, the game can be started quickly because there is a remaining number. There is also a case where it is desired to count all the number of game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. It should be noted that the certain value is set to 50, but the player may be allowed to set a certain value. For example, the player may be allowed to select 0, 20, or 50 sheets. A desired number of game medals can be left after counting. A certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0, and in a privilege game state such as AT game, a certain value is set to 5
Set to 0. Since the possibility of ending the game is low in the privilege game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, when less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and when 100 or more game medals are counted,
A value is set to 20 sheets. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for a prize such as a drink, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals. Also, the opposite is possible. When a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by executing a notification or the like to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals.

FIG. 137(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off during automatic counting and the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 137(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power failure occurs in a state in which 50 medals are being counted each time a counting timing of 0.3 seconds is reached by automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of the power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is operated while the power is off and the power is restored while being operated. , after the power is restored, an ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is detected. When this ON signal is detected when power is restored, automatic counting is started even if two seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not passed. That is, 50 sheets are counted when the first counting timing comes after the power is restored. Therefore, automatic counting is started even if the counting button 171 is released before two seconds have elapsed since the power was restored.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a display example indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 138 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 138 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the operation mode of the count button 171 (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the characters "counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is being displayed. That is, the character display of "counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Also, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 138 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the automatic counting is started, the medal number control section 350 sends a command to the game control section 302 including the automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting in the counting number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted and the above automatic counting information in the security command. The second sub-controller 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-controller 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the characters "automatically counting" and the message 157m. In the state in which automatic counting is being performed, automatic counting state notification is provided. It should be noted that while the automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be given by sound or a lamp. In FIG. 138, the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background displays the character display of "automatically counting".
Below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Even if you release the button, the counting continues." In the state in which automatic counting state notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, there is also an explanation such as "You can play games." In the state where the automatic counting state notification is being performed, the game progress possible notification is performed. It is notified that the game can be progressed by operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132 even during automatic counting. note that,
Operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted during the counting process. In addition, since it is anticipated that there will be a case where it is desired to manually end the automatic counting after the automatic counting has started, if the counting button 171 is operated again after the automatic counting has started, the automatic counting will end. good too. That is, when the medal count control unit 350 detects the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When the automatic counting ends, the notification of the automatic counting state ends.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Further, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when 2.0 seconds have passed and the first counting timing has arrived, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started. Note that the counting sound may be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. Although the predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the sound volume as time elapses, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are continuously output, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also continuously output, and the third counting sound is output. The sound and the next output fourth counting sound are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, timbre, etc. may be changed. That is, it is sufficient that the counting sound changes stepwise. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Alternatively, only the tone color may change at predetermined time intervals without increasing the volume at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is composed only of instrumental sound A, the second counting sound is composed of multiple sounds in which instrumental sound A is added to instrumental sound B, and the third counting sound is composed of instrumental sound A and instrumental sound A. A sound composed of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding a musical instrument sound B to a musical instrument sound C is assumed. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, it takes about 50 seconds to count 5,000 cards obtained through a game at once. If the counting sound continues to be output during this period, it may feel offensive and may be disliked by the adjacent players. As countermeasures for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and then silenced (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound decreases as time passes,
After the counting sound is output for a predetermined time, a constant sound (volume 1) may be set.

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine equipped with a function that allows the player to perform various customizations, the type and volume of the counting sound, the method of change (for example, whether to increase or decrease the volume, etc.), etc. The player may be allowed to make a selection. By doing so, it is also possible to increase interest in counting.

In addition to the sound, a lamp may emit light, an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp and the image may be changed step by step.

FIG. 140 shows 0, which is the determination time of the long press operation after the operation of the counting button 171 is started.
. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power failure occurs before 5 seconds have passed; FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the operation of the count button 171 is started, and power is cut off before the count long-press flag described with reference to FIG. 107 (or FIGS. 125 and 126) is set to ON. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. When the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge after the power is restored, the medal count control section 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and 0.5 seconds has passed since the power was restored. It is determined whether or not the counting button 171 remains operated until the time elapses. Here, if the count button 171 continues to be operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON. counted.

If the long press is performed after the power is restored, the long press may be notified. The long-press informing is started from the time when the long-press is continued when the first counting timing comes after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored. This causes the count button 171 to
If the hand is released from the count button 171, the long press is not performed. Since the number of sheets is not counted, the long-press notification is started on the condition that the long-press is continued when the first counting timing comes after 0.5 seconds have passed.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have elapsed after power is restored,
One sheet is counted, but it may be an erroneous operation. Therefore, 0.5
If the operation of the count button 171 is completed within seconds, it may be regarded as an erroneous operation and not counted at all. FIG. 140(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. FIG.

According to the example shown in FIG. 140(b), since the count button 171 is still being operated during the power failure, the rising edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, the long-press determination is not performed, and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 140(a), since the long-press determination is performed depending on whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, even if the up edge is not detected, Long press judgment is executed.

141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 141(a), the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started. , then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, a long press operation is performed for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. is subtracted from the determination time of 0.5 seconds, and the operation of the count button 171 determines the remaining time ((0.5-
If it continues for X) seconds), the counting long-press flag is set to ON assuming that the counting button 171 has been operated for 0.5 seconds.

In the modification shown in FIG. 141(b) as well, after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-press operation, has passed. Power is restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 141(b), standby processing is provided for a certain period of time (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until the appropriate timing for performing the counting processing. After the standby time has passed, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 141(a). That is, when the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171, the long-pressing operation is determined for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the operation of the counting button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the standby time has elapsed, then 0.5
It is assumed that the count button 171 has been operated for the second, and the count long-press flag is set to ON.

142 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 142(a), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), the medal number control unit 350 detects the ON signal without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If the ON signal is detected, the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that the power supply has been continuously set, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 50 is set as the initial value in step S4206 in FIG.
2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for power-on in the count long-press timer set to 0 ms. In this way, for a long-pressing operation immediately after turning on the power, the counting long-pressing flag is set to ON when a long operation is performed, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is continuously operated, 50 pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 142(b), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operation ends when the counting button 171 is released while the power is off. Therefore, when power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected.
Then, in this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in accordance with power-on.
This timer has a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long-press operation determination time (0.5 seconds).
is clocked. Also, the timer set value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer set value dedicated to power-on in the third modification (for example, 2 seconds). If the operation of the count button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is counting time, and the operation of the count button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the count long-press flag is set to ON. be.
That is, while the timer is counting time, at least one of the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 and the ON signal is detected, and the ON signal is still detected after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long-press flag is set to ON. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is continuously operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display, explained with reference to FIG. 129(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG.

As shown at the top of FIG. 143(a), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "100". When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms in the display device display process shown in FIG. In FIG. 143(a), "99"→"98"→"97"→"96"→"95
”→“94” and “1” are subtracted one by one.

When 50 sheets are counted by the long-press operation of the count button 171, "1
, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×50=approximately 200 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be subtracted is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to subtract 50 images.

FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 143(b). When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms as in the change display at the time of subtraction. Figure 1
In 43(b), "101"→"102"→"103"→"104"→"105"→"1
06" and "1" are added one by one.

When 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, it takes about 4 ms.
In order to display the change (addition/subtraction) by "1" at intervals, the time required for the change display is about 4 ms.
65 = about 260 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to add 65 images.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG.
Since the player may not notice the change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying that the display content has changed.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(a). In the example here, all the digits are used to display the change, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle of the display, all segments of all five digits are illuminated (display of "88888") and all segments of all five digits are extinguished. The display (display of "00000") is switched and displayed every 8 ms in this example. After a while, in this example, after 250 ms have elapsed, the game medal number display device 170 displays "8
5” is displayed. Since all the digits are used to perform the change display, it is possible to check whether or not there is a failure in which the segments of all the digits of the game medal number display device 170 do not display. If it can be recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change display.

Although all the digits are used in the change display here, only a part of the digits may be used in order to reduce the processing load and the data volume. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one-digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. Not including the rightmost digit when not using all digits may give the impression that the rightmost digit is broken, so it is meant to indicate that there is no failure. Include the rightmost single digit.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(b). Also in this example, the number "100" changes to the number "85". i.e. 3
It changes from a digit number to a 2 digit number. Therefore, a change display using segments of three digits is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, and the segments appear to go around. According to this changing display, it is possible to give an impression that the number changes starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms have passed since the start of the change display, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85".

If a change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the number changes with "85" as the end point.

As described above, while sandwiching the two types of change display described using FIG. 144, toward the target value,
A display that changes step by step by a predetermined number (for example, 20) may be performed. Specifically, "1
When the final value changes from "00" to "60" (target value), "100"→change display→"80"→change display→display of "60". Furthermore, the game medal number display device 17
0, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used, the light emission color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the changing display.

145, in addition to the game medal number display device 170, the effect image display device 157 also displays the RA
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the "number of game medals" stored in M358;

The medal count control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medal count display numbers shown in FIG. 78) to the game control section 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including information indicating the number of game medals in the security command. Security commands are sent to the first sub-controller 400 at intervals of 100 ms. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400, and outputs the effect image display device 157 with “
number of game medals” is displayed. In this example, the “number of game medals” is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is 100 ms.
According to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at intervals, the number is displayed as it is. Effect image display device 1 shown on the left side of FIG.
At 57, the number "100" is displayed according to the previous security command.
In addition, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and 50 sheets are counted. The medal number control section 350 starts executing the display device display process shown in FIG. 121, and the game medal number display device 170 starts a changing display that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In FIG. 145, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that seven segments are all lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to an afterimage. On the game medal number display device 170, a changing display is performed by subtracting "1" for about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is issued during the security command transmission period (100 ms). Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the security command is received by the first sub-controller 400 after about 20 ms have passed since 50 sheets have been counted, and display processing is executed. In the display processing here, the image displaying "100" is changed to "50".
This is a frame replacement process for replacing the image with the image displaying "", and is completed in a short amount of time. As a result, the effect image display device 157 will display the number “50” before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the sub-control section (400, 500) receiving the information on the "number of game medals" does not change the display, and the main control section 300 that outputs the information does not display the change. Change display. By doing this, the numerical value “50” finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be grasped from the display on the effect image display device 157, and “50” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display has been completed at the time point.

146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 146, even the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is changed by subtracting "1". Moreover, the game medal number display device 170
The change display is performed over a longer period of time than the change display in . Specifically, the effect image display device 1
The change indication at 57 takes place over 280ms. During this time of 280 ms, 50 cards are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 1
300 ms, which is the counting timing cycle, which is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) required to display the addition change on the game medal number display device 170 when 5 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts) are paid out. It is the time when less than

A player usually looks at the effect image display device 157 in many cases, and does not often look at the game medal number display device 170 . As mentioned above, the slot machine 100 has too many "
It is desired that the "number of game medals" is not kept stored, and the frequency of operation of the count button 171 is desired to be increased. For that purpose, it is necessary to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals". The reason why the effect image display device 157 also displays the "number of game medals" is to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. tend to Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display of the number of game medals on the game medal display device 170, the player will be able to It can be expected that the player will pay attention to the game medal number display device 170 as well. If the game medal number display device 170 is seen, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, so that the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for people to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and counting button 1
71 can be expected to be operated more frequently.

In addition, in the changing display in the effect image display device 157, not only the changing character display,
By also displaying the animation display indicating that the number of game medals is changing, attention is likely to be drawn to the "number of game medals", and the frequency of operation of the count button 171 can be expected to increase here as well.
By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, the change display can be made suitable for the period of the change display.
Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same mode as the change display by the game medal number display device 170 . It is easy to recognize that the change display is being performed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG.

In another example shown in FIG. 147, the game medal number display device 170 does not perform the changing display, and only the display of the "game medal number" in the effect image display device 157 performs the changing display. That is, in this example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 121 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the game medal number display device 170 immediately displays the number "50". On the other hand, even if the security command is received by the effect image display device 157, the display according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command is not immediately performed, and "1" is displayed.
A change display is performed by subtracting one by one.

In this example as well, similarly to the modified example shown in FIG. 146, it takes more time to display the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 than on the display device 170 of the number of game medals. It can be expected that the game medal number display device 170, which is displayed quickly, will also be taken into consideration. By having the player look at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently. In addition,
In the medal number control section 350, the amount of data for the change display is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 148(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold.

In FIG. 148(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Below that, the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store up to 16383 “game medal counts”. That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of stored coins.

In a state in which the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16373, 15 coins corresponding to the maximum number of payouts (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the regulations) are paid out. The payout number of 15 is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 . When the number of payouts of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of stored medals and exceeds the threshold value for payout in step S4B03 of FIG. Therefore, the payout response command includes "abnormality", and the medal count control unit 350
is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from. Game control unit 302, "abnormal" in the payout response command
is included, a command indicating that the number of game medals overflows (cannot be added by payout) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this command, an upper limit exceeded error notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, as the upper limit exceeded error notification, the payout threshold is exceeded and the counting is performed so as to overlap the game background display. A character display prompting the operation of the button 171 is displayed. That is, even during the game, the upper limit exceeded error notification is executed.

As the upper limit exceeded error notification, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on.

FIG. 148(b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification.

Blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as the upper limit exceeded error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the character display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including “normal” from the medal count control unit 350, it transmits a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), when the payout command is received while the upper limit exceeded error notification is being executed, execution of the upper limit exceeded error notification is terminated. It should be noted that if there is an operation to the count button 171, regardless of the number of game medals, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be terminated. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be terminated early.

In addition, information representing the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 . If the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted is the number of payout threshold values (16383 medals), the sub control unit (
400, 500) side may notify the upper limit reaching error. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a character display that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the number of game medals is less than the payout threshold value (16383 medals).
Incidentally, if there is an operation to the counting button 171, the upper limit reaching error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early.

In addition, in other cases where the "number of game medals" is added, the
If there is a loan from In the present embodiment, reaching the upper limit is not determined for settlement, but reaching the upper limit may be determined as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored sheets and the settlement exceeds the settlement threshold, the settlement response command includes "abnormality", and the medal number control unit 350 sends the game control unit 302 to be sent. Then, the game control unit 302 also transmits an error generation command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of displayed game medals has occurred, even when "abnormality" is included in the settlement response command. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), an upper limit exceeding error is reported. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a number smaller than the maximum storage number (for example, 15
000), and if the "number of game medals" exceeds the threshold value for lending due to lending, a lending error exceeding the upper limit occurs and lending is not accepted (step S37 in FIG. 103).
12), the addition of the "number of game medals" is not performed. A notice of an error in lending exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700 . However, the effect image display device 157 is transmitted by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 and further from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400.
, a speaker 272, a lamp, or the like on the slot machine 100 side.

FIG. 149(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the second payout threshold.

Also in FIG. 149(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown below.

A command including the display number of game medals (the number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 is set with a second payout threshold (for example, 15000) that is less than the maximum number of coins stored in the RAM 358 of 16383 (payout threshold). In the game control section 302, when the number of displayed game medals sent as a command is equal to or greater than the second threshold value for payout, an error nearing the upper limit of displayed number of game medals occurs in the first sub-control section 400. Send an error generation command indicating that On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, the upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 149(a), the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed has a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 as an upper limit imminent notification so as to overlap the game background display. is displayed. That is, in this example as well, the approaching upper limit notification is executed during the game. In FIG. 148(a) above,
The effect image display device 157 is shown in which the display of the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the display of the upper limit exceeded error notification.

In addition, as an upper limit imminent notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. Note that the approaching upper limit notification is continued until the upper limit exceeding error notification is started after the approaching upper limit notification is started.
The approaching upper limit notification may be a notification that is performed only for a part of the time during one game. For example, the notification is performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceeding error notification is performed during one game. For example, even if the upper limit imminent notification is started, A
When it is known that the privilege period of the T game or the like is short, the remaining AT game or the like can be easily prioritized. Furthermore, when the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 149(b) is a diagram showing another example of an approaching upper limit notification.

The effect image display device 157 may perform flashing display even when the upper limit is approaching. Figure 14
In the example shown in 9(b), the character display of the approaching upper limit information is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit imminent notification is also displayed so as to overlap the game background display during the game, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command including the displayed number of game medals less than the second threshold value for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error indicating that the number of displayed game medals is approaching. Send an error release command indicating that the error has been released. Sub control unit (40
0,500) side terminates the execution of the upper limit imminent notification based on this error cancellation command.

Also, the second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-controller 400 . First sub-controller 4
00, when the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the sub control unit (400, 500) side performs the above-mentioned An approaching upper limit may be notified. Then, this upper limit imminent notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "game medal count" becomes the number of coins less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control section 350 . In this case, the number-of-games medal control unit 350 determines whether or not the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout. A notification command is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302, based on the command information, sends a sub control unit (400, 50
0) sends a notification command to the side. By doing so, the sub control unit (400, 500)
On the side, an upper limit approaching notification can be performed. Then, when it becomes less than the second threshold value for payout, the notification end command is transmitted from the medal count control section 350→game control section 302→sub control section (40
0,500). It is preferable that the blinking period of the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the near-upper limit notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking period is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. If the near-upper-limit notification is a blinking display, the upper-limit-exceeding error notification may be displayed at all times. It becomes possible to easily recognize the degree of urgency of the notification.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 150(a), an upper limit approaching notification is displayed overlapping the game background display. In addition, the display of the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be a constant display, but is a flashing display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit approaching notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302
An error generation command indicating that a door opening error has occurred is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), error notification is performed based on this error occurrence command. With the front door 102 open, the possibility of fraud (so-called fraud) is increased, so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is a notification with higher urgency than the notification prompting the counting. In addition, the front door 1
02 is open, the operation of the count button 171 is accepted. Figure 150(a)
), the display of the error notification of the door opening error is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Display of error notification of door open error (hereinafter referred to as
This is called door open error display. ) becomes a character display of "the door is open", which is always displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the display of the approaching upper limit notification, but it may be displayed on a layer before the display of the approaching upper limit notification so that it overlaps the display of the approaching upper limit notification. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on the layer behind the blinking upper limit notification, and the always displayed door open error display overlaps the blinking upper limit approaching notification display. You may do so.

FIG. 150(b) shows that the character display of the upper limit approaching notification is displayed every second in response to the door open error display which is always displayed. On the right side of FIG. 150(b), the character display of the warning that the upper limit is approaching disappears due to blinking display, and the door open error display of the remaining constant display is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, it is easy to see the highly urgent door open error display. Also, from the speaker 272, "
The door is open. ” is output, but the notification sound for the notification that the upper limit is approaching is not output.

Although the errors are not as urgent as the door open error, "Please stop the rotating reel", "A communication error has occurred, which is suspected of disconnection of wiring, disconnection of wiring, or power failure of the rental machine 700". ” may be displayed to request improvement, and together with these displays, a notification prompting counting may also be performed.

FIG. 151(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, a bet is made during the period from when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped if there is no payout, and after the completion of the payout if there is a payout, until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. If no operation has been performed, the state shifts to the demonstration state (demonstrating). Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the display shifts to the demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), during a game (during a bet, during 110 to 112 rotations of the reels, or during a payout), character display of the upper limit imminent notification is started, and a transition is made to the demonstration without the counting button 171 being operated. . In the performance image display device 157, the game background display was displayed during the game, but is switched to the demonstration display during the demonstration. The demo display is a display that introduces stories and characters. Even if the game moves to the middle of the demo, the character display of the approaching upper limit information is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold. Players are more likely to leave from now on if they transition during the demo. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from taking out only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the slot machine 100 while leaving game medals. The blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be displayed at all times to ensure the visibility of the approaching upper limit notification.

FIG. 151(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 151(b) displays a demonstration display. The notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demonstration display. In this case, since the operation of the count button 171 is desired to be performed preferentially, the notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size. In addition, below that, there is a "
Be careful not to forget to take your card or have it stolen." is displayed. again,
In this example, "the number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" exceeding the second payout threshold is displayed. In addition, "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time or may be displayed temporarily.
It does not have to be displayed like the example shown in 51(a).

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to less than the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the counting disappears (becomes hidden), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. It should be noted that the display of "the number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the effect image display device 157 has decreased to "14950".

FIG. 152(a) is a diagram showing a notification example when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number.

In FIG. 152(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X number of coins corresponds to a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value. On the effect image display device 157, a notification prompting counting is displayed because the "number of game medals" has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting the count is displayed, the count button 171 is pressed.
operation is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Count button 1 here
The long press operation of 71 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" is less than the prescribed number, the notification to prompt the counting is continued. That is, the notification prompting the counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50×100 for two times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure represents the period during which the notification prompting the counting such as "Please operate the counting button" is performed.

If you set the specification to start notification when the specified number is reached and immediately end the notification when the specified number is reached, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, and in this example, the specified number to start notification Continue reporting until the number is less than . By doing so, it is possible to reduce repetition of notification and counting operations. It should be noted that the notification prompting the counting may be performed within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. They can be encouraged to count large numbers.

The prescribed number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or any other threshold.

In addition, when the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a betting operation, the maximum number of medals will be reduced by three, but the number of medals will be reduced by the predetermined number.
Regardless of the value of "the number of game medals", the notification prompting the counting may be continued.

FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15000 in this example), a notification prompting counting is started. The notification prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting the counting is started, the player can press the counting button 1
Continue the game without operating 71. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout, a notification prompting the counting is performed once in a plurality of games (four games in this example). Therefore, the notification prompting the counting is not performed for three games after the notification prompting the counting is performed. During the three games in which the notification prompting the counting is not performed, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easy to see, and the interest in the game may be improved. note that,
When the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold value for payout, the notification prompting the counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during three games in which the count prompting notification is not performed, the count prompting notification will not be performed until the next payout second threshold value is exceeded. can't break On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the game in which the notification prompting counting is being performed, the notification prompting counting that has been performed until then disappears (is hidden). ).

Next, the notification regarding counting will be further described.

FIG. 153(a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. 153 ((a) to (c)) show the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358. As shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the counting is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000, 10
The effect image display device 157 displays that the number of sheets exceeds 00 and prompts the user to count. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, or continue to be displayed until the "number of game medals" changes next time (same hereafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 2000 and prompts the user to count. Furthermore, when the “number of game medals” exceeds 3000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 3000 and prompts the user to count. After that, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches 15000, which is the second payout threshold, FIG.
As shown in a), unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15000, the display prompting the counting is continuously displayed. In addition, when it reaches 15000, "15000
The number of game medals may be displayed continuously along with the character display of "more than the number of medals". It is also possible to display the real value of the "number of game medals" (for example, display "15015 medals"). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs in the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, the number of lost medals can be easily grasped. In addition, a display prompting for counting may be performed according to the elapsed time after starting a privilege game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a privilege game such as an AT game, a display prompting counting is performed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting is performed when 20 minutes have passed, and a count is performed when 30 minutes have passed is displayed. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 153(b) is a diagram showing an example when the count button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the state advantageous to the player is the AT state. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to the payout. During the game in this AT state, the effect image display device 15
7, a display (AT game display) indicating or indicating that the player is currently in the AT state is displayed. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 during the AT state, as in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. is displayed. In this example, the count button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

Here, the state advantageous to the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, and may be in a bonus (RB, BB) operating state or in an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase, and it can be said that the total number of game medals can be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals (for example, three) in the next game is also counted.
The next game cannot be played unless lending is performed from 0. In addition, even if the game is in an advantageous state, it happens that the "number of game medals" is consumed more than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 153(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state. Please proceed with the game", a notification (counting end induction notification) is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. In other words, before the counting of all game medals is completed, the counting end guidance notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is good to leave the game value" or a notification such as "If all are counted, the game cannot be played" may be used. In other words, the defect in the case where all game medals have been counted may be notified before all the game medals are counted.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 153(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that it is better to leave a small number of "game medals", he releases the counting button 171 and
Counting ends when 50 remain as the "number of game medals".

FIG. 153(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player.

The state disadvantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game is played repeatedly without lending. For example, a normal state can be mentioned. Figure 15
The effect image display device 157 shown in 3(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or indicates the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(c), the counting button 1 is pressed when there are 1000 "game medals".
The long-pressing operation of 71 is continued, and the "number of game medals" has decreased beyond a certain value ("100" in this example). If the player is in a disadvantageous state, the possibility of the player continuing the game after counting is finished is low.
In this example, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes zero. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "please stop counting".

FIG. 154(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 153(b). Figure 153 below
The description will focus on differences from the example shown in (b).

In the example shown in FIG. 154(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued, the counting is once terminated. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 154(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "counting is finished". ing. To restart the counting that has been forcibly terminated, press the count button 17
1 new operation is required.

FIG. 154(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated once is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 154(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154(a). Since it has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting is forced to end once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop the game even in an advantageous situation, and the player presses the count button 1
71 is operated again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, "50
Counting by "" is not effective, and only "1" is counted even if a long-pressing operation is performed. i.e.
The "number of game medals" decreases by "1" each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives. This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals in the next game (for example, 3) is also counted. Since the next game cannot be played, only "1" is counted in order to make it difficult for the number of game medals to reach 0.

Eventually, when the number of game medals becomes 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "counting finished".

It should be noted that when the player long presses the counting button 171 again, counting by "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 154(c) is an example of the modified example described with reference to FIGS. In the modified example, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, similarly to the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "Please stop counting".

However, even in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing the game, the same processing as in a state that is advantageous to the player (Fig. 154(a) and The process shown in FIG. 153(b) or the process shown in FIG. 153(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. If the VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also conceivable that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control section 302 by means of a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 78 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives the VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. I can't proceed. For this reason, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not valid, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not valid. That is, some of the game progress operations, which are of a plurality of types, are invalidated. In this embodiment, some of the operations are intended for operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the game is started (reel rotation is started) by the operation in the first half, the operation in the second half (stop button 13
7 to 139 (stop operation)) are effective. Therefore, although the game is limited, it can be advanced. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid while the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is being waited for, the operation is enabled and it is necessary to wait for the timing from scratch, which may give a troublesome impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though the counting is not possible, if the operation of the game progress operation until it is determined by lottery as to whether the internal winning is appropriate or not is enabled, for example, a result advantageous to the player can be obtained, resulting in a sudden and grand event. When the performance is started, there is a possibility that the player's desire to proceed with the game is heightened. As a result, although there was a possibility of delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal is turned off, the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 may be disabled. It is possible to quickly inform the player that the VL signal has turned off. Note that even if the VL signal is turned off, the main control unit 3
00 (slot machine 100) side error is not handled, and no notification regarding this is performed. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error cancellation operation is required, but if the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side is suspected, so an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). don't even ask. It should be noted that, as in the following example, a configuration may be employed in which an error is notified while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 155(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. there is Further, below it, "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed.
values are shown. Further, the state of the VL signal is shown below it.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), when the VL signal is on, the bet button 130,
132 and start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Also, an error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification display. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 155(a), a character display such as "Communication with rental machine not established" is displayed. As the error notification, it may be notified that the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine is not established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, the bet button 130
, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are both treated as invalid operations. That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are in a state ( Figure 1
If the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets as shown in 55(a), it is treated as an invalid operation. A small number of "game medals" means that the player can end the game at any time. encourage repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 155(b) shows a first modification in which the "number of game medals" is 15550, which is 15000 or more, which is the second payout threshold.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the next game insertion operation (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is disabled, and the opportunity to operate the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137-139 are eliminated.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 155(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game can be played. Until that happens, we don't stop the progress of the game so that the players can enjoy it. Further, the continuation of the game even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and the game is played in this state. There is a high possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the game is stopped.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 155(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off. is displayed.

FIG. 156 shows a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold.

The state shown in FIG. 156(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14000, which is less than a certain threshold value (15000 which is the second payout threshold value in this example as well). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification.

The state shown in FIG. 156(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are disabled. That is, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Also, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

The second modification shown in FIG. 156 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small may mean that the game has just started, and the progress of the game that has just started is not hindered. There is an aim. In addition, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear even if any trouble occurs in the slot machine 100, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will increase. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value), the progress of the game is stopped, and early repair by the clerk is urged. In addition, since the fact that the number of "game medals" is large means that the player can perform the counting operation at any time, the player should be notified early that the communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. , with the aim of encouraging early repair by the store clerk.

From the above explanation, the method of responding to the turn-off of the VL signal also changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the state is favorable or unfavorable to the player. It should be noted that the term "advantageous state" for the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and is referred to as a disadvantageous state. is a state (for example, normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations are treated as valid operations. Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some of the operations may be disabled.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state disadvantageous to the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, the rental machine 700
In order to make the player quickly notice that the communication with the player has not been established, and to prompt the clerk to repair the game at an early stage, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is advantageous to the player, there is a possibility that the state has just become advantageous. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player,
Before the "number of game medals" reaches a certain threshold value or more, the player is notified early, and the clerk immediately restores it. You can disable the operation of the part.

FIG. 157 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above description, even if the VL signal is turned off, the main control unit 300 (slot machine 1
00) side error and did not request an error cancellation operation to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100), but in the example shown in FIG. is treated as an error, and an error cancellation operation for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) is also requested. As explained earlier, the VL signal is turned off because
There is a high possibility that the power supply of the rental machine 700 is not turned on, or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, the main control unit 300 (slot machine 10
0), there is a high possibility that the error will occur again even if the error cancellation operation is performed. However, by making an error, the clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700 .

The example shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the rented machine 700 is not established, and the rented machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called even if the slot machine 100 does not immediately issue an error notification. Also, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, the count button 171
may not be sent to the rental machine 700 even if is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing so, the slot machine 100 side can perform notification at the minimum opportunity, and by suppressing excessive notification, the player can comfortably proceed with the game.

Note that after detecting the operation of the count button 171, the slot machine 100 continues to notify until the VL signal is turned back on.

[Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state advantageous to the player such as the AT state or the bonus state is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In such a state, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count less than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game If the number of game medals is counted while the AT game is being played, the number of game medals will continue to increase. Therefore, when an effect accompanying counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the execution period of this effect becomes long, and for example, it is difficult to perform an effect with an ending scene in anticipation of the end of the counting. Also, when a counting effect (FIG. 130, etc.) is executed in relation to the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, and the interest in the game decreases. On the other hand, by designing so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such a problem can be made less likely to occur. can be done. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, the minimum time required for one game is 4.
. If it is possible to count more than 10 medals in one second, the number of game medals continues to decrease during the AT game when counting is performed while the AT game is progressing. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the count button 171 is kept pressed, it is possible to expect a decrease of about 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when the production accompanying the counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the prospect of the end of the execution period of this production can be obtained. It should be noted that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases) according to the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the counting effect is not limited to the configuration in which the counting effect is ended in accordance with the counting process, and the counting effect may be ended even when the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is uniformly executed in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, the interest in the game will decrease due to the counting effect being executed for a long time, and the counting effect will interfere with other effects. Problems can arise. Such a problem can sometimes be prevented by ending the counting effect even while the counting process is continuing. In addition, as such a configuration, for example, the counting effect is ended depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting effect is ended when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . In addition, when the counting process ends before these conditions for ending the counting effect are satisfied, the counting effect may be terminated or the counting effect may be continued.

Further, the content of the counting effect may be changed according to the number of game medals counted. In this case, the effect content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the effect content may be set based on the cumulative amount of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. can be Further, for example, when the number of game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, the setting suggesting effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases). After the player has obtained a large number of game medals, the player can perform counting processing and select a game play. It should be noted that, regarding the counting effect corresponding to the number of game medals, if the counting process and the counting effect are terminated in the middle due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk that it will be lost.
For this reason, even after the counting effect ends in the middle, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from there
If a new counting process is started within the time limit, the immediately preceding counting effect (counting effect that ended in the middle) may be restarted from the middle. In addition, the counting effect is continuously executed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is started while the counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect being executed may be continued as it is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the predetermined time may be the same as the determination time of the long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If an effect requiring an operation on the operating means is executed during execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. Therefore, during the execution of the counting effect, the effect requiring operation of some operation means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). In addition, it is also possible to similarly limit effects that are extremely difficult to recognize when executed at the same time as the counting effects. That is, it may be configured to provide an effect that is restricted while the counting effect is being executed. In addition, it does not have to be an effect that requires the operation of the operation means, for example, an effect with a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to run and the result is not known until the end. may

It should be noted that, for example, when the counting process is started while the side lamps are lighting, which is an effect in an advantageous state, the effect by the side lamps changes to that by the counting effect, and so on. may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, when some kind of effect is started during execution of the counting effect, the counting effect may be replaced by an effect to be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes according to the degree of progress of the game during the execution of the counting process, for example, the character changes (for example, grows) when the game progresses during the execution of the counting process. can be

Further, when the number of game medals becomes 0 and the counting process and the counting effect are completed, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if the number of game medals is newly acquired and the counting process is started, immediately before The finished counting effect may be restarted from the continuation.

In addition, at least part of the game progress operation during execution of the counting process may be restricted such that the next game start operation cannot be performed while the counting process is being executed.

[Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing the count button 171 for a long time, the number of game medals up to 50 can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . FIG. 158(a) shows a change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed long from the state where the number of game medals is 120. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700,
Subsequently, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and all the remaining 20 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, until the number of game medals becomes 0. It is shown.

In the counting process, the current value of the number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting determination. (Fig. 101). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 158(b) shows the change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a). It is In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 remaining game medals. After that, all the remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the game medals become zero.

In the above-described embodiment, as in the example of FIG. 158(b), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is , and the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process (120 in FIG. 158(b))
and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 in FIG. 158(b)) does not match, and there is a possibility that it will become a work burden when the data of the counting process is confirmed later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is not immediately reflected. becomes 0, or the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals becomes 0, thereby completing the counting process that has been continued. For example, when the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, after counting 120 cards stored when the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, 8 cards, which increased during the long pressing of the counting button 171, are counted. do.
For example, when the long press of the counting button 171 is released in the middle, 60 sheets out of 120 stored when the long pressing of the counting button 171 is started are counted, and then the long pressing of the counting button 171 is resumed. Sometimes count the 68 memorized. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50→18. Figure 158(c)
158(a), 8 coins are paid out while the 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a). Not reflected (Fig. 1
58(a)), after the number of game medals reaches 0, the increment is reflected, and the counting process continues, showing that the number of game medals is 0. In this configuration, the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 158(c)) at the start of the counting process and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals becomes 0 once (FIG. 158(c) then 12
0) can be matched.

In FIG. 158(e), while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 cards stored at the start of the game, the 8 cards paid out are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

It should be noted that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is being continued, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or the counting process may be continued. If there is, it may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes zero.

The display of the game medal number display device 170 in the case of adopting the above configuration may also be displayed in accordance with the change in the game medal number. Further, the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is being continued may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the decrease display of the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is an increase in deviation). In FIG. 158(d), FIG. 158(c)
), there is shown a flow when adopting a configuration in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) is immediately reflected on the display. In this configuration, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the displayed number of game medals are in a state of deviation by the amount of the above increase, but they are in a state of matching at the end of the counting process. Even if the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 to end the counting process, the increase is reflected in the number of game medals at that time. The value of the number of game medals on the display becomes the same.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 again, the reflected increment can be transferred to the rental machine 700 . Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is being continued. It may be possible to transfer (the counting process continues, FIG. 158(e)).

In addition, the increase in the number of game medals can be due to payouts and settlement operations,
Either one of these may be the object of the configuration described in FIG. 158(c), or both of them may be the object.

[Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]
In the above-described embodiment, if you want to change the number of game medals to bet 1 after betting 3 game medals, the settlement button 134 is operated to change the 3 bets to the "number of game medals".
, the current bet number can be reduced to 1 by operating the bet button 130 for betting 1 card again. In this case, operation of the settlement button 134 and operation of the bet button 130 are required, but the operation may be performed by operating the bet button 130 once. As an example of such a configuration, the bet button 13 is pressed when the current bet number is the maximum value.
For example, when 0 is operated, after the settlement button process (FIG. 85) is executed, the process for the bet button operation is executed. Also, when the bet button 130 is operated with the current bet number at the maximum value, the amount of change when the bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is taken as the settlement number. Along with sending the settlement command (FIG. 80), the value of the current bet may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a portion of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and separate input processing and input commands are not required. These configurations are examples of configurations in which the current bet number is set to the minimum value based on the operation of the operation means capable of setting the minimum bet amount when the current bet number is at the maximum value. Equivalent to.

When the above configuration is adopted, by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, the current number of bets can be changed in the order of 0→1→2→3→1→2 .
The setting of the current bet amount can be changed only by the operation of .

If there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a betting sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For the operation of , the settlement sound and the input sound may be output in succession.
However, if two types of sounds are output for one operation, the player may be confused.
When the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value, the input sound may be output without outputting the settlement sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, a character or the like indicating that the settlement has been made is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. For the effect image display device 15
7 may not display characters or the like indicating that the payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the settlement button 134 has been operated instead of the bet button 130 .

[Regarding the production according to the number of game medals]
A configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of the operation of executing different effects according to the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, FIG. 159(a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 159(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 159(a3) shows the state when a medal is won in the AT state, and FIG.
a4) shows the state at the end of the AT state. In the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the value of "Possessed" in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "... GET" portion of the upper right of the screen. is displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 159(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the normal effect (FIG. 159(a2)) is executed without executing the special effect.

Next, FIGS. 159(b1) to 159(b3) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, from the state in which the normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 159 (b1)), the state in which the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number after winning medals ( 159 (b2)),
After that, the special effect is executed (Fig. 159(b3)). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM are different from the normal effect. That is, the effect changes in a state where many game medals have been obtained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the different effects are not limited to the example of the special effects described above, and various effects can be used. This different effect is not limited to the configuration using different effects, for example, in a state where the base effect is being executed, another effect interrupts part of it, so that the effect as a whole is different. good too. Further, for example, regarding the display of the number of game medals and the number of earned medals, the color of each digit is changed to make it rainbow, or the color of each digit is changed periodically. Numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Further, the state in which the effect is to be changed is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effect is different when the state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to switching the effect immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the effect to be executed differs depending on whether the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. The effect may be switched at the timing when the number reaches a predetermined number and some condition (for example, the number of games is completed, the switching lottery is won) is satisfied, or whether or not the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. It is good also as a structure with a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting the set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 159(c1), when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display (in this example, display of a family crest) suggesting a set value is executed at the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

Also, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above-mentioned special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting a set value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which serves as a trigger for making the , may be provided separately.

In the above example, the number of game medals is used as a determination target for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display. Even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals is used as the determination target, the same effect may be obtained. In addition, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of possessed medals, but a part thereof (for example, if the number of possessed medals is 500)
If there are 0, 1000 of them may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information about the number of medals possessed may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the host server handles the credit balance, the value of the credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals is used to calculate the above number of medals. may be the same as the configuration using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 or the information about the gaming value managed by the host server may be used as a determination target as to whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of possessed medals is 5000 or more, a different effect is executed. A configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are executed in each case.
It should be noted that the value of the determination target may not be displayed. It becomes easy to play, and it can be expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in the above example, the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals are used as the object for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of earned medals in the AT state may be used as the object for determination. In (d1) to (d7) of FIG. 160, the number of won medals is a predetermined number (300
0) is reached, an example of a case where a special effect is executed is shown. Within this flow
160(d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 159(b1) to (b3). 159 (b1) to (b3), since the execution of the special effect is determined based on the number of medals won.
Unlike , no special effects are executed at this point. After that, the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (Fig. 160(d5)), and then the state becomes a state in which a special effect is being executed (Fig. 160(d6)). In this example as well, the effect changes when the number of medals obtained increases, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which different effects and displays are executed when the number of game medals, the number of possessed medals, and the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. The number of medals may be used, and the number of won medals may be used for the execution of a different part of the effect, so that each may be properly used. Further, for example, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, such as the effect using the number of possessed medals and the effect using the number of earned medals being executed in parallel, may be employed. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of won medals may exceed the number of medals possessed, and in such a situation, a different effect is executed. As described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operation when errors are duplicated]
Operations related to errors will be described below using FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. Figure 161
[Fig. 2] is a diagram showing an example of an operation when the number of game medals overflows. Figure 162
[Fig. 2] is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the game medal number exceeding the upper limit error and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time.

In the above-described embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350) is counted by operating the count button 171.
can be moved to (counting process). 161(a1) to (a3), the counting button 171 is operated from the state where the number of game medals is 1336 ((a1) in FIG. 161) (
61(a2)), as a result of all the number of game medals being transmitted to the lending machine 700, the value of the number of game medals display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (
A series of flows up to FIG. 161(a3)) are shown.

Further, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit of the number of game medals.
When a winning combination with a payout is won, if the sum of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs (the response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 117). In this overflow state, it can be said that it is a kind of error because it waits for resolution of the overflow state without executing the addition processing by paying out. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 . 161 (b1) to (b4), the state in which the number of game medals is the upper limit value (Fig. 161 (b1)) is changed to an overflow state (Fig. 161 (b
2)), and then the counting button 171 is pressed long (FIG. 161(b3), 50 as the number of game medals is moved to the lending machine 700, and the value of the number of game medals display device 170 is decreased by 1), and the overflow state is reached. A series of flows until is resolved (FIG. 161(b4)). The message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 161(b4) indicates that the overflow state has been resolved, and is deleted after being displayed for several seconds. Also, when the overflow state is resolved, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed long, but if the count button 171 is not pressed long, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly hitting the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171. FIG.

Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, various errors (for example, the error in FIG. 76(b)) that hinder the progress of the game by the game control unit 302 can be detected. Since these errors require countermeasures on the side of the store, the configuration is such that the game cannot be progressed and these errors are notified. 162 (c1) to (c3) show a state in which an error has not occurred (FIG. 162 (c1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control unit (FIG. 1
62(c2)), and then the shop side takes measures, and the reset button R is operated to clear the error state (FIG. 162(c3)). In addition, the message "Error E0 resolved" in Fig. 162 (c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal number control section disconnection error) has been resolved.
It disappears after being displayed for a few seconds. The reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, an error related to the game control unit 302 that needs to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, a game sequence error in FIG. game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control section 350 that can be canceled by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal number control error). The medal number control error is an error that does not seriously affect the progress of the game compared to the game control error. Therefore, if these errors occur in duplicate, it is conceivable to preferentially resolve the game control error of high importance. An example of the operation when adopting such a configuration will be described below. In the following description, an example of a disconnection error of the medal number control section and an overflow state will be described, but the game control section 30
2 and the error related to the medal number control unit 350 are not limited to these errors, and can be applied to errors that employ similar canceling methods.

FIG. 163(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a combination with a payout is won from there, resulting in an overflow state. In FIG. 163(d2),
A state is shown in which a message prompting the operation of the counting button 171 is displayed to cancel the overflow state. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here, it is assumed that a disconnection error of the medal count control section occurred before this operation (game control error and medal count control error overlap). . FIG. 163(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 163(d2) is cleared and a message indicating that a disconnection error of the medal number control section has occurred is displayed. In the above example, when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control unit, a message (Fig. 16
3(d2)) is cleared. Messages regarding both errors may be displayed, for example, by displaying a message indicating an overflow state at a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a partial disconnection error has occurred. Further, when displaying messages regarding both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from the display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where the game control error and the medal count control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is not executed, so the overflow state is not canceled. Also at this time
A message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid. Figure 163(d
In 4), by operating the counting button 171, in addition to the message shown in FIG. A state in which a prompting message is displayed is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially process the disconnection error of the medal count control section.

After that, the store side takes measures and the reset button R is operated to eliminate the error state and return to the state where the overflow state occurs (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal count control error). FIG. 163(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the disconnection error of the medal number control unit has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 163(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that shown in FIG. 163(d2) is displayed. After that, as explained in FIG. 161, count button 1
By operating 71, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released.
FIGS. 163(d7) and 163(d8) show that the count button 171 has been pressed long and the overflow state has been resolved, as in FIGS. 161(b3) and 161(b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

It should be noted that, in order to realize the above operation, while the game control error is occurring, the processing corresponding to the operation of the operation means (in the above example, the count button 171) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed. good too. 164(e1) to (e3), the state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 164(e1)) changes to the state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal count control section (FIG. 164(e2)), and this error 164 ( e3)) is shown.

In the above example, the operation means for canceling the game control error and the operation means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such that any error can be canceled by the reset button R. It should be noted that the error canceling operating means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, operating means installed inside the gaming machine). For this configuration,
If a game control error occurs while a medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the operation means for error cancellation (the medal number control error is not canceled, and the game control error takes priority. By doing so, it is possible to preferentially resolve game control errors of high importance.

[Notification of counting process (1)]
In a state that is advantageous to the player, an effect for livening up the game may be executed. A case of lowering (or muting) the noise is provided. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the effect, and to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the count notification by the change of this effect sound volume is called the count notification A. FIG. Here, the configuration for changing the volume of the effect by counting processing will be mainly described, but the configuration for changing the effect in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, change in volume, change in sound quality, change in display) A part may be changed, and the color of the lamp and the lighting mode may be changed).

In some cases, a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), and a demo effect is executed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state).
In this configuration, an effect is continuously executed in a state advantageous to the player. The counting notification A can make the execution of the counting process known even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A on condition that it has stopped. In addition, the counting notification A is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption) in which the effect volume is lowered (or silenced) even after the time has passed since the last stop operation on the reel is adopted. In this case, the degree of volume reduction may be made different so as to be distinguished from the volume reduction due to the count notification A. Further, when the performance volume reduction due to the passage of time and the execution of the count notification A overlap, the volume reduction due to the count notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any reel is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification A is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the next game effect.
In addition, there is a case where the operation of the operation means for the effect is triggered to execute the effect for improving the interest of the game. For this reason, the counting notification A that is being executed is triggered by an operation on some operation means.
(eg, return the changed volume).

Also, in the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of sheets counted (for example,
130), and the counting sound is changed according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (for example,
130), but when the counting notification A is executed, a counting sound corresponding to such counting processing may be added. Further, for example, the count notification A is executed only when all the reels are not rotating, while the count sound is always output to the counting process. Alternatively, a counting sound may be output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here is set to 50% volume while the reels are rotating, and set to 100% volume while the reels are stopped. may be added. In addition, not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, counting sound output, count display related to the counting process, and combinations thereof) may be combined with the count notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and counting display is allowed to be executed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels are stopped). (only counting sound is output during reel rotation). As another example, a counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the end of the game (after the third stop operation, after all the reels are stopped). After), execution is permitted (only counting sound is output during reel rotation).

[Notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of sheets to be counted (for example, FIG. 13
0), and the counting sound is changed according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 13
0).

In a state advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to make the game lively, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In addition, a case is provided in which the effect sound in an advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, there are cases where the effect sound in an advantageous state is maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being diminished. Also, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the counting sound. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the count notification by this counting sound is called the count notification B. FIG.

While the count notification B has the above effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and since the effect to be executed is less important, all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels and all the reels It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B on condition that it has stopped. In addition, counting notification B is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the final stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any reel is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be arranged such that the counting notification B is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the next game effect.
In addition, there is a case where the operation of the operation means for the effect is triggered to execute the effect for improving the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is operated.

In the above description, the case where the count notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed have been described. For example, a different melody, different timbre, number of sounds, volume, etc.) may be substituted for this. That is, the case of executing the counting notification B is read as the case of outputting the counting sound of the first mode, and the case of not executing the counting notification B is read as the case of outputting the counting sound of the second mode. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second mode is a type of sound that does not hinder the production of an advantageous state, the counting process is executed without reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to make the player grasp that the game is in progress.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, the counting effect of the first mode is executed, and when the counting sound of the second mode is output, the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , and may be replaced with each other. Since there are various types of effects other than voice, for example, if the second aspect of the counting effect is a type of effect that does not hinder the effect of an advantageous state, the interest in the game is not diminished. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
A specific example of the configuration of the count notification (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an operation in the case of setting an output permission period for the sound when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. Figure 166 shows
FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a), and FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b).

Both FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted after a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when the betting operation is performed. It is an example of operation. FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show the period during which this counting sound is permitted and the period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. In the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output except when the counting sound is output.

The example of FIG. 165(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 166(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this case, FIG. 166(a2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (a2) after the start operation.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 166(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, between after the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game,
Suppose that the counting button 171 is operated to be long-pressed. This count button 17 is shown in FIG. 165(a).
One operating period is shown. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG.
) will be explained in order.

First, the timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 166(a3) shows how, at this timing (a3), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed.

The subsequent timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and FIG.
As shown in (a4), the display of FIG. 166 (a3) continues, and the AT effect sound continues as it is. When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (a5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (a5), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (a6) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the characters "counting" in the frame on the upper left of the screen have been erased.

The subsequent timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operations at the timings (a4) and (a5) correspond to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 165(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 167(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. FIG. 167 (b2
) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 167(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, after the first stop operation is performed and immediately after the start operation of the next game, count button 1
It is assumed that 71 is long-pressed. FIG. 165(b) shows the operation period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 165(b) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), counting sound is not permitted, and FIG.
As shown in 7(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 167(b2) continues. When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the long press of the counting button 171 continues. In FIG. 167(b4), at this timing (b4),
It shows how an effect (in this case, winning 8 game medals) is executed when a role is won. Note that the counting sound is not permitted at this timing (b4), and the AT effect sound is output. Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b5), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . By operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b6), FIG.
As shown in 6), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues. Further, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG.
It is in a state where the T production sound is output. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 167(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b8). Also, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT production sound is being output. Note that the characters "counting" in the upper left frame of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operation at the timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

[About the display and effect based on the information of the medal number control part]
In this embodiment, the medal number control unit 350 periodically (every 5.9 m8 ms in FIG. 74)
game control unit 3 by the medal number control state command (see FIGS. 74 and 78) sent to
02, information such as the number of game medals can be grasped (FIG. 92). Some of these pieces of information are sent to the first sub-controller 400 by a security command (FIG. 74) sent from the game controller 302 periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 74). The first sub-controller 400 can perform various displays and effects control based on these pieces of information. Also, the player can grasp these information through these displays and effects.

Here, in the above configuration, the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 3 when the power is turned on
02 is later than the time to establish communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on, the game control unit 302 still has the medal number control unit 350 Although the medal number control state command has not arrived from the game control unit 30
2 to the first sub-controller 400 . Since the security command transmitted at this time does not reflect the information of the medal number control section 350, if various displays and effect control are performed based on the information included in this security command, it will differ from the actual state. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the security command may be transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after the communication between the game control section 302 and the medal count control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the security command for the first time after the power is turned on after receiving the medal count control state command. again,
The security command may be transmitted after providing a sufficient waiting time.

Further, until the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is established, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command, it may not execute the processing based on the security command. For example, even if the first sub-controller 400 ignores security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or ignores security commands received until a certain waiting time elapses, good.

Information indicating the communication state between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the medal number control state command (the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating normal communication is included in the security command and transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and effect control on the condition that this information is included. It may be made possible. With this configuration, it is possible not to give the player information that is different from the actual state.

Here, a supplementary description of the operation from the transmission of the security command to the transmission of the next security command will be provided. For example, if information such as the number of game medals changes between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and effect control. put away.
In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in accordance with the control related to the game (Fig. 74). By performing various displays and effects control, it is possible to create a state in which the latest information is reflected.

<others>
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but it is not limited to this, and game balls (for example,
The present invention can be applied to slot machines using pachinko balls as game media, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, and the like.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains electronic data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the electronic data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , and those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by: Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Said input operation means includes first input operation means (eg, 1 bet button 130) and second input operation means different from the first input operation means (eg, MAX bet button 13
2) including
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first insertion operation means has been operated, the gaming value number control means outputs the first insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested insertion number of one sheet) as the insertion operation information. send to
Second input operation information different from the first input operation information (for example, when the requested number of input sheets is 3 input command) to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the number of requested insertions of one) is performed as the game value update process,
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, the game value update process is a second game value update process different from the first game value update process (e.g. subtraction),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by
The game control means is
Based on the reception of the response information within a predetermined period of time after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the effect control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 84 ),
Means for outputting the predetermined game information to the effect control means even when the response information is not received within the predetermined period from the transmission of the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 84, if the response command is not received, step S1114 is executed assuming that the response command is abnormal),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information ([operation of game control unit 302 by input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] description reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, a slot machine 100), wherein the game machine:
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion Command transmission, etc.)]]), and a gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value control means controls an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700,
host server) and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is
In the counting process, the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer and the game value update process is performed (for example, step S351 in FIG. 101).
3, S3514),
When the input operation information is received while the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer in the counting process and the game value update process is performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means stores a part of the game value number stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one counting process, and It is a means for subtracting the part of the game value number (for example, since the maximum value of the number of counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 107), it may be part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above, the game value number control means receives the input operation information during a period from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process. If it is, means for transmitting the first response information to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command will be other than the re-request),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when receiving the second response information (for example, No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit number (for example, determination of No in step S1306 in FIG. 86), and the operation to the input operation means is performed (For example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 84 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
Means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to 124, Yes in step S4604 of FIG.
Judgment of s, the same value as the number of insertion requests is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132)
there is
The game control means, based on the fact that the maximum number insertion operation means is operated, the maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command to set the maximum number of bets as the requested number), which is the insertion operation information. A means capable of transmitting to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([deformation for input operation Example] See),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on input limit flag ON),
The requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124, step S4604 of FIG. 124,
Both S4621 is determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is not included in the input operation information. , the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is set to 0
(for example, FIG. 1
22 to FIG. 124, determination of No in step S4604 of FIG. 124, Y in S4621
Determination of es, the number of game medals is all subtracted (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as a subtraction by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the game value number before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inputting the game value of the game value number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a minimum number input operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means, based on the fact that the minimum number insertion operation means is operated, sets the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a required number of 1) as the insertion operation information to the game value means capable of transmitting to the number control means,
The game value number control means is means for deriving the minimum game value number that can be used in one game as the requested number of insertions, based on the reception of the minimum number insertion operation information,
The minimum number input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 122),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112), the game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to 124, Yes in step S4604 of FIG.
Judgment of s, the same value as the number of insertion requests is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update processing based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 122 to 124, Yes in step S4604 of FIG.
Judgment of s, the same value as the number of insertion requests is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 122 to 124 , Steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 124 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is means for not performing the insertion process (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 122, the insertion request number is not entered),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value control means controls an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700,
host server) and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The counting process includes a communication cycle (for example,
300ms),
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during counting is to be counted next time. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when receiving the settlement operation information during execution of the first counting process, stores the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number storage. Means for summing the number of game values stored in the means and subjecting it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 113),
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during counting is to be counted next time. ),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The counting process includes a communication cycle (for example,
300ms),
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during counting is to be counted next time. ),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value control means controls an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700,
host server) and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The counting process includes a communication cycle (for example,
300ms),
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example ,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process will be the object of the counting process after the next time),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number storage means. A means for summing up the game value numbers stored and subjecting them to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 117),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the receipt of the payout information has been completed normally ( For example, step S1607 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example ,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process will be the object of the counting process after the next time),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The counting process includes a communication cycle (for example,
300ms),
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward, When the payout information is received during execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example ,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process will be subject to the counting process from the next time onward).

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. It is a means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105).
, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. It is means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, [
Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value, the game value number control means controls the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 117),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the second value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117),
The second value is a value greater than the first value (for example, step S in FIG. 117).
4B03, step S4107 in FIG. 106),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means has a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device, and the game value control means controls the game value. When the number of game values stored in the storage means does not exceed the first value, the response information is stored in the transmission buffer, and the response information is transmitted along with the transmission of the response information to the external processing device. After the buffer is cleared, it is means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3712 in FIG. 103). judgment of Yes),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), sending the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, No is determined in step S3703 of FIG. 103, and step S3706 is not executed)
, means for transmitting the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) to the external processing device ([Lending receipt result response (regular transmission from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700) 〕reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. It is means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, [
Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A game media management device characterized by: again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. It is means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, [
Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. It is a means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105).
, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, in FIG. 101). Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value control means controls the external process. While updating the communication number with the device (for example, determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value control means controls the external Without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, step S37 in FIG. 103
03, step S3706 is not executed), the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is transmitted to the external processing device and stored in the game value storage means. is a means for maintaining the number of game values in which the
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game medium management device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, FIG. 102).
step S3713),
The game value control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game medium management device,
It is means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 103).
judgment),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 27
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means has a power failure when the counting promotion state is set,
When the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after power is restored, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, FIG. 135(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG. 107;
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) is sent to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the game value number. A game media management device characterized by repeated transmission.

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101)
,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent and
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (
Figure 134),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second value may increase in degree according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (Fig. 134).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means has a power failure when the counting promotion state is set,
When the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after power is restored, the means is capable of setting the counting acceleration state and maximizing the degree of increase (
FIG. 135(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 27
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value stored by the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value control means controls the game value stored by the game value storage means. is a means for reducing the degree of increase of the second value compared to the case where exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 135 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to the first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the game medium management device, and can set a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, FIG. 125 step S4208),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the game value number is sent to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (
Figure 134),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101)
,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (
Figure 134),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1
, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4
209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined notification is provided (Fig. 138).
, Fig. 139),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 27
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is powered off when the automatic counting state is set,
When the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when the power is restored thereafter, the means can set the automatic counting state (for example, FIG. 137(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored by the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (see FIG. 1).
37(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game value storage means (for example, a RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to the game value used in a game; and a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1
, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be transmitted to the game media management device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the game media management device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (for example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101)
,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1
, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 126). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4
209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and processes the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when power is restored after a power failure, the gaming value control means sets the predetermined operating state as an effective operating state to the gaming value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). sent,
The game value number control means is in the predetermined operation state before the power failure when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power failure occurred and the power is restored thereafter. Means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the predetermined operation state has been maintained after power is restored regardless of the time (FIG. 140(a));
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the gaming value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms). The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting acceleration state when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since a power failure occurred and then the power was restored. There is (Fig. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 27
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control section 350) for performing game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when power is restored after a power failure, the gaming value control means sets the predetermined operating state as an effective operating state to the gaming value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101)
,
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A gaming system characterized by: Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (eg, 300 ms),
The display means is means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 143 and 144),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
An operation means (for example, a count button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the fact that the operation means is operated,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value as the gaming value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined cycle,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG. 107;
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. (e.g., FIGS. 143-147),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (For example, in step S3016 of FIG. 95, Yes
s determination),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above, the abnormality of the game control means is reported with priority over the abnormality of the game value information control means ([operation against error (game control section 302)]
reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value information control means has a predetermined cycle (for example, 8 interrupts (0.745 ms×8
) is a means for transmitting information to the game control means in 1 command transmission),
The game control means is a means for judging abnormal communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91, [Action against error (game control Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be performed (eg, step S300 in FIG. 95).
7, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (For example, in step S3016 of FIG. 95, Yes
s determination),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 82). step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (For example, in step S3016 of FIG. 95, Yes
s determination),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91),
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be performed (eg, step S300 in FIG. 95).
7, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of game control unit 302 by payout (
Sending payout commands, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the progress of the game when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 in FIG. 89 is No, and the process is repeated. Operation of unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server) and processes the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process for subtracting the number (for example, FIG. 10
1 steps S3513 and S3514),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of game control unit 302 by payout (
Sending payout commands, etc.)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 117, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of game control unit 302 by payout (
Transmission of payout command, etc.)]]), and a game system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
Game value number control means (for example, , medal number control unit 350),
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of causing the effect means to perform a demonstration effect when the game is not being executed,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is performed even when the demonstration effect is being performed (for example,
FIG. 151(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs the process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The amusement machine includes game control means (for example, the game control unit 3
02) and
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that bi-directionally communicates with the game medium management device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means; ,
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to game values used in games;
game value control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect means (for example, effect image display device 157,
Speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An amusement machine equipped with main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) to progress a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
The main control means receives a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device
a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the situation of
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, does not execute error notification for the VL signal abnormality).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The main control means executes the processing for transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process for subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the game medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is means for performing game value update processing for updating the number of game values related to game values used in games (for example, updating the number of game medals), and the main control means is the game medium management device. Means capable of deriving the number of the game values lent out based on the receipt of the lent information from
Step S4003 in FIG. 105, Step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game media management device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103)
,
The main control means receives a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device
a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the situation of
The main control means is a means capable of putting the game into a state in which it is impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 83),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
counting operation means (eg, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 130) accompanying the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. Small (in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]
The amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect provided with an end condition different from the end of the counting process ([
Concerning the difference between payout and counting process], see the configuration that may end the counting effect even if the counting process is continuing),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The specific effect is a effect that requires a player's operation,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect whose content changes according to the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the there is

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
After the count effect ends in the middle due to the end of the counting process, the effect control means
Means for restarting the immediately preceding counting effect from the middle when the new counting process is started within a predetermined time,
During the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], even after the counting effect ends in the middle, the immediately preceding counting effect (counting effect that ended in the middle ) is resumed from the middle)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means continues the counting effect within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and when the counting process is newly started while the counting effect is continuing, the counting effect is executed. It is a means of continuous execution,
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the counting effect continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the counting effect being executed is maintained as it is), is described.

A game media management device (for example,
rental machine 700), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information (for example, a settlement command) regarding settlement to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the first information, performs the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then updates the game value with respect to the first information. A means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets to 0 based on the fact that the adjustment operation means is operated.
A game machine characterized by this (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (response command not used)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting second information (for example, an input command) regarding the input to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the second information, and performs the game value update process based on the input request number. A means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on the reception of response information to the second information,
A gaming machine characterized by
is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process is continued, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after sending the game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum number of counting processing is continued) See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Regarding the configuration related to the payout and settlement operations during the counting process], either the payout or the settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at a transmission timing that periodically visits (for example, transmission of the number of game medals by counting processing (count notification ) every 300 ms, FIG. 72),
When the game value number control means terminates the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number at the current transmission timing out of the transmission timings, the game value control means It is means for transmitting the game value number of the increment at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 158(c) and 158(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals at the time of counting processing is completed first, the increment is sent.),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Regarding the configuration related to the payout and settlement operations during the counting process], either the payout or the settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, effect image display device 157, game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the game value number while the counting process continues, the game value number control means controls the game value number excluding the increase in the game value number to the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is means capable of performing subtraction display for subtracting the game value number in accordance with the game value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting the increase when there is an increase in the game value while the counting process continues (FIG. 158(d) ( f)
),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 85). step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Regarding the configuration related to the payout and settlement operations during the counting process], either the payout or the settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, FIG. 89
steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example,
includes a bet button 130);
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means determines a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the game value control means to the game value control means;
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
including audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277),
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine characterized by ((see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation])) is described.

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example,
includes a bet button 130);
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information,
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The voice output means is means for not outputting the settlement sound when the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the bet amount is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

again,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of stored game values acquired in the game (
For example, the number of possessed medals is the accumulated game value acquired in the game),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means executes a first effect when the number of determination objects has not reached a predetermined number, and executes a second effect based on the fact that the number of determination objects has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the determination target at least in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be the determination target is displayed. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the number of acquired game values in the certain game state (in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], (Refer to the configuration in which the production using the number of medals held and the production using the number of medals earned are executed in parallel),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number contained in the external information ("Production according to the number of game medals"
If the counting process is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, the number of won medals may exceed the number of medals held").
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect according to the determination target ([
Effect according to the number of game medals], "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed").
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103
4),
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the game value number in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possessed" in FIG. 160),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect in accordance with the number of acquired game values in the certain game state,
(In the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], a configuration for determining the number of won medals in the AT state, see FIG. 160) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired game values in the certain game state (for example, the value of "... GET" in FIG. 160),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for updating and displaying both the display of the obtained number and the display of the number of game values when a game value is obtained in the certain game state (for example,
Figure 160 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing effects corresponding to the number of game values in the certain game state configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
when the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error is irresolvable;
A game machine characterized by
is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (Fig. 161
reference),
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration in which the error cancellation operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication]),
is described.

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error becomes the non-resolvable first state. ,
The notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state,
A game machine characterized by
is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 163 (d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 163 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the notification means executes the first error notification in the first state,
Means for interrupting the second error notification that has been executed (Fig. 163 (d2) (d3)
reference),
The notification means is means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 163(d4) to (d6)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the notification means executes the first error notification in the first state,
It is a means for continuously executing the second error notification ([Regarding the operation at the time of error duplication]
in the description, see the configuration that displays messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
the second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process;
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 161(b2) to (b4)) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
game control means (e.g., game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means; and storing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game. game value storage means (for example, RAM 358);
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2) and
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means may decrease the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped. is a means of
(See the configuration for executing count notification A in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The voice output means, in the first gaming state, when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has passed since all of the rotating reels have been stopped. A means by which the volume of the first effect sound may be reduced,
During the description of the gaming machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. (See configuration for executing count notification A on the condition of ), is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means outputs a second effect sound (for example,
is a means capable of outputting a counting sound),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The sound output means is means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is reduced.
A game machine characterized by that (see the configuration that terminates the counting notification A being executed in response to an operation on some operating means in the description of [Regarding counting processing notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2) and
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
Production means including the audio output means (for example, production image display device 157, speaker 272
, 277, various lamps 420) and
with
The game control means is a means capable of setting a second game state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production,
The effect means is means for not executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The effect means is means capable of executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
During the description of the amusement machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demo effect is executed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. ,
), is described.

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is means for setting a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player, and the sound output means produces a first effect sound (for example, AT state) in the first game state. , AT state production sound) is a means capable of outputting,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means is means for maintaining a state in which the first effect sound is being output when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2) and
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for outputting the second effect sound when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. be,
(See the configuration for executing count notification B in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2) and
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
(Refer to the configuration in which count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first game state to when the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration that does not execute count notification B after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2), a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the first mode when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. is sometimes a means of
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 11
2) and
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the second mode when the counting process is being executed while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. is a means of outputting
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
When the counting process is executed during the period from when the predetermined operating means is operated in the first game state to when the plurality of reels start rotating,
A means for outputting the second effect sound in a second mode,
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 4
20) effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means for executing a first control related to the game value number based on the reception of the command.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on normal communication between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means sends the command at a predetermined period (for example, when the security command is 1
00 ms cycle) to the effect control means,
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, various processing commands in FIG. 72) including the information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means in accordance with the progress of the game. is a means to
The effect control means is a means for executing the first control based on the reception of the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (for example, a rental machine 7
00), are described.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter>
Next, referring to FIGS. 168 and 169, a game table (ball game machine (pachinko machine),
A difference number counter and a virtual difference number counter provided in a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine) will be described.

The difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are
A counter that can count the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game.
It is composed of a hardware counter or the like provided in the control unit.

For example, when the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) is the value of the number of payout medals (the amount of game value given as a result of the game) in the advantageous section (second section). It is possible to count a value (acquisition difference number) obtained by subtracting the value of the number of inserted medals (amount of game value used in the game) from the number of medals.

In addition, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) is used to calculate the value of the safe (the number of game balls paid out) (the amount of game value given as a result of the game) to the out (the number of game balls launched). ) (the amount of game value used in the game) is subtracted (acquisition difference number) can be counted.

On the other hand, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is a counter capable of counting the acquired difference obtained by subtracting the game value used in the game from the game value awarded as a result of the game. The difference number counter (first counting means) is the same as the difference number counter (first counting means). different.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/update condition>
FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing an example of update conditions for the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means).

In the slot machine 100 described with reference to FIG. 1 and the like, when the first operation is performed in a certain game, both the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means are updated. It consists of

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (1) when the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is first stop operated (first stop left operation) in a 3-bet game (3BET game), or (3) When an operation different from push order navigation is performed in a 3-bet game (3BET game), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) means) values are updated.

It should be noted that (3) in a 3-bet game (3BET game), if an operation different from the pushing order navigation is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is set to the actual difference number (=actual difference number) in the game. While updating based on the number of payouts - the actual number of bets), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference number in the game (= It is updated based on the prescribed payout amount for the winning hand - actual bet amount).

In addition, in the slot machine 100, in the advantageous section (second section), A
T state (first state) may occur, and in the state before AT state (first state), if the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the virtual difference number The value of the counter (second counting means) may also be updated. In the AT state (first state), when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the virtual difference number counter The value of (second counting means) may also be updated, and when the value of the differential sheet count counter (first counting means) is updated in the state after the AT state (first state) ends In some cases, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is also updated.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous to the player and during the advantageous state. We can provide you with a playground.

Also, the update amount when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated is the same as the update amount when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated. is preferred.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

On the other hand, the slot machine 100 is configured such that when the second operation is performed in a certain game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (2) in a 3-bet game (3BET game), the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 other than the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is the first stop operation (first (4) 2 bets (2
BET game) is performed, or (5) 3 bet game (3BET) in the ED state
game) is performed, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated.

In addition, the update conditions of the first counting means and the second counting means are not limited to this example. operation (recommended operation in the first game. For example, the first stop operation of the left stop button 137) is performed, the value of the first counting means (for example, the difference number counter) is updated, the second The value of the counting means (for example, the virtual difference number counter) is updated, and the second operation (
Deprecated operation in primary game. For example, when the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 is pressed (first stop operation), the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated. good.

According to this example, when the first operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the second If the operation is performed, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is not updated, so the value that does not reflect the fact that the second operation is performed in the first game It can be held by the second counting means, the second counting means can grasp the value of the first operation, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, when the recommended operation in the first game is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the first When a non-recommended operation is performed in a game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, so that the fact that the non-recommended operation is performed in the first game is not reflected. The value can be held by the second counting means, the value of the recommended operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having the A+AT function, the value of the second counting means (for example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated in the two-coin bet game during the winning bonus or in the first stop other than the left. You may

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/advantageous section>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 168(b) is a diagram showing an example of a difference number counter (first counting means), a virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means.

As described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, the slot machine 100 manages the game state by dividing it into a non-advantageous interval (first interval) and an advantageous interval (second interval). Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation means) (operation navigation,
Operation instruction notification) is possible, but this advantageous operation mode is not notified in the non-advantageous section.

Then, if the transition condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (first section) (for example, if a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination and the lottery is won), the advantageous section (
second section).

Also, if the termination condition is met in the advantageous section (second section) (for example, if the advantageous section (second section) continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or if the advantageous section (second section) second interval) exceeds a predetermined net increase (for example, 2400 or 3000)), the advantageous interval (second interval) ends and the non-advantageous interval (first section).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referred to in the reset determination processing (second processing) of the advantageous section (second section),
When the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) reaches a first value (for example, 65279), it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the advantageous section (Second section) is shifted to a non-advantageous section (first section).

On the other hand, the update condition of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means), and is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means). 2),
(4) and (5)) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (second count means)
is not referred to, but is updated when the first operation (for example, the operations (1) and (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, so the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be updated when the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated.

According to this example, by holding the acquisition difference number of the second section (for example, the advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section is calculated by two counting means. It can be grasped by the means and can provide a fair playing machine.

Also, before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. is reached (first case), and in this first case, the advantageous section (second section) does not end.

According to this example, when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, the second interval can be terminated, and the fair gaming machine considering the second operation is realized. can provide.

Also, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. There is a case (second case), and in this second case the advantageous interval (second interval) ends.

According to this example, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it can be grasped that the second interval has ended without the second operation being performed. .

Also, the first value (65279 in decimal in this example) is the initial value (62879 in decimal in this example) plus the first absolute value (2400 in decimal in this example). and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than zero.

According to this example, even if the acquired number exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the game state of the player, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/ED state>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the ED state will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, the slot machine 100 manages the game state by dividing it into a non-advantageous interval (first interval) and an advantageous interval (second interval). When the number of remaining games in the second interval) becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the ED state is entered, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) indicating the end of the advantageous interval (second interval)
A performance is performed.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the fact that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (second section) is less than or equal to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). However, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) may be a predetermined number (for example,
2000).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the ED shift processing (first processing) of the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referred to. When the value of the number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (for example, 2000), it is determined that the conditions for transition to the ED state are satisfied, and ED is detected in the advantageous section (second section). transition to state.

On the other hand, the update condition of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means), and is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means). 2),
(4), (5) operations) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means)
does not refer to

Note that counting means different from the number-of-difference counter (first counting means) and the virtual number-of-difference counter (second counting means), A third counting means capable of counting the acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the value amount is further provided, and the advantageous section (
The third counting means is referred to in the ED transition processing (first processing) of the second section) and the reset determination processing (second processing) of the advantageous section (second section), and each determination is executed. It may be configured to

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter / Freeze effect>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the freeze effect will be described.

As described above, the slot machine 100 provides an effect (
Freeze effect) can be executed, and AT lottery processing (first lottery) can be executed (
In addition to the first lottery means), a freeze lottery process (second lottery means) capable of executing a freeze lottery (second lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect is provided. The freeze lottery (second lottery) is a lottery with a higher game value than the AT lottery (first lottery).

The AT lottery process (first lottery means) is performed by the first operation (for example, (1
), (3) operation) is performed in the first game (for example, a three-bet game in an advantageous section, a non-navigation information game) AT lottery (first lottery) can be executed, but the second (for example, the operation of (2), (4), (5) shown in FIG. 168 (a)) is configured not to execute the AT lottery (first lottery) in the first game ing.

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed in the second operation, and the player is put in a disadvantageous state. you can get it.

On the other hand, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means), as shown in FIG. (means) to execute a freeze lottery (second lottery).

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), thus providing a fair gaming machine. can do. In addition, since the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means in which the second operation intentionally performed by the player is reflected, the second lottery is not affected. can provide.

<Example of counting>
Next, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) in chronological order. Before describing the counting example, the items shown at the top of FIG. 169 will be described.

"Section" is information for managing the state of the game, and in this example, there are a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). "Production state" is information for managing the production state. section), there are a normal state (normal state B), a chance state, an AT state, and an ED state.

"Navigation of display means" indicates the display mode of operation navigation on the liquid crystal display device 157, and "3-1-2" stops in the order of middle stop button 138→right stop button 139→left stop button 137. "3-2-1" indicates that an operation navigation prompting to perform an operation (first stop operation) is displayed, and "3-2-1" indicates stop operation in the order of right stop button 139→middle stop button 138→left stop button 137. "1-2-3" indicates that the operation navigation prompting to perform (first stop right operation) is displayed, and "1-2-3" is left stop button 137→middle stop button 13
8 → the right stop button 139 to display the operation navigation prompting to perform the stop operation (first stop left operation).

In addition, hereinafter, the first stop left operation may be referred to as "L first stop", and stop operations other than the first stop left operation, that is, the first stop operation and the first stop right operation are collectively referred to. It may be referred to as "an operation other than the L first stop".

"Number of bets" indicates the number of medals bet in the game (game value amount used in the game), "3" indicates that a 3-bet game (3BET game) was performed, and " 2” indicates that a two-coin bet game (2BET game) was performed. In addition, hereafter, two bet games (2
BET game) may be referred to as "a bet number other than 3".

The winning combination indicates the winning combination (including losing) and the chance number in the game, the "common bell" indicates the small combination 4 (common bell), and the "push order bell" indicates the small combination 5. (push order bell), "Replay" indicates a replayed hand, "2BETBB" indicates a bonus in a two-bet game, and "Loss" indicates that neither hand was won. ing.

"Stop order" indicates the actual order of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137-139.
For example, "LCR" indicates that the stop operation (first stop left operation) was performed in the order of the left stop button 137→middle stop button 138→right stop button 139, and "CRL" indicates that the middle stop button 138 →Right stop button 139→Left stop button 137 indicates that the stop operation (first operation during stop) was performed in this order.
39→middle stop button 138→left stop button 137 (first right stop operation). The “acquired number” indicates the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game (game value given as a result of the game).

The "first counting means" and the "decimal notation" to the right are the difference number counter (first counting means)
(count value) are expressed in hexadecimal and decimal numbers, respectively, and the "difference from the initial value in decimal notation" is the initial value (in this example Then 16
f59f in decimal number, 62879 in decimal number) and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in decimal number.

"Second counting means" and "decimal notation" on the right side are numerical values representing the value (count value) of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) in hexadecimal and decimal, respectively. "10
The difference from the initial value in base notation" is the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal) and the virtual difference number counter (second It is a numerical value representing the difference from the value of the counting means) in decimal notation.

"Player's credit" is a numerical value indicating the number of medals (game value amount) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this example, 50 medals are credited at the start of the game. .

<Embodiment of counting/(1) Power OFF→(2) Power ON>
The state of "(2) power ON (setting change)" shown in FIG. 169(2) corresponds to the state of "
In the "power off" state, the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, and the setting is changed.

In the same state, the section and the effect state are the non-advantageous sections (
first period), the normal state is set, and the values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to the initial values (
In this example, it is set to f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal.

According to this example, the initial value of the first counting means (in this example, the differential number counter) is a value greater than 0 (62879 in decimal notation in this example). Even if the value of one counting means is less than the initial value, the value can be counted without considering the minus, and the control load can be reduced.

In this example, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to the same value, but they may be different values. ,
In this case, the initial value of one counter may be greater than the initial value of the other counter,
On the contrary, it may be smaller. For example, the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is 1
It may be 32879 or the like in decimal. The initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be 0 or a value smaller than 0.

In addition, the timing for setting the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to the initial values (the timing for resetting) is not limited to when the power is turned on. section) is met, the slot machine is reset, the settings are changed, the RAM is cleared, and an error occurs. , or all. Also, the trigger for setting the initial value in one counter and the trigger for setting the initial value in the other counter may be the same or different.

<Embodiment of counting / (2) Power ON → (3) Transition to advantageous section>
In the state of "(3) transition to advantageous section" shown in Fig. 169(3), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section), and the stop order LCR is lost (the payout number is 0). ).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 50 to 47 (=50-3). However, the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous section (first section), so each value is , is maintained at the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal).

In addition, in the game, since the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was won), the advantageous section (second section) normal from the next game transition to state.

<Example of counting / (3) transition to advantageous section → (4) L first stop>
In the state of "(4) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169(4), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the shift, and the stop order LCR is lost ( It is in a state where the payout number 0) has been won.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section) counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). f59f, 628 in decimal
79) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal (=62879-3).

<Example of counting / (4) L first stop → (5) L first stop>
In the state of "(5) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (5), a three-bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and replay (replay role) is performed in the stop order LCR. ).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay role) wins, and the difference number in the game is 0 (= winning number 3 - betting number 3). , the credit is maintained at 44, and the values of both the difference count counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference count counter (second counting means) are also maintained at f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal. .

<Example of counting / (5) L first stop → (6) L first stop>
In the state of "(6) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (6), a three-bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a common bell (payout number 15) is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is added from 44 to 56 (=44+12). 168(a)(1), when the first operation (L first stop operation in this example) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the Since both the number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), the respective values are f59c in hexadecimal number and 62876 in decimal number.
It is updated to f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 (=62879+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting / (6) L first stop → (7) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(7) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169(7), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the stop order CRL is lost (the number of payouts 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 56 to 53 (=56-3). 168(a) (2), as described with reference to FIG. When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f59c in hexadecimal, 62876 in decimal, f5a8 in hexadecimal, 62888 in decimal (=62891-3 ), but
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
maintained at 91.

In the subsequent game periods of "(7) first stop other than L" to "(12) first stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the advantageous section (second section) 3 bet game · When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the non-navigation information game), the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, Since the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game. The value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, in the subsequent game periods of "(7) first stop other than L" to "(12) first stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the three pieces of the advantageous section (second section) Betting game/non-navigation information game) When the non-recommended operation in the first game (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) Since the value is updated and the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter in this example) is not updated, the value that does not reflect that the non-recommended operation has been performed in the first game is set to the second counting means. , the second counting means can grasp the value of the recommended operation, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 100, in the first game (in this example, a 3-bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), the second operation (in this example, the first If the stop operation) is performed, the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed, so the following "(7)
The AT lottery is not executed during the game period of "first stop other than L" to "(12) first stop other than L".

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed by the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), and the player is put in a disadvantageous state. In this example, the L first stop operation) can be prompted to perform the first operation and play the game.

<Example of counting / (7) First stop other than L → (8) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(8) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169(8), a three-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a loss (payout number) is performed in the stop order RCL. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 53 to 50 (=53-3). 168(a) (2), as described with reference to FIG. When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). means) does not count (update), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is f5a8 in hexadecimal, 62888 in decimal, to f5a5 in hexadecimal, 62885 in decimal (=62888-3 ), but
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
maintained at 91.

<Example of counting / (8) L first stop → (9), (10) first stop other than L>
The states of "(9) L first stop" and "(10) L first stop" shown in (9) and (10) of FIG. A coin-betting game is performed, and a replay (replay role) is won in stop order CRL and stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay role) wins, and the difference number in the game is 0 (= winning number 3 - betting number 3). , the credit is maintained at 50, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5a5 in hexadecimal number and 62885 in decimal number, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (10) First stop other than L → (11) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(11) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (11), a three-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a common bell (payout number 15)
It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is added from 50 to 62 (=50+12). , As described using FIG. When an operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means)
is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update).
85 is updated to f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 in decimal (=62885+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. .

In addition, the first combination (common bell in this example) that results in a payout number larger than the bet number when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed is in the normal state. Since the probability of winning is lower than that of losing, even if the second operation is continuously performed, the virtual difference number will not become larger than the actual difference number, and the player will not be advantageous. We can provide you with a playground.

In addition, the first combination is not limited to the "common bell" with 15 payouts regardless of the stop order,
For example, it may be a "biased bell" with a payout of 1 on left first stop and a payout of 15 on non-left first stop.

<Example of counting / (11) First stop other than L → (12) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(12) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (12), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a common bell (payout number 15)
It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is added from 62 to 74 (=62+12). , As described using FIG. When an operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means)
is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update).
97 is updated to f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 in decimal (=62897+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. .

<Example of counting / (12) First stop other than L → (13) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(13) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (13) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state of , a two-coin bet game is played, and a win (payout number 0) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference number in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credit is subtracted from 74 to 72 (=74-2). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is hexadecimal. f5bd is updated from 62909 in decimal to f5bb in hexadecimal and 62907 in decimal (=62909-2).
It is kept at 62891 in base.

In the subsequent game period of "(13) bet number other than 3" to (23) 2 BETBB consumption", when the first bet number game (in this example, 2 bet game) is performed, the first count means (in this example,
The value of the difference number counter) is updated, and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, so the value does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game. can be held by the second counting means, and the value obtained by the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means,
A fair playground can be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed. The AT lottery is not executed during the gaming period from "(23) 2BETBB consumption" to "(23) 2BETBB consumption".

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed in the first bet number game (in this example, the two bet game), and the player is in a disadvantageous state. A game (in this example, a three-coin bet game) can be urged to play the first game.

<Example of counting / (13) number of bets other than 3 → (14) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(14) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (14) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state of 2, a two-coin bet game is played, and a win (payout number 0) is won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0. Therefore, the difference number in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credit is subtracted from 72 to 70 (=72-2). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is hexadecimal. f5bb is updated from 62907 in decimal to f5b9 in hexadecimal and 62905 in decimal (=62907-2).
It is kept at 62891 in base.

<Example of counting / (14) number of bets other than 3 → (15) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(15) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (15) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state of 2, a two-coin bet game is played, and a win (payout number 0) is won in the stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credit is subtracted from 70 to 68 (=70-2). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is hexadecimal. f5b9 is updated from 62905 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal (=62905-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal, 10
It is kept at 62891 in base.

<Example of counting / (15) number of bets other than 3 → (16) number of bets other than 3>
"(16) Number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (16) is a two-coin bet game performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and replayed in the stop order LCR (replay role). It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay role) wins, and the difference number in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal number and 62903 in decimal number, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (16) number of bets other than 3 → (17) number of bets other than 3>
169(17) shows "(17) number of bets other than 3", a two-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is replayed (replay role) in the stop order CRL. It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay role) wins, and the difference number in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal number and 62903 in decimal number, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (17) number of bets other than 3 → (18) number of bets other than 3>
169(18) shows "(18) bet numbers other than 3", a two-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is replayed (replay role) in stop order RCL. It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay role) wins, and the difference number in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal number and 62903 in decimal number, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (18) number of bets other than 3 → (19) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(19) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (19) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is added from 68 to 81 (=68+13). 168(a) and (4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference counter (first counting means) counts (updates), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) counts (updates)
Therefore, the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is f5b7,10 in hexadecimal.
From 62903 in base to f5c4 in hexadecimal and 62916 in decimal (=62903+1
3), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5a in hexadecimal
b, maintained at 62891 in decimal;

<Example of counting / (19) number of bets other than 3 → (20) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(20) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (20) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state of , a two-coin bet game is played, and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is added from 81 to 94 (=81+13). 168(a) and (4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference counter (first counting means) counts (updates), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) counts (updates)
Therefore, the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is f5c4, 10 in hexadecimal.
From 62916 in base, f5d1 in hexadecimal, 62929 in decimal (=62916+1
3), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5a in hexadecimal
b, maintained at 62891 in decimal;

<Example of counting / (20) number of bets other than 3 → (21) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(21) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (21) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, the difference number in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is added from 94 to 107 (=94+13). 168(a) and (4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated).
From 62929 in zero to f5de in hexadecimal and 62942 in decimal (=62929+
13), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, kept at 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (21) Number of bets other than 3 → (22) 2BETBB winning>
In the state of "(22) 2 BETBB winning" shown in Fig. 169 (22), a 2-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and 2 BETBB (payout number 0) is performed in the stop order LCR. It is in a prize-winning state.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credit is subtracted from 107 to 105 (=107-2). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous interval (second interval), the difference number counter ( The first counting means) counts (updates), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) counts (updates)
Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5de, 10 in hexadecimal.
From 62942 in base, f5dc in hexadecimal, 62940 in decimal (=62942-2
), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal
, is maintained at 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (22) 2BETBB winning → (23) 2BETBB digestion>
The state of "(23) 2 BETBB digestion" shown in FIG. 169 (23) is that the BB game is won in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), the two bet game is performed in the BB game, and the stop order It is in the state of winning a common bell (payout number 15) in LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is 105 to 118 (=105+13).
, and as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous section (second section), regardless of the stop order, the difference number The counter (first counting means) counts (updates), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) counts (
update), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is f5dc in hexadecimal.
, from 62940 in decimal to f5e9 in hexadecimal to 62953 in decimal (=6294
0+13), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (23) digestion of 2BETBB → (24) second chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(24) chance (AT win)" shown in FIG. It is in a state of winning the payout number 15) and winning the AT lottery.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 118 to 130 (=118+12).
, and the first operation (L first stop operation in this example) was performed in the advantageous section (second section) as described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) (1) , both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is , f5e9 in hexadecimal
, from 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal to 62965 in decimal (=6295
3+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, from 62891 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal (=62
891+12).

<Example of counting / (24) Chance (AT winning) → (25) AT>
In the state of "(25) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (25), a three-bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section). →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 130 to 142 (=130+12).
, the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/non Since it is not a navigation information game), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the difference number counter (first counting means) values range from f5f5 hex, 62965 decimal, to f601 hex, 62977 decimal
(=62965+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is 1
f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal to f5c3 in hexadecimal, 629 in decimal
It is updated to 15 (=62903+12).

<Embodiment of counting / (26) AT>
The state of "(26) AT" shown in Fig. 169 (26) is the final game of the AT state in the advantageous section (second section), in which a 3-coin bet game is performed, and "Middle (1) → Right (2 )→Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 442 (=previous credit 430 +
12), the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game・ Since it is not a non-navigation information game), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (
second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6d7 in hexadecimal and 63191 in decimal.

<Embodiment of counting/(26) AT → (27) normal state>
The state of "(27) normal state" shown in Fig. 169 (27) is the A
In the normal state after transition from the T state, a 3-coin bet game is played and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 312 to 324 (=312+12).
, and the first operation (L first stop operation in this example) was performed in the advantageous section (second section) as described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) (1) , both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6e3 in hexadecimal and 63203 (=63191+12) in decimal.

<Embodiment of counting / (28) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(28) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is 68 (=previous credit 71-3). Along with being subtracted, as described using FIG. , the second operation (
In this example, when the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) counts (updates), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) counts ( update), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is edcf in hexadecimal and 60 in decimal.
879, and the difference from the initial value exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and f5ab in decimal. 62
891.

In the same state, the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) (in this example, 6 in decimal)
0879) is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) (the difference from the initial value is negative), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, 10 62891 in base) is greater than the initial value (62879 in decimal in this example) (the difference from the initial value is positive).

According to this example, the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) and the second counting means (
In this example, one of the values of the virtual difference number counter) may be larger than the initial value and the other may be smaller than the initial value, so it is referred to (or not referred to) in production, lottery, etc.
Since the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means may not match, the playability can be enhanced.

<Example of counting / (28) Stop other than L → (29) L first stop>
In the state of "(29) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (29), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the shift, and the stop order LCR is lost ( payout number 0)
It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section) counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means),
The value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is edcc in hexadecimal and 60876 in decimal.
(=60879-3), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is 16
It is updated to f5a8 in base and 62888 (=62891-2) in decimal.

As described with reference to FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means) determines the number of virtual difference numbers without referring to the value of the difference number counter (first counting means). Since it is configured to execute the freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the counter (second counting means), the player intentionally performs the second operation (other than L in this example) first stop operation)
To provide a fair game machine because even if the can be done. In addition, the second lottery ( Since it does not affect the freeze lottery), it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

<Embodiment of counting/(30) number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(30) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (30) is an advantageous section (second section)
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is 118 (=previous credit 105+
13), and as described with reference to FIG. Since the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is , f in hexadecimal
5e9, updated to 62953 in decimal and the difference from the initial value has turned positive, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.
maintained at

In addition, in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), a two-coin bet game is performed, and the stop order L
When the common bell (payout number 15) continues to be won in CR, the difference from the initial value of the difference number counter (first counting means) may turn positive as in this example.

<Example of counting / (30) number of bets other than 3 → (31) second chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(31) th chance (AT winning)" shown in FIG. It is in a state of winning the payout number 15) and winning the AT lottery.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 118 to 130 (=118+12).
, and the first operation (L first stop operation in this example) was performed in the advantageous section (second section) as described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) (1) , both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is , f5e9 in hexadecimal
, from 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal to 62965 in decimal (=6295
3+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, from 62891 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal (=62
891+12).

<Example of counting / (31) Chance (AT winning) → (32) AT>
In the state "(32) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (32), a three-bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section). →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 130 to 142 (=130+12).
, the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/non Since it is not a navigation information game), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the difference number counter (first counting means) values range from f5f5 hex, 62965 decimal, to f601 hex, 62977 decimal
(=62965+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is 1
f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal to f5c3 in hexadecimal, 629 in decimal
It is updated to 15 (=62903+12).

<Example of counting / (32) AT) → (33) AT>
In the state of "(33) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (33), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), and operation navigation "middle (1) → right (2)" is performed. →Left (3)”, and won the press order bell (payout number 15) in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is subtracted from 142 to 139 (=142-3). In addition, the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantage section (second section) 3-bet game/non-navigation notification Since it is not a game), even if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, as described with reference to FIG. is updated based on the actual difference number in the game (in this example, -3 (= actual payout number 0 - actual bet number 3)), while a virtual difference number counter (second counting means) , assuming that the stop operation was performed according to the operation navigation, the virtual difference number in the game (in this example, 12 (= the prescribed payout number of the winning combination 1
5--Update based on the actual number of bets 3)).

Specifically, the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is f601 in hexadecimal, 62977 in decimal, to f5fe in hexadecimal, 62974 in decimal (=62977-3).
, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5c3, 10 in hexadecimal.
From 62915 in base to f5cf in hexadecimal and 62927 in decimal (=62915+1
2) is updated.

<Example of counting / (34) AT>
In the state of "(34) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (34), a three-bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), and the operation navigation "middle (1) → right (2)" is performed. →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 4043 (=previous credit 403
1+12), the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game・Since it is not a non-navigation information game), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (34) AT → (35) AT>
In the state of "(35) AT" shown in Fig. 169 (35), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), and the operation navigation "Right (1) → Middle (2)" is performed. →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 4043 to 4045 (=4043+
12), the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game・ Since it is not a non-navigation information game), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (
second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is
fd6e in hexadecimal, 64878 in decimal to fd3f in hexadecimal, 64 in decimal
890 (=64878+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from fd3f in hexadecimal, 64831 in decimal, to fd4b in hexadecimal, 64843 in decimal (=64831+12). be done.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the differential number counter (first counting means) is set in the ED transition processing (first processing) of the advantageous section (second section). When the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (in this example, 2000 in decimal and fd6f in hexadecimal), the conditions for transitioning to the ED state are established. , and shifts to the ED state in the advantageous section (second section).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 in decimal (=64878+12), and the difference from the initial value is 2011 in decimal, reaching 2000. As a result, it shifts to the ED state.

<Example of counting / (35) AT → (36) ED>
The state of "(36) ED" shown in FIG. 169 (36) is the ED state that has shifted from the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), and a three-coin bet game is performed. → middle (2
)→Right (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 4055 to 4067 (=4055+
12), and, as described with reference to FIG. counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). From 64890 in base to fd86 in hexadecimal and 64902 in decimal (=64890+12)
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is fd4b in hexadecimal,
It is kept at 64843 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (37) ED, (38) ED>
The states of "(37) ED" and "(38) ED" shown in (37) and (38) of FIG. 169 are the ED state of the advantageous section (second section), and the 3-coin bet game is performed. , operation navigation "middle (
1)→Right (2)→Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is updated from 4427 to 4439, and FIG. 168 ( a) As explained using (5), in the ED state, a three-bet game (
3BET game) is performed, counting (updating) the number-of-difference counter (first counting means)
However, since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is feeee→fefa in hexadecimal and 65262 in decimal.
→Updated to 65274, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (38) ED → (39) ED>
In the state of "(39) ED" shown in FIG. 169 (39), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the ED state of the advantageous section (second section). →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 4439 to 4461 (=4439+
12), and, as described with reference to FIG. counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Although the number is updated to 65286 (=65274+12) in base, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the difference number counter (first counting means) is set in the reset determination process (second process) of the advantageous section (second section). The value of this difference number counter (first counting means) is the first value (1 in this example).
65279 in decimal), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied, and the advantageous section (second section) is shifted to the non-advantageous section (first section). Let

In this example, the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is updated to ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 in decimal (=65274+12), and the difference from the initial value is 2407, resulting in 24
Since it reaches 00, the ED state of the advantageous section (second section) transitions to the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section). In addition, when it is determined whether or not the upper byte is ff, and it is determined that the upper byte is ff, the ED state of the advantageous section (second section) is changed to the non-advantageous section (first section). A transition to the normal state may be performed, and in this case, the capacity of the determination process associated with the transition can be reduced.

According to this example, by holding the acquisition difference number of the second section (advantageous section in this example) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section is set to 2 It can be grasped by one counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, the first value (65279 in decimal in this example) is the initial value (62879 in decimal in this example) plus the first absolute value (2400 in decimal in this example). Since the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than 0, even if the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the game state of the player, can also leave room for the player to recover.

<Example of counting / (39) ED → (40) unfavorable section>
The state of "(40) non-advantageous section" shown in Fig. 169 (40) is a state in which the advantageous section (second section) has transitioned to the non-advantageous section (first section).

In this state, the section and the effect state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, similarly to when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter ( The values of the second counting means) are initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal).

<Embodiment of counting / (40) non-advantageous section → (41) transition to advantageous section>
In the state of "(41) Advantageous section transition" shown in Fig. 169 (41), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section), and the stop order LCR is lost (the payout number is 0). ).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 4461 to 4458 (=4461-3).
However, the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous section (first section), so each The value is kept at the initial value (f59f hexadecimal, 62879 decimal in this example).

In addition, in the game, since the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was won), the advantageous section (second section) normal from the next game transition to state.

<Embodiment of counting / (41) Advantageous section transition → (42) L first stop>
In the state of "(42) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (42), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the stop order LCR is lost ( payout number 0)
It is in a state of winning a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is 4458 to 4455 (=4458-3).
, and the first operation (L first stop operation in this example) was performed in the advantageous section (second section), as described using FIG. 168 (a) (1) , both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so that each value is the initial value (16 in this example). f59f, 10 in hexadecimal
62879 in hexadecimal) to f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal (=62879-
3) is updated.

<Embodiment of counting / (43) L first stop>
In the state of "(43) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (43), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the stop order LCR is lost (payout number 0 ).

In the game in the same state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference number in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is 2458 (=previous credit 2461-
3), and the advantageous section (
second interval), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated). , each value is f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal (=6287
9-3), and the difference from the initial value is a predetermined value (2000 in decimal in this example).
).

As described with reference to FIG. 168(b), the slot machine 100 is configured to execute a freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). In this example, when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal), (second lottery) is executed.

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) Since it is not reflected and does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery in this example), a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, in this example, the winning probability of the freeze lottery in the state of "(28) first stop other than L" shown in FIG. It is configured to increase the winning probability of the freeze lottery in the state of "(43) L first stop" and the advantage after winning the freeze effect.

That is, in this example, the value (
In this example, the difference from the initial value) is higher than the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery) in the second value (in this example, 12 in decimal). The second lottery at a third value (-2000 decimal in this example) is more favorable to the player (e.g., more likely to win the second lottery, or is larger), and the third value is smaller than the second value.

According to this example, the worse the game situation of the player excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery is to the player. It is possible to improve the desire to play.

Also, the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) regarding the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) becomes the third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal). Since the second value (12 in decimal notation in this example) may be obtained later, the second lottery can be executed according to the game state of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. can.

<Example of counting / (44) AT>
In the state of "(44) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (44), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), and operation navigation "middle (1) → right (2)" is performed. →Left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15. Therefore, the difference number in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 6638 (=previous credit 662).
6 + 12), the game is an advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/navi notification game, and the first game (advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game・Since it is not a non-navigation information game), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fe9b in hexadecimal and 65179 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal.

In this example, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is ff13, 10 in hexadecimal.
The number is updated to 65299 in decimal number, and the difference from the initial value is 2420 in decimal number, reaching 2400. However, as described with reference to FIG. counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279) before the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value (first case ), and in this first case, since the advantageous interval (second interval) does not end, when the value of the second counting means, which is not updated by the second operation, reaches the first value, the first It is possible to finish the second section and provide a fair gaming machine that takes into account the second operation.

Although illustration is omitted, in the slot machine 100, when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 2400), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value (second case), and in this second case, the advantageous interval (second interval) ends, so the first counting means and the second , both reach the first value, it can be grasped that the second interval has ended without the second operation being performed.

<Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of arrival determination processing>
In the examples of FIGS. 168 and 169, the difference number counter is updated, and when it is determined that the value has reached a predetermined value, the advantage section is terminated. In this configuration, it may be possible to reduce the load of determination processing depending on the bit pattern when a predetermined value is obtained. Therefore, after determining a predetermined value for such a bit pattern, the initial value is determined by back-calculating from the amount of change required to reach this value, thereby reducing the load of the processing for determining the end of the advantageous section. be able to. Such an example will be described below.

First, in the first example, when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter is incremented by 2401 or more (advantageous section continues until 2400 is added), the initial value is set to "0xf59fh (62879)". This is an example of In this example, the predetermined value is "0xff00h (65280)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "ff". Until 255 is further added to this value to obtain "0xffffh (65535)", the upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "ff". That is, if the upper two digits are "ff", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401-2656. Since the update does not exceed this range at once in the game, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined value has been reached by determining whether or not the upper two digits are "ff".

In the second example, the initial value is set to "0xe69fh (59039)" when the advantageous interval ends when the differential number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (advantageous interval continues until 2400 is added). is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0xf000h (61440)", and the upper one digit (4 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits is "f". Until 4095 is further added to this value to obtain "0xffffh (65535)", the upper one digit of the four hexadecimal digits remains "f". That is, if the upper digit is "f", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401-6496. Since the update does not exceed this range at once in the game, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined value has been reached by determining whether or not the upper digit is "f".

In the third example, the initial value is set to "0x769fh (30367)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter is incremented by 2401 or more (advantageous section continues until 2400 is added). is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0x8000h (32768)" and the upper 1 bit is "1". The upper 1 bit remains "1" until 32767 is further added from this value to "0xffffh (65535)". That is, when the upper 1 bit is "1", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401-35168. Since updating exceeding this range is not performed at once in the game, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined value has been reached by determining whether or not the upper 1 bit is "1".

In the fourth example, the initial value is set to "0x0a60h (2656)" when the advantageous interval ends when the difference counter is decremented by 2401 or more (advantageous interval continues until 2400 is subtracted). is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0x00ffh (255)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "00". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "00" until 255 is further subtracted from this value to "0x0000h(0)". That is, when the upper two digits are "00", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401-2656. Since updating exceeding this range is not performed at once in the game, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined value has been reached by determining whether or not the upper two digits are "00".

In the above example, the case where all upper digits up to a specific digit have the same bit pattern has been described. It may be determined that the two digits are "ee" or that the upper 7 bits are "1110111". In this configuration, if the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more, the initial value should be set to "0xe49f00h (58527)."

As in the above four examples, after determining a predetermined value that can target only the upper several digits of the corresponding bit pattern for determination, the amount of change in the difference number counter is calculated backward from there. , an initial value can be derived. Note that the above bit pattern is carried up (or carried down) when it reaches a predetermined value, and the same value (0 or 1) continuing from the lower digits and the value of a specific digit are inverted. state. For example, in "0xff00h (65280)" in the first example, the eighth digit (8th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. It's becoming In the second example, "0xf000h (61440)", the 4th digit (4th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. there is In the third example "0x8000h (32768)", the first digit (first bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. there is In the fourth example, "0x00ffh(255)", the eighth digit (8th bit) from the top is 0, and the lower digits are all 1, and these values are inverted. there is

In the above configuration, only upper digits including specific digits need to be handled on the program, and the register capacity for reading them can be reduced. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined value has been reached using only upper digits including a specific digit, thereby reducing the processing load and capacity load.

In the above example, even if the difference number counter changes within a certain range after reaching the predetermined value, the determination process can be performed. For this reason, it is possible to perform actions such as playing a certain number of games after reaching a predetermined value or executing some kind of effect.

Furthermore, in the above example, regarding the range of the value of the differential number counter, the first range in the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai is opposite to the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai. narrower than the second range of directions. For example, in the first example, the initial value is "0xf59fh (62879)" and the first range is 62879-65535, whereas the second range is 0-62879 and the first range is is narrower than the second range. Depending on the content of the game, the difference number counter may be updated in the direction opposite to the predetermined value, but even in such a case, there is room for recovery of the difference number counter, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1)
00, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, medalless slot machine) is a game comprising a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) A platform that can notify a first section (eg, unadvantageous section) that does not notify an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (eg, stop buttons 137 to 139) and an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means and a second section (e.g., advantageous section), and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., a lottery to transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internally elected hand,
If you win this lottery) move to the second section, and if the end conditions are met in the second section (for example, if the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 sheets) is exceeded) the second After completing the section, it is possible to shift to the first section, and the first counting means calculates the amount of game value given as a result of the game in the second section (for example, the value of the number of payout medals) the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) can be counted, and the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example, 65279 ), the end condition is satisfied, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. It is a table.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, by holding the acquisition difference number of the second section (for example, the advantageous section) with the first counting means and the second counting means, the end of the second section Conditions can be grasped by two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, when the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed in the first game (for example, the advantageous section (second section) 3-bet game/non-navigation information game), the above-mentioned When the value of one counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and a second operation (for example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the first The value of one counting means may be updated and the value of the second counting means may not be updated.

With such a configuration, the value that does not reflect the fact that the second operation is performed in the first game can be held by the second counting means, and the value that the first operation is performed by the second counting means can be grasped, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With such a configuration, the value that does not reflect the non-recommended operation performed in the first game can be held by the second counting means, and the recommended operation value can be grasped by the second counting means. , can provide a fair playground.

Further, the first lottery means (for example, AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (for example, AT lottery) is provided, and the first lottery means is capable of executing the first lottery (for example, AT lottery), and the first lottery means It is a means capable of executing the first lottery in one game, and the first lottery means is means not executing the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first lottery is not executed in the second operation, and the player is put in a disadvantageous state. You can play.

Further, the update amount when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the update amount when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, one of the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means may be larger than the initial value and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means referred to (or not referred to) in the performance, the lottery, etc. may not match, thereby improving the game playability. can be done.

Also, the initial value (for example, 62879) of the first counting means may be a value greater than zero.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the game situation of the player, the value can be counted without considering the minus, and the control load can be reduced. .

Further, the first value (for example, 65279) is a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (for example, 2400) to the initial value (for example, 62879). may be a value greater than zero.

With such a configuration, even if the winning number exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the game state of the player, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover.

In addition, in the second interval, the player may enter a first state (for example, AT state), and in the state before entering the first state, the value of the first counting means is The value of said second counting means may also be updated when updated, and in said first state,
The value of the second counting means may be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated, and in a state after the first state is terminated, the value of the first counting means The value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before, after and during a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state). , can provide a fair playground.

In addition, the first combination (for example, common bell), which will result in a payout amount larger than the bet amount when the second operation is performed, may have a lower winning probability than losing in a normal state. .

With such a configuration, even if the second operation is continuously performed, the virtual difference number will not become larger than the actual difference number, and the player will not have an advantage. A playground can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second Two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) and a second lottery (for example,
A second lottery means (for example, freeze lottery processing) capable of executing a freeze lottery), and does not notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139). It has a first section (e.g., non-advantageous section) and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and a transition condition is set in the first section If it is satisfied (for example, if a lottery to move to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning hand and the lottery is won), the transition to the second section is performed, and if the end condition is satisfied in the second section ( For example, when a predetermined net increase in the number of sheets (for example, 2400 sheets) is exceeded), the second section can be ended and the transition to the first section can be performed, and the first counting means can move to the second section , the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount of game value granted as a result of the game (for example, the number of paid out medals) can be counted. means, and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279), the termination condition is satisfied, and when the value of the first counting means is updated The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the second operation (for example, L If the first stop operation other than
The value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the second lottery means performs the second lottery with reference to the value of the second counting means. is a means of performing
It is a game machine characterized by

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery. can provide.

Also, the second lottery means may be means for executing the second lottery without referring to the value of the first counting means.

With such a configuration, the second lottery is not affected by the fact that the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means in which the second operation intentionally performed by the player is reflected. , can provide a fair playground.

Also, the value for the second counting means is a third value (in this example, The second draw at decimal -2000) favors the player, and the third value may be less than the second value.

With such a configuration, the worse the game situation of the player excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery is to the player. It is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

Further, the value related to the second counting means may become the second value after becoming the third value.

With such a configuration, the second lottery can be executed according to the game state of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second A game machine comprising two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., internal winning) If a lottery to move to the advantageous section is executed based on the winning combination, and the lottery is won), the transition to the second section is performed, and if the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (For example, when exceeding 2400)) End the second section and shift to the first section, and the first counting means is awarded as a result of the game in the second section means capable of counting an acquisition difference obtained by subtracting a game value used in a game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the obtained game value (for example, the number of medals to be paid out); When the value of one counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279),
When the end condition is satisfied and the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the first operation is performed in the first game. case, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and when the second operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the value of the second counting means reaches the first value before the value of the first counting means reaches the first value. (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and in the first case, the second section does not end.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the value of the second counting means, which is not updated by the second operation, reaches the first value, the second interval can be ended, and the second operation is taken into consideration. A fair playground can be provided.

Further, when the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the value of the second counting means reaches the first value (hereinafter referred to as "second case"). , and in the second case, the second interval may end.

With such a configuration, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it can be grasped that the second interval has ended without the second operation being performed. can be done.

Further, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With such a configuration, the value that does not reflect the non-recommended operation performed in the first game can be held by the second counting means, and the recommended operation value can be grasped by the second counting means. , can provide a fair playground.

Further, the first lottery means (for example, AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (for example, AT lottery) is provided, and the first lottery means is capable of executing the first lottery (for example, AT lottery), and the first lottery means It is a means capable of executing the first lottery in one game, and the first lottery means is means not executing the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first lottery is not executed in the second operation, and the player is put in a disadvantageous state. You can play.

Further, the update amount when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the update amount when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, one of the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means may be larger than the initial value and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means referred to (or not referred to) in the performance, the lottery, etc. may not match, thereby improving the game playability. can be done.

Also, the initial value (for example, 62879) of the first counting means may be a value greater than zero.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the game situation of the player, the value can be counted without considering the minus, and the control load can be reduced. .

Further, the first value (for example, 65279) is a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (for example, 2400) to the initial value (for example, 62879). may be a value greater than zero.

With such a configuration, even if the winning number exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the game state of the player, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover.

In addition, in the second interval, the player may enter a first state (for example, AT state), and in the state before entering the first state, the value of the first counting means is The value of said second counting means may also be updated when updated, and in said first state,
The value of the second counting means may be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated, and in a state after the first state is terminated, the value of the first counting means The value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before, after and during a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state). , can provide a fair playground.

In addition, the first combination (for example, common bell), which will result in a payout amount larger than the bet amount when the second operation is performed, may have a lower winning probability than losing in a normal state. .

With such a configuration, even if the second operation is continuously performed, the virtual difference number will not become larger than the actual difference number, and the player will not have an advantage. A playground can be provided.

Also, in the description above,
first counting means (for example, main control unit 300, first counting means);
determination means (for example, main control unit 300);
A game table comprising
having a first section (e.g., non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous mode of operation of the stop switch can be reported;
Transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of the transition condition in the first section,
transitioning to the first section based on the judgment that the end condition is satisfied by the judgment means in the second section;
The first counting means, in the second section, uses the result of subtracting the game value used in the game from the game value given as a result of the game to obtain a difference number (for example, a difference number counter). ) is an updateable means of
The determination means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change from the initial value of the acquisition difference number reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The judging means is means for judging whether or not the termination condition is satisfied by using a value from the higher order to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the acquisition difference number (for example, <to reduce the load of arrival judgment processing). About the initial value of the counter of >),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, the processing load can be reduced and the data capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where all the digits of the first counting means are determined.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the bit pattern corresponding to the total value of the initial value and the first value, all values of digits lower than the specific digit are values obtained by inverting the value of the specific digit (for example, < About the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting means is means capable of updating the acquired difference number even in a game after the amount of change from the initial value of the acquired difference number reaches the first value (for example, About the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the judgment process>),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to accurately count even after the amount of change from the initial value of the acquired difference number reaches the first value.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The initial value is a value greater than 0 (see, for example, <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, counting can be continued even when the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the game situation of the player.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first counting means is means capable of updating the acquisition difference number within a predetermined range;
The predetermined range has a first range to which the sum of the initial value and the first value belongs and a second range different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary,
The first range is narrower than the second range (see, for example, <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, even if the number of acquisition differences falls within the second range due to the game situation of the player, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) that may update a value when the first counting means updates the acquired difference number;
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, the acquisition difference number of the second section can be held by the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and the game machine is fair. can provide

Further, the amusement machine according to the present invention comprises a shooting device for shooting a ball into a predetermined game area, a winning opening configured to allow the ball fired from the shooting device to enter, and a ball entering the winning opening. Equipped with a detection means for detecting, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects the ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (identification information), a game ball enters a winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device stops displaying after changing the pattern to notify the transition of the game state.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured on a single chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be integrated into one chip.
The secondary control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main controller and the first sub-controller, the communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be one-way communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

<Production based on the difference counter>
Next, effects based on the difference number counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 175. FIG.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 170 is a graph showing an example of transition of the difference number in a certain game period, and FIG.
1 and FIG. 172 are diagrams showing examples of various effects during a game period shown in FIG.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter / power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 170(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, and the setting is changed.

At the same timing, the section and effect state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (second The value of the first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to initial values CT1 (for example, 0) as initial settings when the power is turned on.

The initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be values greater than 0 (positive values) or values less than 0. (negative value). In addition, the timing for setting the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to the initial values (the timing for resetting) is when the power is off.
It is not limited to time N. When the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met, when the slot machine is reset, when the setting is changed, when the RAM is cleared, an error occurs. may be one, several, or all of the cases where Also, the trigger for setting the initial value in one counter and the trigger for setting the initial value in the other counter may be the same or different.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT1 (normal state)>
170 (1) and (2), the game period PT1 is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the number of difference is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game of the non-advantageous section (first section), the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was elected). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The game period PT1 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. Difference number CT2 from
(eg -1500. Second point).

In addition, the game period PT1 (normal state) in FIGS. 170(1) and 170(2) is
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value). It is sometimes called "minus area" or "minus area".

On the other hand, for example, in the game period PT8, etc., the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (first state), and hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "plus area of difference number" or "plus area".

In the game period PT1 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example).
A certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

Here, as a certain effect, a reel effect (freeze effect) performed using the reels 110 to 112, a display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears, an existing This corresponds to an effect with a high appearance rate of the effect and an effect (such as a demo effect) that suggests a negative area (second state).

These certain effects may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability even in the positive area of the difference number. , the probability that a certain effect will appear in the negative area of the difference number is higher, and a certain effect is
It is configured such that the minus area (second state) is more likely to appear (is executed) than the plus area (second state) of the difference number.

It should be noted that a certain effect may be one that is more likely to appear in the negative area (second state) than in the positive area (first state) of the difference number. The probability of appearance of the effect is 0%, and the probability of appearance of a certain effect in the negative area of the difference number is 0
% may be greater. That is, a certain effect may appear only in the negative area of the difference number.

Further, a certain effect may have less than 100% probability of appearing in the positive area of the difference number and 100% probability of appearing in the negative area of the difference number. In other words, a certain effect may always appear in the minus area of the difference number.

FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display as one of certain effects.

Tutorial display is one of certain effects, and in this example, using the liquid crystal display device 157, it is suggested that a princess character image is displayed and a freeze effect, which will be described later using FIG. 171(e), appears. A display (in this example, a display of a character string "If you draw a freeze, it's super hot") is displayed.

FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing an example of a specific character effect, which is one of certain effects.

The specific character effect is one of certain effects, and in this example, using the liquid crystal display device 157,
A character image of the vassal is displayed, and a display (in this example, the display of a character string "Chance!") suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player will be given (for example, the appearance of a freeze effect) is displayed.

171(a) and 171(b), the player can recognize that there is a possibility that a large amount of game value can be obtained in the AT state, which will be described later. There is a case where the desire to continue playing the game is improved. Specifically, from the point where the AT state start is negative (for example, the point of CT2 in FIG. 170) to the point where the AT state is completed and the advantageous section is reset (for example, the point of CT6 in FIG. 170), 1 You can expect to win in the AT state once.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT1 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT2 (AT state)>
The game period PT2 in FIGS. 170(2) and 170(3) is the AT state, and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT2 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT2 (eg -1500. Second point) ) to the difference number CT3 (for example, −697 (=−1500+803) at the first point).

Also, in the game period PT2 (AT state) in FIGS. 170(2) to (3), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), which is a minus area of the difference number.

In the game period PT2 (AT state), using the liquid crystal display device 157, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the current game state (AT state in this example), a certain A production may appear (execute).

FIG. 171(c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT effect.

The AT effect is an effect that suggests the AT state, and in this example, the display of the number of acquired game media in the AT game (in this example, the display of the character string "255 GET") and the character image of the bancho. and a display notifying that it is in the AT state (in this example, "AT in progress"
It is a production that includes the display of a character string called.

In addition, in this example, in the game period PT2 (AT state), since the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been completed), the AT state shifts to the normal state, In the final game of the game period PT2 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the AT end effect.

FIG. 171(d) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end effect is a effect suggesting the end of the AT state. This is an effect including the display of character images.

<Production example 1 based on difference number counter/game period PT3>
The game period PT3 in FIGS. 170(3) and 170(4) is a normal state in which the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT3 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. ) to the difference number CT4 (eg, -1700, the second point).

Also, in the game period PT3 (normal state) in FIGS. 170(3) to (4), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), which is a minus area of the difference number.

In the game period PT3 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example).
A certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT3 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter/game period PT4 (AT state)>
The game period PT4 in FIGS. 170(4) to (6) is the AT state and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT4 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT4 (eg, -1700. Second point) ) through the difference number CT5 (for example, 0) to the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400. First point)
and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are met.

Also, the game period PT4 (AT state) in FIGS.
During the game period (5), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example).
(a certain value)), and the difference number is in the negative area, whereas in the latter half of the game period (5) to (6) in the same figure, the difference number Counter (first counting means)
is a state (first state) in which the value of is increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value),
This is the positive area of the difference number.

In the game period PT4 (AT state), using the liquid crystal display device 157, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the current game state (AT state in this example), a certain A production may appear (execute).

FIG. 171(e) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one of the effects, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the character image of the bancho, which is advantageous to the player. (In this example, the game value can be acquired from the difference number minus area (second state) to the difference number plus area (first state)) display (in this example, the display of the character string "Limit breakthrough!") is displayed.

In this example, during the game period PT4 (AT state), the difference number (virtual difference number counter) moves from the negative area (second state) to the difference number (virtual difference number counter) plus area (first state). It is determined that the game value can be acquired until the game period PT4 (AT
state) in a game, when a certain internal winning combination (in this example, middle stage cherry) is internally won, a production lottery using a random number is performed, and if the production lottery is won, a freeze production ( perform a performance).

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (second probability) of executing the freeze effect in the negative area (second state) of the difference number is 1/20. The probability that the freeze effect is executed is 1/6000 (=1/300×1/20). In addition, the probability (second probability) of executing the freeze effect in the minus region (second state) of the difference number may be 100%.

According to this example, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a large amount of game value can be obtained until the end condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied (until the advantageous interval is reset). It is possible to improve the motivation of the game continuation. Also, immediately after the start of the game in the morning, when a certain effect appears, there is a possibility that the setting is left unchanged (it is possible to guess that the setting is staying in the second state because the setting has not been changed). Since the player can recognize this, there are cases where a certain effect can function as an element for setting change determination. In addition, when a certain performance appears after the end of the AT, it is a second state in which the game value can still be acquired up to the first value even though the AT has ended and a certain amount of game value has been acquired. Since the possibility is suggested, it may be possible to increase the willingness to continue the game after the AT is finished.

Also, when a certain effect (in this example, freeze effect) appears, a lot of game value is transferred from the second state (negative area of the difference number) to the first state (plus area of the difference number) can be obtained, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, since the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state is possible by the occurrence of a certain effect, the game value is reduced as the difference number of sheets because the player has not acquired AT or the like. It is possible to prevent the desire to continue the game from being lost even when the player is playing.

In addition, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) 2 bet (2BET game) is performed, or (5) 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state). By executing a certain performance based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter) which is not updated in the case of the second counter), a certain performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

In this example, the freeze effect (some effect) is configured to be executed based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter), but the value of the first counting means (difference number counter) ).

FIG. 171(f) is a diagram showing an example of an ending confirmation effect (finishing confirmation), which is one of certain effects.

The ending confirmation effect (complete run confirmation) is one of the effects. When a profit is given (in this example, the number of difference difference reaches the first value (2400 in this example) from the negative area of the difference number (second state) and the end of the advantageous section (second section) A display (in this example, a display in which three pandas appear in a V shape) is displayed.

It should be noted that the ending confirmation effect in this example, the first counter is 2400 (Fig. 17
0 CT6 point), and "140
The ending confirmation effect continues until the display of "0 GET" becomes "4100 GET" (1700+2400).

In this example, in the game period PT4 (AT state), the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) from the minus area (second state) of the difference number and the advantageous section (second section) When it is determined that a game value can be acquired until the end condition of (1) is established and a performance lottery for a freeze performance is won, an ending determination performance is executed after the freeze performance is executed.

According to this example, when a certain effect (in this example, the ending confirmation effect (finishing is confirmed)) appears, a lot of game values until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (until the advantageous section is reset) can be obtained, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue playing the game. Moreover, in this example, the ending confirmation effect (finishing is confirmed) appears after the freeze effect, so that the player's sense of expectation can be raised at once.

In addition, in this example, after the execution of the freeze effect, an example of executing the ending fixed effect is shown, but only the execution condition of the freeze effect is satisfied, and the execution condition of the ending fixed effect (in this example, the negative area of the difference number From (second state), the difference number is the first value (2400 in this example)
Until the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied until the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. good.

Also, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170(6), the difference number CT6 (
For example, 2400. first value), and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, so at the same timing, the section and the effect state are the same as when the advantageous section (second section) end condition is satisfied. As initial settings, respectively, the non-advantageous section (first section), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that is set to the normal state and counts the difference number (acquired difference number), and the above-mentioned virtual difference The value of the sheet number counter (second counting means) is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied.

Note that the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is not limited to the case where the difference in the number of sheets reaches 2400. For example, it may be 4000 or the like.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6), since the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied), the game period PT4 In the final game in (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute an AT end effect.

FIG. 172(a) is a diagram showing an example of an AT ending effect (ending effect).

The AT ending effect (ending effect) is a effect suggesting the end of the AT state.
GET"), a character image of Bancho, and a character image of three pandas. In the case of CT4 to CT6 in FIG. 170,
The display shows the total number of "4100 GET".

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT5 (normal state)>
170 (6) to (7), the game period PT5 is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game of the non-advantageous section (first section), the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was elected). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The game period PT5 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. Difference number CT7 from
(eg -150. Second point).

Also, in the game period PT5 (normal state) in FIGS. 170(6) to (7), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), which is a minus area of the difference number.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT5 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT6 (AT state)>
The game period PT7 in FIGS. 170(7) and 170(8) is AT state, and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT7 (AT state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) gradually increases. ) to the difference number CT8 (eg, 1000. The first point).

In addition, in the present example, in the game period PT7 (AT state), since the termination condition of the AT state is established (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been completed), the AT state is shifted to the normal state.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT7 (normal state)>
170 (8) to (9), the game period PT7 is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing. state.

The game period PT7 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. to the difference number CT9 (eg, 700. Second point).

In addition, in the game period PT7 (normal state) in FIGS. 170(8) to (9), all game periods
This is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is greater than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), which is the difference number plus area.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT7 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 1 based on difference number counter / game period PT8 (AT state)>
The game period PT8 in (9) to (10) of FIG. 170 is the AT state, and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT8 (AT state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) gradually increases. to the difference number CT10 (for example, 2400, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

Note that the game period PT4 (AT state) and the game period PT8 (AT state) are both game periods in which game values can be acquired until the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied. The difference number CT4 (-1700 in this example) at the start of PT4 (AT state) is in the negative area, whereas the difference number CT9 at the start of the game period PT8 (AT state) (in this example, 700) is in the positive area, so the number of increase in the difference number during the game period PT8 (AT state) (in this example, 1400 (=2400-700)) is the increase number of the difference number during the game period PT4 (AT state). (In this example, it is less than 4100 (=2400+1700).

170 (9) to (10), the game period PT8 (AT state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (first state) in which the number of sheets has increased more than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the positive area of the number of sheets difference.

In the game period PT8 (AT state), using the liquid crystal display device 157, in addition to executing an AT effect or the like corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state), a certain A production may appear (execute).

FIG. 172(b) is a diagram showing an example of a no-freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The no-freeze effect is one of certain effects, and in this example, the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 is not executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a princess character image and (in this example, the difference number is the first value (in this example, 24
00) and the game value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied) (in this example, display of a character string "Atsui!"). do.

In this example, in a certain game during the game period PT8 (AT state), the game is played until the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is established. When it is confirmed that the value can be acquired, and when a certain internal winning combination (in this example, middle stage cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery using random numbers is performed, and the performance lottery is won. Then, a non-freezing effect (a certain effect) is executed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (first probability) of executing the non-freezing effect in the positive area (first state) of the difference number is 1/200. , the probability that the non-freezing effect is executed is 1/60000 (= 1/300 x 1/2
00). In addition, the probability (first probability) of executing the non-freezing effect in the plus area (first state) of the difference number may be zero.

According to this example, even with the same internal winning combination (middle stage cherry), the player can guess whether the first state or the second state by changing at least a part of the mode of the freeze effect and the non-freeze effect. It is possible to improve the playability.

In addition, the combination of the effect (second effect) performed in the negative area (second state) of the difference number and the effect (first effect) performed in the positive area (first state) of the difference number is a freeze effect For example, the second effect may be freeze + display effect A, the first effect may be display effect A without freeze, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A , the first effect may be display effect B without freeze, the second effect may be freeze+display effect A, and the first effect may be no effect.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 173 is a graph showing an example of transition of the difference number in a certain game period, and FIG.
4 and FIG. 175 are diagrams showing examples of various effects during a game period shown in FIG.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter / power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 173 (11) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, and the setting is changed. ” is the same state.

In order to avoid duplication of explanation, detailed explanation will be omitted, but at the same timing, the section and the production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on. and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (acquired difference number);
Also, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is set to an initial value CT11 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the power is turned on.

<Effect example 2 based on difference number counter / game period PT11 (normal state)>
173 (11) to (12), the game period PT1 is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the number of difference is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game of the non-advantageous section (first section), the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was elected). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The game period PT11 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. difference from C
Decreases to T12 (eg -1500, second point).

173 (11) to (12), the game period PT11 (normal state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets.

In the game period PT11 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the normal state, a certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display as one of certain effects.

Tutorial display is one of certain effects, and in this example, using the liquid crystal display device 157, it is suggested that a princess character image is displayed and a freeze effect, which will be described later using FIG. 174(f), appears. A display (in this example, a display of a character string "If you pull the freeze, it's super hot") is displayed.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT11 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 2 based on difference number counter / game period PT12 (AT state)>
The game period PT12 in FIGS. 173(12) and 173(13) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT12 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT12 (eg, -1500. Second point) )
to the difference number CT13 (eg, -950, the first point).

173 (12) to (13), the game period PT2 (AT state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets.

In the game period PT12 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the AT state, a certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT effect.

The AT effect is an effect that suggests the AT state, and in this example, the display of the number of acquired game media in the AT game (in this example, the display of the character string "255 GET") and the character image of the bancho. and a display notifying that it is in the AT state (in this example, "AT in progress"
It is a production that includes the display of a character string called.

Also, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (13), the end condition of the AT state was established (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games were digested), so the AT state transitions to the normal state. , in the final game of the game period PT12 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 1
57 is used to execute the AT end effect.

FIG. 174(c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end effect is a effect that suggests the end of the AT state. This is an effect including the display of character images.

In this example, since the difference number CT13 at the time when the AT state end condition is satisfied is in the negative area (-300 in this example), the difference number at the time when the AT state end condition is satisfied is in the positive area. Compared to the case where the advantageous section (second section) end condition is less likely to be met, in this example, the advantageous section (second section) end condition is not met and the section is the advantageous section (second section ), and the difference number is maintained without being initialized.

<Effect example 2/game period PT13 based on difference number counter>
The game period PT13 in FIGS. 173(13) to 173(14) is a normal state, in which the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT13 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. ) to the difference number CT14 (eg, −1700, the second point).

173 (13) to (14), the game period PT13 (normal state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets.

In the game period PT13 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the normal state, a certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

Further, in this example, since the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT13 (normal state), the normal state shifts to the AT state.

<Effect example 2 based on difference number counter / game period PT14 (AT state)>
The game period PT14 in FIGS. 173(14) to 173(16) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT14 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT14 (eg -1700. Second point )
to the difference number CT16 (for example, 1077, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

Also, the game period PT4 (AT state) in FIGS.
During the game period (5), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example).
(a certain value)), and the difference number is in the negative area, whereas in the latter half of the game period (5) to (6) in the same figure, the difference number Counter (first counting means)
is a state (first state) in which the value of is increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value),
This is the positive area of the difference number.

In the game period PT14 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the AT state), a certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability, but in this example, it does not appear. .

FIG. 174(d) is a diagram showing an example of an AT effect.

The AT effect is an effect that suggests the AT state, and in this example, the display of the number of acquired game media in the AT game (in this example, the display of the character string "255 GET") and the character image of the bancho. and a display notifying that it is in the AT state (in this example, "AT in progress"
It is a production that includes the display of a character string called.

Also, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (16), the number of medals acquired in the AT state (=CT16-CT14) reaches a certain number (for example, 2000), and the advantageous section (second section) Since the end condition is satisfied, at the same timing, the section and the effect state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state respectively as the initial setting when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. , and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (acquired difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set in the advantageous section (second Section 2) is set to an initial value CT11 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the termination condition is met.

Further, in this example, in the game period PT14 (AT state), the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied), so the game period P
In the final game of T14 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the AT end effect.

FIG. 173(e) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end effect is a effect suggesting the end of the AT state. This is an effect including the display of character images.

<Effect example 2 based on difference number counter / game period PT15 (normal state)>
173 (16) to (17), the game period PT15 is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game of the non-advantageous section (first section), the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was elected). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The game period PT15 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. difference from C
Decreases to T17 (eg -811, second point).

173 (16) to (17), the game period PT15 (normal state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets.

In addition, in this example, in the game period PT15 (normal state), since the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (17), the normal state to the AT state.

<Effect example 2 based on difference number counter / game period PT16 (AT state)>
The game period PT16 in FIGS. 173(17) to 173(19) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT16 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT17 (eg -811. Second point ) to the difference number CT19 (for example, 2400, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

Also, the game period PT17 (AT state) in FIGS.
17)-(18), the value of the differential number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (second state) , the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, , 0. A certain value), which is the positive area of the difference number.

In the game period PT16 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to the execution of an AT effect corresponding to the AT state, a certain effect may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 174(f) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one of the effects, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the character image of the bancho, which is advantageous to the player. (In this example, the game value can be acquired from the difference number minus area (second state) to the difference number plus area (first state)) display (in this example, the display of the character string "Limit breakthrough!") is displayed.

In this example, in the game period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that the game value can be acquired until the difference number is shifted from the negative area (second state) to the positive area (first state). And, in a certain game during the game period PT16 (AT state), a certain internal winning combination (
In this example, when the middle stage cherry is internally won, an effect lottery using a random value is performed, and when the effect lottery is won, a freeze effect (some effect) is executed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (second probability) of executing the freeze effect in the negative area (second state) of the difference number is 1/20. The probability that the freeze effect is executed is 1/6000 (=1/300×1/20).

Also, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173(19), the difference number CT6
(For example, 2400. The first value) is reached, and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, so at the same timing, the section and the effect state are As initial settings when the termination condition is met, the non-advantageous section (first section), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that is set to the normal state and counts the difference number (acquired difference number), and , the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the end condition of the AT state is established (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is established), so the game period PT16 In the final game in (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute an AT end effect.

FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end effect is a effect that suggests the end of the AT state. This is an effect including the display of character images and the display of character images of three pandas.

Note that the AT end effect is not limited to this example.
It may be an ending performance.

The AT end effect of this example includes, in addition to the display of the AT end effect shown in FIG. Section reset!"

Also, the effect to be executed when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied is shown in FIG.
(e), Figures 175(a), (b) are not limited to the AT end effects shown in Figure 175, for example.
It may be an AT end effect as shown in (c).

The AT end effect of this example is an effect including the display of a specific character image in addition to the display of the AT end effect shown in FIG. 174(e). This AT end effect is one of the effects that is more likely to appear in the negative area of the difference number than in the positive area of the difference number. may be executed.

In this example, the advantageous section (first 174(e), the section is maintained in the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is maintained without being initialized. When the AT end effect including the display of the character image is executed, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that the advantageous section may not end, and the desire to play can be maintained.

On the other hand, when the AT end effect that does not include the display of a specific character image is executed as shown in FIG. is high, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining even when the advantageous section ends.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1)
00, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, medalless slot machine) has a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a certain effect (for example, the freeze effect shown in FIG. 171 (e), FIG. 171 ( A display effect (for example, tutorial display) shown in a), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. Directing means (for example, FIG. 1
3, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps), wherein the first counting means is a game value given as a result of a game ( for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) used in the game minus the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals); When the value reaches a first value (for example, 2400), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "
Predetermined game state". ) is completed and the value of the first counting means has increased beyond a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and the value of the first counting means is the certain value. There is a state (hereinafter referred to as "second state") in which the value is decreased more than the value, and the certain effect is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state. It is a game table that features.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second Two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), b) Specific character production in which a specific character appears, production in which the appearance rate of existing production increases, production that suggests a second state (demonstration production, etc.))
(for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3
72, 277, various lamps), and a first section (eg, non-advantageous section) that does not notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (eg, stop buttons 137 to 139) , and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of informing an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., based on the internally won hand) When a transition lottery to the advantageous section is executed and this lottery is won) When the transition to the second section is performed and the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 sheets ) is exceeded) to allow the transition to the first section by terminating the second section,
The first counting means calculates the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount of game value given as a result of the game (for example, the number of paid out medals). Means capable of counting the subtracted acquisition difference number, wherein the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and if the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. A state in which the value of the means increases from a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means decreases from the certain value (hereinafter , referred to as a “second state”), and the certain effect is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a large amount of game value can be obtained until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (until the advantageous section is reset). Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to continue the game. Also, immediately after the start of the game in the morning, when a certain effect appears, there is a possibility that the setting is left unchanged (it is possible to guess that the setting is staying in the second state because the setting has not been changed). Since the player can recognize this, there are cases where a certain effect can function as an element for setting change determination. In addition, when a certain performance appears after the end of the AT, it is a second state in which the game value can still be acquired up to the first value even though the AT has ended and a certain amount of game value has been acquired. Since the possibility is suggested, it may be possible to increase the willingness to continue the game after the AT is finished.

Further, when the certain effect is executed in the second state, the game value may be acquired until the state is shifted from the second state to the first state. Also, the certain performance is
In connection with the appearance of the certain effect, the effect may be such that the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state occurs.

With such a configuration, the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state is achieved by the occurrence of a certain effect. It is possible to reduce the game value as the number of sheets so as not to impair the desire to continue the game even when staying in the second state.

Further, the predetermined game state is a state that is started after the appearance of the certain effect, and the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined game state ends. It may be possible to realize an effect that allows the game value to be obtained. In addition, in the certain effect, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value from the second state in relation to the appearance of the certain effect, and the end condition is established. The effect may be one in which the game value can be acquired until the game is played.

With such a configuration, by generating a certain effect, a large amount of game value can be obtained until the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied (until the advantageous interval is reset).
etc. is not acquired and the game value is reduced as the difference number, and even if the user stays in the second state, the desire to continue the game can be prevented from being lost.

Further, internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) capable of determining an internal winning combination is provided, and the certain effect is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, middle stage cherry). is determined, and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the second state, the rendering means executes the certain performance. The probability of winning is a second probability (for example, 1/6000), and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"
It says. ), the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect is a first probability (for example, 1
/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With such a configuration, the execution probability of a certain effect can be changed depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and the game value is reduced as the difference in the number of sheets when the player has not acquired AT or the like. ,
Even when staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase the expectation of staying in the second state.

Further, in the first case, the effect means may be capable of executing an effect that is at least partly different from the certain effect.

With such a configuration, the player can guess whether the first state or the second state, even for the same internally won combination, by making at least a part of the mode of the effect to be executed different. can enhance sexuality.

Further, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means.

With such a configuration, certain conditions (for example, shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) 2-bet (2BET game) are performed, or (5) 3-bet game in ED state) (3B
By executing a certain production based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated in the case where the ET game is played, the certain production can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair gaming machine can be established. can provide.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), or effect (for example, freeze effect shown in FIG. 171 (e), display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171 (a), specific character effect in which a specific character appears shown in FIG. Production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker shown in FIG. 3 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means calculates a value of the game value (for example, the number of payout medals) given as a result of the game to the game. Means capable of counting an acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means becomes a first value (for example, 2400). When the game state is reached, the game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game state") ends and the value of the first counting means increases beyond a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game state"). and a state in which the value of the first counting means is less than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"). The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined game state can be continued until the first state is reached in relation to execution of the certain performance in the state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second Two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), b) Specific character production in which a specific character appears, production in which the appearance rate of existing production increases, production that suggests a second state (demonstration production, etc.))
(for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3
72, 277, various lamps), and a first section (eg, non-advantageous section) that does not notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (eg, stop buttons 137 to 139) , and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of informing an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., based on the internally won hand) When a transition lottery to the advantageous section is executed and this lottery is won) When the transition to the second section is performed and the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 sheets ) is exceeded) to allow the transition to the first section by terminating the second section,
The first counting means calculates the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount of game value given as a result of the game (for example, the number of paid out medals). Means capable of counting the subtracted acquisition difference number, wherein the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and if the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. A state in which the value of the means increases from a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means decreases from the certain value (hereinafter , referred to as a "second state"), and a game state (
For example, AT state), the game value can be acquired in the advantageous game state, and the first state is reached by at least the advantageous game state. be.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a large amount of game value can be obtained until the first state is reached by an advantageous game state. It is possible to improve the motivation of the game continuation.

Further, when the predetermined game state is entered in relation to the execution of the certain effect in the second state, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value. The game value may be obtainable until the predetermined game state ends.

With such a configuration, by generating a certain effect, a large amount of game value can be obtained until the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied (until the advantageous interval is reset).
etc. is not acquired and the game value is reduced as the difference number, and even if the user stays in the second state, the desire to continue the game can be prevented from being lost.

Also, the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point").
) and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as a "second point"), the second value being greater than the third value, A probability that the effect means executes the certain effect at the second point may be higher than a probability that the effect means executes the certain effect at the first point.

With such a configuration, the player who is losing (the one who is addicted) has a high appearance rate of a certain effect, and since the reward is large, it is possible to increase the desire to continue playing the game.

Further, internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) capable of determining an internal winning combination is provided, and the certain effect is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, middle stage cherry). is determined, and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the second state (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
), the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect is a second probability (for example, 1/600
0), and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the effect means produces the certain effect. is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With such a configuration, the execution probability of a certain effect can be changed depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and the game value is reduced as the difference in the number of sheets when the player has not acquired AT or the like. ,
Even when staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase the expectation of staying in the second state.

Also, in the first case, the certain effect is likely to be executed by the first mode,
In the second case, the certain effect is likely to be executed according to the second aspect, and the first aspect and the second aspect may be at least partially different aspects.

With such a configuration, the player can guess whether the first state or the second state, even for the same internally won combination, by making at least a part of the mode of the effect to be executed different. can enhance sexuality.

Further, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, certain conditions (for example, shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) 2-bet (2BET game) are performed, or (5) 3-bet game in ED state) (3B
By executing a certain production based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated in the case where the ET game is played, the certain production can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair gaming machine can be established. can provide.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), or effect (for example, freeze effect shown in FIG. 171 (e), display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171 (a), specific character effect in which a specific character appears shown in FIG. Production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker shown in FIG. 3 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means calculates a value of the game value (for example, the number of payout medals) given as a result of the game to the game. Means capable of counting an acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means becomes a first value (for example, 2400). When it reaches the point where the game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game state") ends and the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point") and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the second value is the third value, and the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect at the second point is higher than the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect at the first point. It is a game machine characterized by:

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second Two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), b) Specific character production in which a specific character appears, production in which the appearance rate of existing production increases, production that suggests a second state (demonstration production, etc.))
(for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3
72, 277, various lamps), and a first section (eg, non-advantageous section) that does not notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (eg, stop buttons 137 to 139) , and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of informing an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., based on the internally won hand) When a transition lottery to the advantageous section is executed and this lottery is won) When the transition to the second section is performed and the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 sheets ) is exceeded) to allow the transition to the first section by terminating the second section,
The first counting means calculates the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount of game value given as a result of the game (for example, the number of paid out medals). Means capable of counting the subtracted acquisition difference number, wherein the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and if the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. A point where the value of the means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point") and a point where the value of the first counting means is the third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point" ), the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value, and the effect means at the first point is the The gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect at the second point is higher than the probability that the certain effect is executed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the appearance rate of a certain effect is high for the player who is losing (the one who is addicted), so even if the player is addicted, the desire to continue the game can be maintained. Sometimes.

In addition, a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value There is a decreasing state (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first point is a point in the first state, and the second point is the second point It may be some point in the state.

With such a configuration, since a certain effect is more likely to appear when the difference number is negative, the desire to continue playing the game can be maintained even if the game is addicted.

Further, when the transition to the predetermined game state is made in relation to the execution of the certain effect, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined game state is The game value may be acquired until the end.

With such a configuration, by generating a certain effect, a large amount of game value can be obtained until the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied (until the advantageous interval is reset).
etc. is not acquired and the game value is reduced as the difference number, and even if the user stays in the second state, the desire to continue the game can be prevented from being lost.

Further, internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) capable of determining an internal winning combination is provided, and the certain effect is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, middle stage cherry). is determined, and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the second state (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
), the probability that the effect means executes the certain effect is a second probability (for example, 1/600
0), and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the effect means produces the certain effect. is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With such a configuration, the execution probability of a certain effect can be changed depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and the game value is reduced as the difference in the number of sheets when the player has not acquired AT or the like. ,
Even when staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase the expectation of staying in the second state.

Also, in the first case, the certain effect is likely to be executed by the first mode,
In the second case, the certain effect is likely to be executed according to the second aspect, and the first aspect and the second aspect may be at least partially different aspects.

With such a configuration, the player can guess whether the first state or the second state, even for the same internally won combination, by making at least a part of the mode of the effect to be executed different. can enhance sexuality.

Further, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, certain conditions (for example, shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) 2-bet (2BET game) are performed, or (5) 3-bet game in ED state) (3B
By executing a certain production based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated in the case where the ET game is played, the certain production can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair gaming machine can be established. can provide.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), The first counting means calculates the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of medals to be paid out) from the value of the game value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals to be paid out). The value of the number of inserted medals) can be counted, and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), it is advantageous to the player. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") ends and a point (hereinafter referred to as a "first point") at which the value of the first counting means is a second value; There is a point where the value of one counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), the second value is greater than the third value, and the first point The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined game state is more difficult to end at the second point than at the second point.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second A game machine comprising two counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., internal winning) If a lottery to move to the advantageous section is executed based on the winning combination, and the lottery is won), the transition to the second section is performed, and if the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (For example, when the number of cards exceeds 2,400)), the second section can be completed and the transition to the first section can be performed, and the first counting means determines the amount of game value given as a result of the game ( for example, the value of the number of paid out medals) can be counted by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals); the termination condition is met when the value reaches a first value (eg, 2400);
When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter, " referred to as the “first point”).
Then, there is a point where the value of the first counting means is the third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is the The amusement machine is characterized in that it is larger than the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the value of 3, and the end condition is less likely to be satisfied at the second point than at the first point.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second point, which has a grace period up to the upper limit of the difference number, has a greater benefit when the next AT finishes the race, so the end condition of the advantageous section is less likely to be satisfied. By doing so, it may be possible to maintain the desire to continue playing the game after the end of the AT.

171(e), a display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), a specific character shown in FIG. Effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 3 (speakers 272, 277, various lamps shown in ), and when the predetermined game state is entered in connection with the execution of the certain effect, the value of the first counting means is the first The game value may be acquired until the value is reached and the predetermined game state ends.

With such a configuration, by generating a certain effect, a large amount of game value can be obtained until the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied (until the advantageous interval is reset).
etc. is not acquired and the game value is reduced as the difference number, and even if the user stays in the second state, the desire to continue the game can be prevented from being lost. In addition, by leaving the execution probability of a certain effect in a relatively high state after the end of the AT, the continuation motivation can be sustained.

Also, a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value. is also decreasing (hereafter,
It is called the "second state". ), the first point at the end of the predetermined game state is a certain point in the first state, and the second point at the end of the predetermined game state is the second It may be a point in two states.

With such a configuration, resetting of the advantageous section and the difference number of sheets is relatively likely to occur at the first point at the end of the AT, so when reset, it is easy to enter the negative area and a certain effect is likely to occur. There is a tendency. Therefore, when resetting at the end of the AT, the appearance rate of freezing is increased and the state shifts to a state where it is easy to receive the benefits of freezing, so that the willingness to continue the game can be improved. On the other hand, at the second point at the end of AT, although the appearance rate of freeze may be inferior to that at the start of AT, the benefits will be greater than if the freeze is reset, so in any case The continuation desire of a game can be maintained.

Further, the value of the first counting means may always reach the first value when the certain effect is executed.

Further, internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) capable of determining an internal winning combination is provided, and the certain effect is executed when the internal winning combination determining means determines a certain internal winning combination. At the first point, the certain effect is likely to be executed according to the first mode, and at the second point, the certain effect is likely to be executed according to the second mode. , The first aspect and the second aspect may be at least partially different aspects.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to guess whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (whether or not the advantageous section is reset) after the end of the AT.

Further, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, certain conditions (for example, shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) 2-bet (2BET game) are performed, or (5) 3-bet game in ED state) (3B
By executing a certain production based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated in the case where the ET game is played, the certain production can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair gaming machine can be established. can provide.

<Complete function and game value display>
Next, the complete function and game value display will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 182. FIG.

<Complete function>
The complete function means that the difference between the maximum value of the acquisition difference number and the minimum value of the acquisition difference number (maximum difference number, so-called MY value or MY counter value) is the second value (19000 in this example). (When the complete function is activated), a notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (complete upper limit reached notification) is performed, and the game is stopped.

Note that when the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state is immediately terminated and the normal state is entered. Also, when the complete function is activated during the bonus game, the bonus game may be immediately terminated and the normal state may be entered, or the normal state may be entered after the bonus game is completed. When the complete function is activated, it is possible to cancel the complete function by changing the settings, but the complete function cannot be canceled only by turning the power off and on or resetting.

<Complete function / Completion upper limit reached notification>
The notifying means of the slot machine 100 sets the MY value (maximum number of differences) to a second value (19 in this example).
000), there is a case where a notification suggesting execution of a game stop (complete upper limit reached notification) is executed.

FIG. 176(b) is a diagram showing an example of completion upper limit reach notification.

The complete upper limit reaching notification is a notification suggesting that the game is to be stopped. row display) and a display prompting payment of medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Press the count button"). In this example, the effect image display device 157 is used to perform the complete upper limit reaching notification. It is good also as a structure which performs alerting|reporting.

In this example, when the MY value (maximum number of differences) reaches the second value (19000 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to notify completion upper limit reached shown in FIG. to run.

<Complete function/preliminary notification of complete function>
The notifying means of the slot machine 100 sets the MY value (maximum number of differences) to a second value (19 in this example).
000), there is a case where notification (preliminary complete function notification) indicating the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (19000 in this example) is performed.

FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of complete function advance notification.

In the complete function advance notification, the MY value (maximum number of differences) is the second value (19000 in this example).
), and the pre-notification of the complete function in this example is a display that suggests in advance that the game will be stopped (in this example, the display of the character string "Stop after 500 cards") ).

In this example, the MY value (maximum number of differences) is some value (in this example, 18500
), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the complete function preliminary notification shown in FIG. 176(a).

According to this example, by informing in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to prompt the player to pay in advance.

In addition, the threshold (second value) for starting the completion upper limit arrival notification is not limited to 19000, and may be another numerical value. In addition, the threshold for starting complete function advance notification is 1
It is not limited to 8500, and any numerical value smaller than the threshold value (second value) for executing complete upper limit reaching notification may be used.

In addition, when the "MY value" reaches the second value, an example of executing completion upper limit reaching notification has been shown, but the amount of game value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of payout medals) ) used in the game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) is subtracted, and when the “acquisition difference number” reaches a second value, the complete upper limit reaching notification is executed. good too.

Further, the complete upper limit arrival notification and the complete function preliminary notification are not limited to being performed in the positive area of the difference number, but may be performed in the negative area of the difference number.

<Playing value display>
The slot machine 100 has a game value display means (medal display) capable of displaying an acquisition difference number (medal acquisition difference number) obtained by subtracting the game value used in the game from the game value provided as a result of the game. device MD).

For example, at the time of execution of complete function advance notification shown in FIG.
display of the number "13500") is displayed, and at the time of execution of completion upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG.
A display indicating the difference in number of medals obtained (in this example, a display of the number “14000”) is displayed.

<Medal display device/Information that game value display upper limit has been reached>
The notifying means of the slot machine 100 indicates that the medal acquisition difference number is the third value (163 in this example).
83), a notification prompting the payment of medals (game value display upper limit reached notification) is executed.

FIG. 176(d) is a diagram showing an example of notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached.

The game value display upper limit arrival notification is a notification that prompts the payment of medals, and the game value display upper limit arrival notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). A notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the display of the character string "Cannot display any more") and a display that prompts payment of medals (in this example, the display of the character string "Please press the count button") be.

In this example, when the medal acquisition difference number reaches the third value (16383 in this example), the game value display upper limit reached notification shown in FIG. to run.

<Medal display device / advance notification of game value display upper limit reached>
The notifying means of the slot machine 100 indicates that the medal acquisition difference number is the third value (163 in this example).
83), there is a case where a notification (game value display upper limit reaching advance notification) indicating the possibility that the medal acquisition difference number will reach a third value (16383 in this example) may be performed.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram showing an example of advance notice of reaching the game value display upper limit.

The game value display upper limit reaching advance notification is based on the third value of the medal acquisition difference (1638 in this example).
3) is a notification that suggests the possibility of reaching
A display (in this example, a display of a character string “The count limit is approaching”) that suggests the possibility that the number of medals won will reach a third value (16383 in this example), and prompts for payment of medals. display(
In this example, the notification includes a display of a character string "Press the counting button").

In this example, a certain value (15369 in this example) that is smaller than the third value of the number of medal acquisition differences
Using the liquid crystal display device 157 as a trigger, the game value display upper limit reaching advance notification shown in FIG. 176(c) is executed.

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means is reached (that the display upper limit of the game value display means is near), You can encourage people to pay in advance.

Note that the threshold value (third value) for starting the game value display upper limit reaching notification is not limited to 16383, and may be another numerical value. Further, the threshold value for starting the advance notice of reaching the game value display upper limit is not limited to 15369, and may be a numerical value smaller than the threshold value (third value) for executing the notice of reaching the game value display upper limit.

In addition, the game value display upper limit reaching notification and the game value display upper limit reaching advance notification are not limited to being executed in the positive region of the difference number, but may be executed in the negative region of the difference number. In addition, the acquisition difference is the amount of gaming value acquired on other gaming machines added to the gaming machine where the game is played (rented).
Therefore, when adding (renting) to the gaming machine where the game is played, before the MY value (maximum acquisition difference) reaches the second value (19000 in this example), the number of medals The acquisition difference number may reach a third value (16383 in this example).

In addition, the complete upper limit reaching notification and game value display upper limit reaching notification are not limited to this example,
For example, the MY value (maximum acquisition difference number) reaches a second value (19000 in this example), and
When the number of medal acquisition differences reaches the third value (16383 in this example), the
Both function upper limit arrival notification shown in d) may be executed.

In this example, the notification of reaching the upper limit of both functions is a display suggesting the execution of the game stop (in this example, the display of the character string "Stop the game, stop the game") and the third value of the medal acquisition difference A display indicating that the
, and a display prompting payment of medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Press the count button").

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display>
Next, a specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 180. FIG.

FIG. 177 is a graph showing an example of transition of the difference number in a certain game period, and FIG.
8 to 180 are diagrams showing an example of various effects and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG.

<Complete function and game value display specific example 1 / power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 177(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, and the setting is changed.

At the same timing, the section and effect state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (second The value of the first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to initial values CT21 (for example, 0) as initial settings when the power is turned on.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT21 (normal state)>
The game period PT21 in FIGS. 177(1) and 177(2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game of the non-advantageous section (first section), the transition condition to the advantageous section (second section) was established (in this example, the transition lottery was elected). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The game period PT21 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. difference from C
Decreases to T22 (eg -1500, second point).

177(1)-(2) during the game period PT21 (normal state), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example, or This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the value of the number of sheets), and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets.

In the game period PT21 (normal state), as shown in FIG. 178(a), the liquid crystal display device 15
7 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example), and a game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display medals. A display indicating the number of acquisition differences (in this example, display of the number "00050" corresponding to 50 medals to be borrowed) is displayed.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT22 (AT state)>
The game period PT22 in FIGS. 177(2) and 177(3) is in the AT state and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT22 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT22 (eg, 31. Second point). to the difference number CT23 (for example, 7033, the first point).

Also, in the game period PT22 (AT state) in FIGS. 177(2) to (3), the difference number is
The game period from (-1500 in this example) to CT21 (0 in this example) is
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference number. , the difference number is C
During the game period from T21 (0 in this example) to CT23 (7033 in this example), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example). value), and is in the positive area of the difference number.

In the game period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. is used to display the character image of the bancho and to give a profit advantageous to the player (in this example, from the minus area of the difference number (second state) to the plus area of the difference number (first state) A display (in this example, a display of a character string “Limit breakthrough!”) is displayed.

Further, in the game period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference 178(c), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed. "0000 GET
” and a character string), and a game value display means (medal display device MD
) is used to display a display showing the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the number “00031” indicating that the medal acquisition difference is 31).

In addition, in the game period PT22 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been completed), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the game period PT22 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(d),
Display showing the current MY value (maximum number of differences) using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, display of the number and character string “7002 GET” indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 7002) and displays the current difference in medal acquisition (in this example, "07
033”) is displayed.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT23 (normal state)>
The game period PT23 in FIGS. 177(3) and 177(4) is the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT23 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) decreases. The number is reduced to CT24 (eg, 6832, second point).

In the game period PT23 (normal state), although illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example). At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display indicating the difference in number of medals obtained.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT24 (AT state)>
The game period PT24 in FIGS. 177(4) and 177(5) is in the AT state, in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT24 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT24 (eg, 6832. Second point). to the difference number CT25 (for example, 8882, the first point).

In the game period PT24 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), as shown in FIG. state) is executed.

Further, in the game period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference 178(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the MY value (maximum difference "0000 GET
” and a character string), and a game value display means (medal display device MD
) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is 683
display of the number "06832" indicating that there are two sheets).

In addition, in the game period PT24 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been completed), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the game period PT24 In the final game of (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(f),
Display showing the current MY value (maximum number of differences) using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, display of the number and character string “2050 GET” indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 2050) and displays the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, "08
882”) is displayed.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT25 (normal state)>
The game period PT25 in FIGS. 177(5) and 177(6) is the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT25 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number−bet number) decreases. The number is reduced to CT26 (for example, 7365, second point).

In the game period PT25 (normal state), although illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example). At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display indicating the difference in number of medals obtained.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) and 177(7) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT26 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT26 (for example, 7365. Second point). to the difference number CT27 (for example, 15706, the first point).

In the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. is used to display the character image of the bancho and to give a profit advantageous to the player (in this example, from the minus area of the difference number (second state) to the plus area of the difference number (first state) A display (in this example, a display of a character string “Limit breakthrough!”) is displayed.

Further, in the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference 179(b), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed. "0000 GET
” and a character string), and a game value display means (medal display device MD
) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is 736
display of the number "07365" indicating that there are five sheets).

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games are digested), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the game period PT26 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(c),
Display showing the current MY value (maximum number of differences) using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, display of the number and character string “8341 GET” indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 8341) , the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference number (in this example, "1" indicating that the medal acquisition difference number is 15706).
5706”) is displayed.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT27 (normal state)>
The game period PT27 in FIGS. 177(7) and 177(8) is the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. It is reduced to the number of sheets CT28 (for example, 15128, second point).

In the game period PT27 (normal state), although illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example). At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display indicating the difference in number of medals obtained.

<Specific example 1 of complete function and game value display/game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in FIGS. 177(8) and 177(9) is in the AT state and the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT28 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT28 (eg, 15128. Second point).
to the difference number CT30 (for example, 19000. The first point).

In the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. state) is executed.

Further, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference 179(d), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed. "0000 GET
” and a character string), and a game value display means (medal display device MD
) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is 151
display of the number "15128" indicating that there are 28 sheets).

Further, in this example, in the game before the timing shown in FIG. 177(9) in the game period PT28 (AT state), the medal acquisition difference number is the third value (16383 in this example).
Since it reached a certain value (16369 in this example) smaller than the liquid crystal display device 157
is used, as shown in FIG. 179(e), advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit is executed.

The game value display upper limit reaching advance notification is based on the third value of the medal acquisition difference (1638 in this example).
3) is a notification that suggests the possibility of reaching
A display (in this example, a display of a character string “The count limit is approaching”) that suggests the possibility that the number of medals won will reach a third value (16383 in this example), and prompts for payment of medals. display(
In this example, the notification includes a display of a character string "Press the counting button").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means is reached (that the display upper limit of the game value display means is near), You can encourage people to pay in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9) in the game period PT28 (AT state), the medal acquisition difference number reached the third value (16383 in this example). , using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG.

The game value display upper limit arrival notification is a notification that prompts the payment of medals, and the game value display upper limit arrival notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). A notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the display of the character string "Cannot display any more") and a display that prompts payment of medals (in this example, the display of the character string "Please press the count button") be.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game during the game period PT28 (AT state), in the game after the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 179(f), the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is display of the number "10000" indicating that the number of sheets is 10000).

Subsequently, in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is the second value (190 in this example) in the game before the timing shown in FIG.
00) has reached a certain value (18500 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 180(b).

In the complete function advance notification, the MY value (maximum number of differences) is the second value (19000 in this example).
), and the pre-notification of the complete function in this example is a display that suggests in advance that the game will be stopped (in this example, the display of the character string "Stop after 500 cards") ).

According to this example, by informing in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to prompt the player to pay in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example) in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the game period PT28 (AT state). Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the complete function preliminary notification shown in FIG.

The complete upper limit reaching notification is a notification suggesting that the game is to be stopped. row display) and a display prompting payment of medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Press the count button").

<Specific example 2 of complete function and game value display>
Next, using FIG. 177 and FIGS. 181 and 182, a specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be described.

FIGS. 181 and 182 are diagrams showing modifications of various effects and various notifications during a game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG.

In the specific example 1 explained with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179 , the game value display upper limit reaching notification is executed, and then the complete upper limit reaching notification is executed, but in the specific example 2, the complete upper limit reaching notification is executed. The difference is that the game value display upper limit reaching notification is executed after the game value display upper limit has been reached. Since various effects and various notifications during the game periods PT21 to PT25 are the same in the specific examples 1 and 2, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example 2 of complete function and game value display/game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) and 177(7) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT26 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT26 (for example, 7365. Second point). to the difference number CT27 (for example, 15706, the first point).

In the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference number) At the same time, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, "0000 GET ” and a character string), and use the game value display means (medal display device MD) to display the current number of medal acquisition differences (in this example, the number of medal acquisition differences is 7365). display of the number "07365" indicating that the

Subsequently, in this example, in the game during the game period PT26 (AT state), in the game after the timing shown in FIG. In the example, since the settlement of 5,000 sheets has been performed, Fig. 181(b)
As shown in ~(c), the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the difference in the number of medals obtained before settlement (in this example, the difference in the number of medals obtained is 10165). display of the number "10165" indicating that the display).

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games are digested), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the game period PT26 In the final game of (AT state), as shown in FIG. 181(d),
Display showing the current MY value (maximum number of differences) using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, display of the number and character string “8341 GET” indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 8341) , the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, "1" indicating that the medal acquisition difference is 10706).
0706”) is displayed.

<Specific example 3 of complete function and game value display/game section PT27 (normal state)>
The game period PT27 in FIGS. 177(7) and 177(8) is the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference number is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the number of difference (=number of payouts-number of bets) decreases. It is reduced to the number CT28 (for example, 10128, second point).

In the game period PT27 (normal state), although illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal effect (normal background display, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (normal state in this example). At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display indicating the difference in number of medals obtained.

<Specific example 2 of complete function and game value display/game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in FIGS. 177(8) to (19) is an AT state in which the difference number is increasing.

The game period PT28 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference number (=payout number-bet number) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number is the difference number CT28 (eg, 10128. Second point).
to the difference number CT30 (for example, 14000, the first point).

In the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. state) is executed.

Further, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the MY value (maximum difference 181(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the MY value "0000 GET
” and a character string), and a game value display means (medal display device MD
) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is 101
display of the number "10128" indicating that there are 28 sheets).

Subsequently, in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is the second value (190 in this example) in the game before the timing shown in FIG.
00) has reached a certain value (18500 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 181(f).

In the complete function advance notification, the MY value (maximum number of differences) is the second value (19000 in this example).
), and the pre-notification of the complete function in this example is a display that suggests in advance that the game will be stopped (in this example, the display of the character string "Stop after 500 cards") ).

According to this example, by informing in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to prompt the player to pay in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example) in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the game period PT28 (AT state). Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the complete function preliminary notification shown in FIG.

The complete upper limit reaching notification is a notification suggesting that the game is to be stopped. column display), a display urging payment of medals (in this example, a display of a character string “Please press the count button”), and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, MY This notification includes a display of a number and a character string "3872 GET" indicating that the value (maximum difference number) is 3872).

According to this example, before reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquisition difference number by the game value display means, there is a case where the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop is executed. The game can be progressed and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving the player annoyance when the upper limit value (third value) of the acquisition difference number displayed by the display means is reached. can.

In addition, after reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquisition difference number by the game value display means,
If the maximum number of differences reaches the second value (reaches the upper limit of the complete function), you will be prompted to pay twice. When the upper limit of the function is reached), the payment is prompted only once, so the player may be able to enjoy the game without being bothered.

Also, when the player has completed at least part of the settlement of the acquisition difference (in this example,
In a certain game in the game period shown in (6), the second value (19000 in this example)
If the value obtained by subtracting the acquisition difference number from the third value (16383 in this example) is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference number from In addition, since the maximum difference number may reach the second value, the player frequently settles (counts) the game value,
To make the number of game values up to the upper limit (third value) of the display of the acquired differential number by the game value display means larger than the number of game values up to the second value (upper limit of the complete function). Therefore, if a large amount of game value is obtained, it may be possible to complete the settlement (counting) once.

It should be noted that the mode of complete upper limit reach notification is not limited to this example, and for example, FIG.
), the current MY
The display showing the value (maximum number of differences) may not be displayed.

Also, in this example, in the game period PT28 (AT state), the medal acquisition difference number does not reach a certain value (15369 in this example) smaller than the third value (16383 in this example). Therefore, unlike the above specific example 1, the prior notification of reaching the game value display upper limit and the notification of reaching the upper limit of game value display are not executed.

<Example of operation of movable body accompanying complete upper limit arrival notification and complete function advance notification>
Next, an example of the movement of the movable body associated with complete upper limit attainment notification and complete function advance notification will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, regarding configurations that contradict each other between the following description and the previous embodiment, the terms and symbols used in this example shall take precedence.

With reference to FIG. 176 and the like, a configuration has been described in which complete upper limit attainment notification and complete function advance notification are performed regarding the operation of the complete function. Here, in the case of a configuration in which a movable body is provided in front of the effect image display device 157, the position of the movable body may make it difficult to recognize the notification. FIG. 183(a) shows an example in which the contents of the effect image display device 157 are difficult to see due to the effect that the shutter 163, which is a movable body, is closed when these notifications are not executed. It is shown.

In view of the above problems, when these notifications are being executed, the movable body should be placed at a position that does not block the display area of the effect image display device 157 so that the contents of the notification will not become invisible. can be In this example, detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are provided respectively for a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b that constitute the shutter 163, and sensors 1632a and 1632b for detecting these detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are provided. there is By moving the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b to the positions detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, the shutter 163 is opened and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is not blocked. The initial position of the shutter 163 is the position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b. FIG. 183(b) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) during execution of complete function advance notification. Also, FIG. 183(c) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) while the completion upper limit arrival notification is being executed.

The shutter 163 of this example is configured such that the positions where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are the initial positions, and the position information therefrom is derived based on the driving information. In this configuration, if the shutter 163 is moved by an external force, there will be a discrepancy between the position information grasped by the control unit and the actual position. A configuration that operates may be employed. For example, when the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b (open state), the shutter 163 is once moved to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and then the shutter 163 is moved again. An operation of moving to the initial position (hereinafter referred to as position correction 1) can be mentioned. When the sensors 1632a and 1632b are not detecting the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, the operation of moving the shutter 163 to the positions where the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b (hereinafter referred to as position correction 2). ). Note that the position correction 1 may be performed again after the position correction 2 is performed. By completing a series of these operations, it is possible to determine that there is no abnormality in the drive system and sensor of the shutter 163, and to correct the position information while moving the shutter 163 to the initial position. The timing for position correction is not particularly limited. For example, when the front door 102 is opened and closed, when the power is turned on, and when the position of the shutter 163 at the initial position is displaced, the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are detected. It may be the timing when the sensors 1632a and 1632b stop detecting.

Here, if the complete upper limit arrival notification or the complete function advance notification is executed in performing the position correction 1, the above notification may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of the shutter 163. FIG. Therefore, when position correction 1 is performed, the shutter 163 may be operated within a range of positions that do not block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible.

FIGS. 184(a) to 184(c) show an example in which the position correction 1 is performed during execution of complete function prior notification. First, in FIG. 184(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) during execution of the complete function preliminary notification, and the front door 102 is opened from there. At this time, since there is a possibility that the position of the shutter 163 is shifted due to vibration, the position is corrected when the front door 102 is closed. FIG. 184(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the sensor 1632a, 1632b does not detect the detection pieces 1631a, 1631b, and the shutter 163 is moved so as not to block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible. there is FIG. 184(c) shows that the position correction 1 is completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. It should be noted that the operation is the same even if the completion upper limit arrival notification is used instead of the complete function advance notification.

FIGS. 185(a) to 185(c) show an example in which the position correction 1 is performed while the complete upper limit arrival notification is being executed. First, in FIG. 185(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) while the completion upper limit arrival notification is being executed, and then power failure and power recovery occurs (the setting key is in the OFF state). Since there is a possibility that the position of the shutter 163 may be displaced due to work such as maintenance before the power is turned on, position correction is executed when the power is turned on. FIG. 185(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the sensor 1632a, 1632b does not detect the detection pieces 1631a, 1631b, and the shutter 163 is moved so as not to block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible. there is FIG. 185(c) shows that position correction 1 is completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. As in the above example, the complete function is not canceled even if power failure and power recovery occurs during execution of the complete upper limit reach notification. Therefore, the complete function advance notification is not executed. In this case, the position correction 1 is executed on the normal screen, but since the complete function advance notification is not executed, for example, even if the position correction 1 that once closes the shutter 163 is executed good.

The examples of FIGS. 184 and 185 are for the case where position correction 1 is executed, and when position correction 2 is executed (state in which the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b), the shutter 163 is It will move to the initial position. The position correction during execution of the complete upper limit arrival notification or complete function prior notification is such that the amount of movement of the shutter 163 is smaller than the maximum amount of movement of the shutter 163 during a normal game. Also, the examples of FIGS. 184 and 185 are examples in which the position correction 1 is executed while the complete upper limit arrival notification or the complete function advance notification is being executed. is not limited to the above operation. For example, the shutter 163 may be closed and then opened.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which various notifications during the game are executed using the effect image display device 157, the shutter 163, etc., the complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in duplicate. In this case, during the execution of the complete function advance notification, among the various notification operations, the shutter 163 is restricted so that it is not operated while it is stopped at the initial position, or during the execution of the complete function advance notification, the various notification operations are changed from normal. may be made different. During execution of the complete function preliminary notification, the shutter 163 is restricted from being operated while it is stopped at the initial position among various notification operations. When the value does not meet the requirement, the restriction of the shutter 163 may be released and various notifications may be performed.

<Processing of the main control unit regarding the complete function>
Next, an example of processing of the main control unit regarding the complete function will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188. FIG. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, regarding configurations that contradict each other between the following description and the previous embodiment, the terms and symbols used in this example shall take precedence.

First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

In step S119, complete function activation processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. 186. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308, etc. are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281, which is inside the slot machine 100 and cannot be operated by the player, is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, it is determined whether the complete function is active. If the complete function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S1011; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 291 (RAM clear switch) is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized (RAM cleared), and the main controller initial setting process is terminated. In addition, in the first sub-control unit 400, based on the reception of the command indicating that this process has been executed, the process of notifying that the initialization has been performed (for example, the RAM has been cleared, reset, display and audio output) are executed.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when there is a momentary power failure (temporary voltage drop below the operating voltage). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Set the pointer again (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT at the time of power failure, game state, effect state, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data in the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch 281 is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. Note that the complete function operation flag is set to OFF by the RAM clearing process executed in this process.

Next, details of the complete function activation process (step S119) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG.

First, in step S1701 executed first, the complete function activation flag is referred to. This complete function operation flag is turned on when the difference between the maximum value of the acquisition difference number and the minimum value of the acquisition difference number (maximum difference number, so-called MY value) reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example). set. In addition, for example, when a big bonus (accessory) is installed, the complete function activation flag may not be referenced while this big bonus is in operation, or when a predetermined value is reached and the big bonus is not in operation. It may be set to ON in some cases.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the complete function operation flag is on. If the complete function operation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1705, and if the flag is off, the complete function operation processing is terminated. .

In step S1705, an operation notification of the complete function is executed. Specifically, various notification means (for example, game information display device 126, payout number display device 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) are used to notify that the game is stopped (stopped state). is executed (including command transmission to the first sub-controller 400).

In step S1707, a process for transmitting a security command including the complete function activation flag information to the first sub-controller 400 every 100 ms is executed, after which the process shifts to an infinite loop state.

After step S1707, new processing is not executed as it is, and the game cannot proceed. On the other hand, in the main control unit 300, the security command set in step S1707 is transmitted and an error message is sent by the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed at a predetermined period (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). A detection process (for example, disconnection detection), an error notification process, an error release switch reception process, and an error release process are executed. Note that if the security command includes information indicating that the complete function activation flag is on, the complete upper limit arrival notification is executed. Also, when an error is detected, notification of the error is executed. In this case, the effect image display device 157 may notify the error in an area that does not interfere with the completion upper limit arrival notification, or may perform the completion upper limit arrival notification superimposed on the error notification.

The operation when the complete function is activated will be described below based on the flow chart described above.

The complete function is a function that sets the time when the above-mentioned acquisition difference number is the lowest as a reference, and stops the slot machine 100 when the acquisition difference number from the reference reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example). is. In this embodiment, this function is activated by setting the complete function activation flag to ON when this condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the complete function activation flag is set to ON at the end of the game, a notice suggesting a stop state is executed in the complete function activation process (step S119 in FIG. 186) and the game is stopped. (Yes determination in step S1703 in FIG. 187, then an infinite loop is entered). While this complete function is in operation, processing based on the operation of the count button 171 and the lending button 707 can be executed, but processing based on other operating means can also be executed (for example, various information ( A display of a two-dimensional code or the like according to the progress of the game may be used. In addition, the judgment process of whether or not the setting key switch operation for setting confirmation, bet operation, lever operation, settlement operation, various production settings (volume setting by volume adjustment switch, etc.), etc. has been performed will not be executed. Various types of processing based on some operations, such as doing, may not be executed while the complete function is in operation. That is, while the complete function is in operation, there may be processes that can be executed by an operation, and there may be processes that are not executed even if an operation is performed.

In a state in which the complete function is not activated (including during the complete function advance notification), the RAM clearing process can be executed by turning on the power while pressing the reset switch 291 (step S1009 in FIG. 187). Further, for example, by opening the front door 102 and turning on the setting key, it is possible to shift to the setting value confirmation mode. However, once the complete function operation flag is set to ON, if the power is turned on while the reset switch 291 is held down, the MY value is cleared but the complete function operation flag is not cleared. When the complete function operation flag is on, even if the power is turned on again while the reset switch 291 is held down, the operation is stopped again, and the complete function operation state is not canceled (Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187). Further, while the complete function is in operation, even if the power of the first sub-controller 400 or the second sub-controller 500 is turned on again, the security command including the information with the complete function activation flag set to ON will not be sent to the main controller 300. As long as it is sent from, the complete upper limit arrival notification is executed. On the other hand, in the setting change operation (turning on the power with the setting key switch 218 turned on), the setting change process (shifting to the setting change mode) is executed, the complete function operation flag is set to OFF, and the stop state is released. be done.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1)
00, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, medalless slot machine), counting means (for example,
difference number counter), notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), game value (for example, game medals, game balls, virtual credits, virtual medals ), and a game value display means (for example, a medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181) capable of displaying the amount of the game value given as a result of the game. Means capable of counting an acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the amount of the game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount, wherein the value of the counting means is a first value (for example, 2400). ), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a “predetermined game state”) ends, and the notification means indicates the maximum value of the acquisition difference number and the minimum value of the acquisition difference number. (hereinafter referred to as "maximum difference number", for example, MY value) is a second value (for example, 190
00), there is a case where a notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (for example, a complete upper limit reached notification shown in FIG. 176(b)) is executed, and the game value display means If the means can display up to a third value (for example, 16383), and the maximum difference number reaches the second value before the acquired difference number reaches the third value (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "first case").

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100, pachinko machine, enclosed game machine, and medalless slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and notification means (for example, , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 272 shown in FIG.
277, various lamps), and game value display means (for example, medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181) capable of displaying the amount of game values (for example, game medals, game balls, virtual credits, virtual medals). A game machine with stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 1
39) has a first section (e.g., non-advantageous section) in which the advantageous operation mode of 39) is not reported, and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) in which the advantageous mode of operation of the stop operation means can be reported. , when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, when a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internally won hand and the lottery is won), the transition to the second section is performed, and the second section is performed. When the end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in the number of sheets (for example, 2400 sheets) is exceeded), the second section can be ended and the transition to the first section can be performed, and the counting means is a means capable of counting the acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the amount of the game value used in the game (for example, the number of inserted medals) from the amount of the game value given as a result of the game; When the value of the counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the notifying means detects the difference between the maximum value of the acquisition difference number and the minimum value of the acquisition difference number. (Hereinafter referred to as "maximum difference number". For example, MY value) When the second value (for example, 19000) is reached, the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (for example, complete shown in FIG. 176 (b) In some cases, the game value display means sets the acquisition difference number to a third value (for example, 1638
3) when the maximum difference number reaches the second value before the acquisition difference number reaches the third value (hereinafter referred to as "first case" ) is present.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the upper limit value (
Before reaching the third value), there is a case where a notification suggesting execution of game stop is executed, so the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquisition difference number by the game value display means is reached The game can be progressed without giving the player the troublesomeness of the case, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when the value of the counting means reaches the first value, the value of the counting means is set to an initial value (for example, 0) in relation to the end of the predetermined game state, and the maximum difference When the number reaches the second value, the game stop is executed, and the notifying means pays out the game value (for example, payout by the settlement button, returns credits to one's card or chip, etc.) 176(a)), and the notification means, when the acquisition difference number reaches the third value, A notification prompting settlement (for example, a game value display upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(d)) may be executed.

If the maximum difference reaches the second value (reaches the upper limit of the complete function) after reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means, settlement is performed. Although it is prompted twice, if the maximum difference number reaches the second value first (reaches the upper limit of the complete function), the settlement is prompted only once, which is annoying to the player. You may be able to enjoy the game without

Further, at the time when the player has completed settlement of at least part of the acquisition difference, the acquisition difference is subtracted from the third value more than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference from the second value. The above-mentioned first case may occur when the value of

With such a configuration, the player can diligently check (count) the game value, and the game value display means can be used to increase the number of game values up to the second value (the upper limit of the complete function). Since the number of game values up to the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquisition difference can be increased, it is possible to settle (calculate) once when a large amount of game value is acquired. Sometimes.

Further, the notification means provides notification suggesting the possibility that the maximum difference number will reach the second value before the maximum difference number reaches the second value (for example, FIG. 176(a) Complete function advance notification shown in ) may be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to pay in advance by notifying in advance that the maximum number of differences will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching).

In addition, the notification means provides notification suggesting a possibility that the acquisition difference number will reach the third value before the acquisition difference number reaches the third value (for example, FIG. 176(c)). ) may be executed.

With such a configuration, by notifying in advance that the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means is reached (the display upper limit of the game value display means is near). ,
The player can be prompted to pay in advance.

Also, in the description above,
Count means (eg, main control unit 300) for updating a count value (eg, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display device 126, payout number display device 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a movable body (eg, shutter 163);
A game machine comprising
When the count value reaches the first value (for example, 19000), the game is stopped (for example, Yes at step S1703 in FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reached notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached the first value (for example, FIG. 188 step S1705),
The movable body may move to the initial position when the count value reaches the first value (for example, FIG. 183(c)),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it may be possible to let the user know that the game is in a stopped state by the action of the movable body.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the game stop state, there is a case where the movable body performs a predetermined action including an action of moving away from the initial position (for example, FIG. 184, FIG. 185),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to an external factor such as vibration applied to the game machine, the movable body can be moved to the initial position to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A detection means for detecting the detection piece of the movable body,
The predetermined motion is a motion in which the detection piece moves in a direction away from the detection means and then moves in a direction toward the detection means (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185).
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to an external factor such as vibration applied to the game machine, the movable body can be moved to the initial position to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A door (for example, front door 102) is provided,
The movable body is provided on the door (for example, FIG. 184),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game table, even if the movable body moves due to vibration when the door is opened and closed, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and the player can recognize that the game is in the stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means includes display means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The display means is a means capable of executing the first notification using display,
The movable body does not overlap the display area of the first notification on the display means when the predetermined action is executed from the initial position (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185). ,
A game machine characterized by:

In this game table, since the movable body and the first notification do not overlap, it is possible to reliably grasp that the game is in the stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and then the power is restored, the game stop state is maintained,
The predetermined operation is executed when power is restored (for example, FIG. 185),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, even when the power is turned on, it is possible to reliably grasp that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value reaches a second value (for example, 18500) closer to the initial value than the first value. A means for performing second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
The movable body may move to the initial position when the count value reaches the second value (for example, FIG. 183(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to recognize that the game is about to stop by the action of the movable body.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a third notification (for example, various notifications) during operation of the movable body,
The notification means is means capable of executing the third notification while the second notification is being performed and the movable body is positioned at the initial position (for example, "complete function Notification and various notifications may be performed in duplicate”),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, the fact that the game is about to stop can be made known by the third notification that does not involve the movement of the movable body.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
After the count value reaches the second value, the movable body reaches a third value closer to the initial value than the second value, and the third notification is executed. , it moves from the initial position to a position according to the third notification (for example, "If the value does not satisfy the execution condition of the complete function advance notification, the shutter 163 is restricted. It may be canceled and various notifications may be executed”),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, the fact that the game stop state is far away can be grasped by the operation of the movable body and the third notification.

Also, in the description above,
Count means (eg, main control unit 300) for updating a count value (eg, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display device 126, payout number display device 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a first operating means (e.g. a reset button);
A game machine comprising
When the count value reaches the first value (for example, 19000), the non-game stop state changes to the game stop state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reached notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached the first value (for example, FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is turned off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on while the first operation means is operated, the first process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on while the first operation means is operated, the first process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is executed not),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the first process.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first operating means is a RAM clear switch;
The first process is a RAM clear process,
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, since the RAM clear is not executed, it is possible to prevent the game stop state from being canceled by an operation other than the administrator.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on while the first operation means is operated, the notification means makes a second notification (for example, display or voice output of "reset") is executed and
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on while the first operation means is operated, the second notification is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is executed not),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the second notification.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation means (for example, a setting key switch) that cannot be operated by the player,
When the power is turned off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on while the second operation means is operated, the second process (for example, step S1013 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on while the second operation means is operated, the second process is executed.
A game machine characterized by:

This game machine accepts the second operation by the game clerk even when the game is stopped, so that the maintainability of the game machine can be improved.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value reaches a second value (for example, 18500) closer to the initial value than the first value. A means for performing three notifications (e.g., complete function advance notification),
If the power is turned off during execution of the third notification and the power is turned on while the first operation means is operated, the first process is executed (for example, No in step S1006 in FIG. 187). , Yes in step S1007, step S1009 is executed),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the third notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Count means (eg, main control unit 300) for updating a count value (eg, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display device 126, payout number display device 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a first operating means (for example, a setting key, a volume control switch);
A game machine comprising
When the count value reaches the first value (for example, 19000), the non-game stop state changes to the game stop state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reached notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached the first value (for example, FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the first operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, first processing (for example, setting value display (set value confirmation mode) by setting key switch operation, various effect settings, etc.) is executed,
When the first operation means is operated in the game stop state, the first process is not executed (for example, "various processes based on some operations should not be executed while the complete function is in operation. is also good”),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to reliably recognize that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the first process.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Display means (e.g., set value display device),
The first process is a process of executing a first display on the display means,
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, the fact that the first display is not executed allows the player to reliably recognize that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with second operation means (for example, counting button 171, lending button 707, menu operation button) that can be operated by the player,
When the second operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, a second process (eg, counting process, etc.) is executed,
When the second operation means is operated in the game stop state, the second process (for example, see the description that "while the complete function is operating, there may be a process that can be executed by operation") is executed,
A game machine characterized by:

Since this game machine accepts the second operation by the player even when the game is stopped, it may be possible to deal with the problem without calling a clerk.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A second display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) is provided,
The second display means is a means for executing a second display (for example, display by operating the count button 171 or the lending button 707) when the second operation means is operated in the game stop state. ,
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, during the first notification, the second display can be performed while the first notification is being performed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value reaches a second value (for example, 18500) closer to the initial value than the first value. A means for performing second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
When the first operation means is operated during execution of the second notification, the first process is executed,
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the second notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Sub-control means (eg, first sub-control section 400) that controls notification means (eg, effect image display device 157);
Count means (eg, main control unit 300) for updating a count value (eg, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
A game machine comprising
When the count value reaches the first value (for example, 19000), the game is stopped (for example, Yes at step S1703 in FIG. 188),
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a first command (for example, a security command) containing information indicating whether or not the game is in the stopped state to the sub control means,
The sub control means is a means for causing the notification means to execute a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reached notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the information of the first command received,
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to let the player know that the game is in the stopped state by executing the first notification.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the game stop state, the first notification is executed even if only the sub-control means recovers power (for example, "the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 Even if the power is turned on again, the complete upper limit reaching notification will be executed.”),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, even if the sub-control means is powered off, the first notification can be executed after the power is restored so that the player can know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first notification is executed based on the information of the first command regardless of the value of the count value (for example, when the complete function operates, even if the MY value is cleared by turning on the power again, the complete function The operation flag remains on, and the complete upper limit arrival notification is executed again),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, even if the value of the counting means is cleared, the first notification can be executed to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The main control means is a means capable of executing error-related processing (for example, error detection processing) even in the game stop state.
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, error processing can be executed even when the game is stopped.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value reaches a second value (for example, 18500) closer to the initial value than the first value. A means to perform a second notification (e.g., complete function pre-notification),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by:

<Operation when the harness connection status changes>
Next, an operation example when the connection state of the harness is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 195. FIG. In the following description, description of the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 66 to 167) will be omitted. In addition, regarding configurations that contradict each other between the following description and the previous embodiment, the terms and symbols used in this example shall take precedence.

Various boards are arranged inside the game machine, but since the space is limited, a plurality of boards and each operation unit are appropriately connected by harnesses. FIG. 189 shows an example of connection of boards inside the game machine. For example, the main control board 300B provided with the main control section 300 is connected to the relay board RB1 by the harness HB1, and the relay board RB1 is further connected to the lever unit 135U (with the start lever 135 mounted) and the stop lever unit 135U by the harnesses HA1 to HA5. It is connected to a button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137 to 139), a bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130 and 132, and a settlement button 134), and the like.

By using such a harness, boards and components can be efficiently arranged in a limited space, but another problem of poor connection of the harness arises. Checking for the presence or absence of poor connection in this manner requires a considerable amount of work.

In view of this point, it is possible to make it easier to check the connection status by the presence or absence of this action by causing some action to occur according to the connection status of the harness. These operation examples will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that each operation example can be employed in combination as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example of operation when the harness connection is normal]
FIG. 190(a) is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the connection state of the harness is normal. In this figure, it is assumed that the bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in this order. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout the entire operation, and the door sensor corresponding to this is in the state of detecting the closed state.

First, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. This stage is before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 are normally displayed. It has a light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED provided on the main control board 300B is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the following second mode). This lever monitor LED is in the second mode when the start lever 135 is depressed, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135 . Note that the lever monitor LED may be provided not only on the main control board 300B but also on the relay board RB1.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated and changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state, the game is started (the reels start rotating) in response to the signal of this change. At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the first display (for example, operation instruction display (navigation in the order of pressing, aim for 〇〇), indication of a small winning combination, advance notice display, etc.), and the speakers 272 and 277 start the first display. The output of one sound (effect corresponding to the first display) starts, and the various lamps 420 become the first light emission mode (effect corresponding to the first display). Also, the lever monitor LED is in a second mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the first mode).

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel is brought to a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode. there is Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel is brought into a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode. there is Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when a right stop operation is performed as a third stop operation, all reels are brought to a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display (stop result display (stop small win display, get XX cards display, XX bonus display, display after update (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)) etc.) are displayed, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emission mode (corresponding to the second display It is a production to do). Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

[Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 190(b). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 190(b), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected after the bet operation, and then left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in this order. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(b), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. This stage is before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 are normally displayed. It has a light emission mode. Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 outputs the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting the first sound, and the various lamps 420 are in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel is brought to a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode. there is Further, the lever monitor LED is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the disconnection of the lever unit harness HA1, so the second mode remains.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel is brought into a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode. there is Further, the lever monitor LED is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the disconnection of the lever unit harness HA1, so the second mode remains.

Finally, when a right stop operation is performed as a third stop operation, all reels are brought to a stopped state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 is displaying the second display, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting the second sound, and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the disconnection of the lever unit harness HA1, so the second mode remains.

In the above example, if a failure such as poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the game may be started even if the start lever 135 is not operated, and the failure may be easily noticed. In addition, even if the start lever 135 is not operated, the status of the lever monitor LED may be changed to the second mode, which may make it easier to notice the failure.

For example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is disconnected while the chance button 190 is not operated, the process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, it is not limited to the configuration relating to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation of the monitor LED for the lever can be interpreted by replacing it with the monitor for monitoring other devices.

In the above configuration, the operation in the case where the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected has been described as a configuration in which reel rotation is started. The action in case may be an action executed during a game. Also, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected is visible inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Also, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error process. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 190(c). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed. Furthermore, while the main control unit 300 is receiving a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is pressed down, the stop operation is not accepted.

In FIG. 190(c), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected after the bet operation, and then left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in this order. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(c), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. This stage is before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 are normally displayed. It has a light emission mode. Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 outputs the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting the first sound, and the various lamps 420 are in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode.

Subsequently, although stop operations are performed in the order of left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation, a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is being pressed is received due to disconnection of the lever unit harness HA1. , the stop operation is not accepted, and the corresponding reel remains rotating. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode. there is Further, the lever monitor LED is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the disconnection of the lever unit harness HA1, so the second mode remains.

In the above example, if a fault such as a connection failure occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the game may not be started even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the stop operation may not be performed in the subsequent game. may be easier to notice. In addition, even if the start lever 135 is not operated, the status of the lever monitor LED may be changed to the second mode, which may make it easier to notice the failure.

For example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is disconnected while the chance button 190 is not operated, the process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, it is not limited to the configuration relating to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation of the monitor LED for the lever can be interpreted by replacing it with the monitor for monitoring other devices.

In the above configuration, the operation in the case where the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected has been described as a configuration in which reel rotation is started. The action in case may be an action executed during a game. Also, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected is visible inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Also, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error process. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Operation example (3) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 191(a). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 191(a), it is assumed that the start lever 135 is pushed down, the betting operation is performed in that state, and then the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 191(a), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, at the timing when the lever is pressed, the required number of bets to start the game has not yet been made, so the game is not yet started (the reels are stopped), and the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background. BGM is normally output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Subsequently, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. At this time, since the start lever 135 remains in the pressed state, the main control unit 300 does not receive the signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reel stop state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because the start lever 135 is being pressed.

Subsequently, at the timing when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reel stop state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because the start lever 135 is being pressed.

[Operation example (4) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 191(b). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 191(b), it is assumed that the left stop button is pressed after the bet operation, the left stop button is released after pressing the lever, and finally the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 191(b), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. This stage is before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 are normally displayed. It has a light emission mode. Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

Subsequently, the left stop button is pressed, but since the game has not started yet, the state before the game starts (the reels are stopped) continues.

Subsequently, the start lever 135 is operated to change from the non-pressed state to the pressed state, and the main control unit 300 receives a signal of this change. However, in this example, since the signal indicating that the left stop button is in the pressed state (operating) is also received, the game does not start (the reels start rotating), and the state before the game starts (the reels stop) continues. It is configured to Note that the lever monitor LED is in the second mode because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Subsequently, the left stop button is released. At this time, although the number of bets required for the start of the game has been placed, the start lever 135 remains in the depressed state, so that the start lever 135 is depressed from the non-depressed state. The main control unit 300 does not receive the signal indicating that the state has changed. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reel stop state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because the start lever 135 is being pressed.

Subsequently, at the timing when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reel stop state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because the start lever 135 is being pressed.

[Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(a). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 192(a), operations before and after disconnection of the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 will be described. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. Note that in FIG. 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the door sensor corresponding to this is in a state of detecting the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, before the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the number of bets required to start the game has not been made, and the game is not started by lever operation (reel stop state). A normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are in a normal light emission mode. Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the third display (error display (board connection error display)), and the speakers 272 and 277 output the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display). Starting, the various lamps 420 are in the third light emission mode (effect corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode as in the case where the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected has been described. When this is done, the effect image display device 157 starts the third display (error display (board connection error display)), and the speakers 272 and 277 emit the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display). The output may be started and the various lamps 420 may be in the third light emission mode (effect corresponding to the third display). Further, for example, if a monitor LED for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or the menu button is provided, the same mode as when the harness HC1 or the harness HC2 is disconnected may be used.

[Operation example (2) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(b). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 192(b), the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected after the bet operation, and then the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. Note that in FIG. 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the door sensor corresponding to this is in a state of detecting the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, at the timing when the betting operation is performed, the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. This stage is before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 are normally displayed. It has a light emission mode. Also, the monitor LED for the lever is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 outputs the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting the first sound, and the various lamps 420 are in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300 and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the third display (error display (board connection error display)), and the speakers 272 and 277 output the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display). Starting, the various lamps 420 are in the third light emission mode (effect corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode as in the case where the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected has been described. When this is done, the effect image display device 157 starts the third display (error display (board connection error display)), and the speakers 272 and 277 emit the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display). The output may be started and the various lamps 420 may be in the third light emission mode (effect corresponding to the third display). Further, for example, if a monitor LED for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or the menu button is provided, the same mode as when the harness HC1 or the harness HC2 is disconnected may be used.

[Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 193(a). The amusement machine of this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In FIG. 193(a), from the state in which the menu display (screen for customizing effect settings) is being executed, the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected, the bet button 132 is pressed, the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected, the lever unit harness is activated. HA1 disconnected, stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected, stop buttons 137-139 all pressed, stop button unit harness HA2 connected, stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected, stop button unit harness HA2 connected, stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected, It is assumed that the operation is performed in order of the stop button unit harness HA2 connection. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 193(a), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the door sensor corresponding to this is in a state of detecting the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, the first state is during the customization of effect settings (before the game is started), the effect image display device 157 is executing the menu display, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting the menu BGM, and various lamps are displayed. 420 is a menu lighting mode.

Next, the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected, but this does not change the state. Further, when the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected while the bet button 132 is pressed, the operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective, and the number of bets necessary for starting the game is placed. Further, the operation of the bet button 132 cancels the menu display and the like, the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal lighting mode.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 outputs the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting the first sound, and the various lamps 420 are in the first light emission mode.

Subsequently, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected, but this does not change the state. Subsequently, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected while all the stop buttons 137 to 139 are kept pressed. In this case, one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can be effectively stopped (all of the stop buttons 137 to 139 at this stage) is accepted according to priority. In this example, the order of priority is left, middle, right, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is effective as the first stop operation, and the corresponding reel is stopped. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light. . In this case, a plurality of stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed when connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. If there is, the operation of that stop button is accepted, and if none of the stop buttons is pressed, no action is executed.

Subsequently, while all of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are kept depressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, operation of the middle stop button 138, which is one of the depressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can be effectively stopped (in this stage, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139). is accepted, and the corresponding reel is brought to a stopped state. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues the first display, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light. .

Subsequently, while all of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are kept depressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case also, the operation of the right stop button 139, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can be effectively stopped (only the right stop button 139 at this stage), is accepted, The corresponding reel is stopped. In addition, since all the reels are stopped, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display, the speakers 272 and 277 output the second sound, and the various lamps 420 emit the second light. form.

When the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and connected while all of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed, if there is a reel that is out of step, the stop button corresponding to that reel is disabled. Do not treat as possible for stop operation. FIG. 193(b) shows an operation example when the left reel 110 is out of step when the disconnected stop button unit harness HA2 in FIG. 193(a) is first connected. there is In this case, among the stop buttons 137 to 139, those capable of effective stop operation are the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, and the operation of one of them, the middle stop button 138, is accepted, and the corresponding reel is shown to be stopped.

In the above example, when replacing the stop button unit 136U, for example, by connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 while the stop button is being pressed, the replaced stop button unit 136U can be operated normally depending on whether or not there is an operation corresponding to this. can confirm that it is working.

In the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is described as a configuration in which the rotation of the reels is stopped during the game. Various operations can be applied. In particular, if this action is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, it may be possible to reduce the burden of maintenance work. Also, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error process. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 194(a).

In FIG. 194(a), the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected, the menu button is fully pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected, and the menu button unit It is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of disconnection of the harness HC1, connection of the menu button unit harness HC1, disconnection of the menu button unit harness HC1, and connection of the menu button unit harness HC1. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 194(a), the front door 102 is in an open state for confirming the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door opened.

First, the first state is during the customization of effect settings (before the game is started), the effect image display device 157 is executing the menu display, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting the menu BGM, and various lamps are displayed. 420 is a menu lighting mode.

Subsequently, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected, but this does not change the state. Further, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while all the menu buttons (in this case, the up, down, left, right, and enter buttons) are held down. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted in order of priority. In this example, the operation of the left button, which has the highest priority, is valid. By this operation, the effect image display device 157 displays the fourth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left, and the speakers 272 and 277 output the fourth sound (the effect corresponding to the fourth display). , various lamps 420 are in the fourth light emission mode (effect corresponding to the fourth display). Here, a plurality of menu buttons are pressed when the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected. If the menu button is not pressed, no operation is performed.

Subsequently, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and connected while all the menu buttons are kept pressed. Also in this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted in order of priority. In this example, the operation of the left button, which has the highest priority, is valid. By this operation, the effect image display device 157 displays the fifth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves further to the left, and the speakers 272 and 277 output the fifth sound (effect corresponding to the fifth display). , and the various lamps 420 are in the fifth light emission mode (effect corresponding to the fifth display).

In the above example, each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and then connected while all the menu buttons are pressed, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, becomes valid, and the menu button is activated. The screen cursor moves to the left. Regarding the movement of the cursor by this operation, there are cases of cyclic movement such that the cursor that has moved to the end appears at the opposite end, and non-cyclic movement that does not move any more once the cursor has moved to the end. be. At the right end of FIG. 194(a), it is shown that the fourth display and related effects are executed again as a result of the circular movement of the cursor by the above operation. On the other hand, FIG. 194(b) shows an example in which the cursor is non-cyclically moved by the above operation. This example differs from FIG. 194(a) only in the state on the right end, and shows that the fifth display and the effects related to this are maintained because the cursor is no longer moved by the above operation. ing.

In the above example, when replacing the menu button unit 900U, for example, by connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while the menu button is pressed, the replaced menu button unit 900U can be operated normally depending on whether or not there is an operation corresponding to this. can confirm that it is working.

In the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is the operation on the menu screen, but this operation is not limited to the operation on the menu screen, and may be the operation during the game. , various operations can be applied. In particular, if this action is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, it may be possible to reduce the burden of maintenance work. Also, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error process. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected and reconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 195(a).

In this embodiment, power to the sub control board 400B is supplied from the power supply PS via the main control board 300B and the harness HE1. When the harness HE1 is disconnected, power is not supplied to the sub-control board 400B. At this time, the electric power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is supplied, and during that time the sub-control board 400B is maintained in operation. When this power supply stops, the sub-control board 400B is in a power-off state. FIG. 195(a) shows changes from when the harness HE1 is disconnected to when the sub control board 400B is turned off during the period from timing T1 to timing T2. Although the main control board 300B is provided with a monitor LED for checking the state of power supply, the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection state of the harness HE1. The monitor LED remains lit.

After the sub-control board 400B is turned off in the above flow, when the harness HE1 is again connected, power is supplied from the power supply device PS via the harness HE1. At this time, since the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B charges again, power consumption temporarily increases by that amount. Also, along with this, the voltage on the side of the main control board 300B temporarily drops, but when it falls below the operating voltage of the main control board 300B, reset processing is executed in the main control board 300B (same as turning on the power again). . When this reset process is executed, the main control board 300B shifts to a setting confirmation mode in which the current setting values can be confirmed. Further, if the setting key provided inside the game machine is in the ON state when the reset process is executed, the game machine shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. FIG. 195(a) shows these changes after timing T2. Since the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, the monitor LED is maintained in a lighting state.

Here, the period from the disconnection of the harness HE1 to the reconnection of the harness HE1 is short. , the harness HE1 is again connected. In this case, the sub-control board 400B does not enter a power-off state (operation continues without restarting). Also, if the amount of power consumed while the harness HE1 is not connected is small, the amount of electricity stored in the electrolytic capacitor when the harness HE1 is reconnected will be small, and the voltage drop in the main control board 300B will occur. In some cases, operation continues without dropping below the operating voltage (reset processing is not executed). In FIG. 195(b), after the harness is disconnected at timing T3, the harness HE1 is connected again at timing T4 while the electric power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is being supplied. An example is shown in which both the main control board 300B and the sub control board 400B continue to operate. In this example, since the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, the power consumption will temporarily increase by that amount, and the voltage on the main control board 300B side will drop temporarily accordingly. 195(a), the amount of change is small compared to the example of FIG. 195(a). Also, unlike the example of FIG. 195(a), it is shown that the main control board 300B is not reset after timing T4.

In the above configuration, the main control board 300B can be reset by disconnecting the harness HE1, waiting for a while, and then reconnecting it. On the other hand, when the harness HE1 is brought into the disconnected state when the reset is not desired, the reset can be prevented by reconnecting immediately.

[Technical Ideas Corresponding to Embodiments Concerning Harnesses]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 189 to 195 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, start lever 135) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process may be executed ([the lever unit harness has been disconnected Operation example (1)] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

The first processing is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at a factory, replacement, cleaning, or maintenance of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade. By doing so, it can be confirmed that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, the disconnection of the first harness can be grasped by executing the first process.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is performed. is executed and
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (Refer to [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is established when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
When the second operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second operation unit is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A third operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, start lever 135) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed ([the lever unit harness is disconnected Operation example (1)] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first processing based on the operation is not being executed, the first is not executed ([Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (4)]),
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the first operation unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at a factory or replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to It can be confirmed that one operation unit is operating normally. Also, the disconnection of the first harness can be grasped by executing the first process. Further, when the first operating unit is in the operating state, the first notification is not executed even if the first harness is disconnected. You may notice that

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is performed. is executed and
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (Refer to [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is established when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
When the second operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second operation unit is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A third operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED);
a first operation unit (eg, start lever 135) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing may be executed ([Lever unit harness has been disconnected Operation example (1)] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in a different manner depending on whether the first operation unit is operated or not operated,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the light emitting means emits light in the same manner as when the first operation unit is operated ([ Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the first operation unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at a factory or replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to It can be confirmed that one operation unit is operating normally. Also, the disconnection of the first harness can be grasped by executing the first process. Also, it is possible to check the operation of the light emitting means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is performed. is executed and
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (Refer to [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is established when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
When the second operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second operation unit is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A third operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, start lever 135) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, lever unit harness HA1);
a movable body (eg, reels 110-112);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process may be executed,
The first process is a process of operating the movable body ([Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected) ]reference),
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the first operation unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at a factory or replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to It can be confirmed that one operation unit is operating normally. Also, the disconnection of the first harness can be grasped by executing the first process. Also, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is performed. is executed and
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (Refer to [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is established when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
When the second operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second operation unit is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A third operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, start lever 135) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation unit,
The first processing may be executed when the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated ([When the lever unit harness is disconnected Operation example (1)] [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]), the mode in which the first process is executed can be confirmed inside the game machine with the door open. and
The first harness is provided at a position that can be checked inside the game machine with the door open ([Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Lever unit harness Example of operation when is disconnected (2)]),
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the first operation unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at a factory or replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to It can be confirmed that one operation unit is operating normally. Also, the disconnection of the first harness can be grasped by executing the first process. In addition, the operator can easily confirm the operation of the first harness and the operation of the first process with the door open.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is performed. is executed and
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (Refer to [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is established when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with a second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
When the second operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second operation unit is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A third operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B);
a first operation unit (eg, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (for example, left stop button 137 and middle stop button 138, left direction button and up direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110 and moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, middle reel 111 stop, cursor upward movement) may be executed by the operation of the second operation unit,
The first process may be executed when the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is being operated,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, the first processing and the second processing Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or at the time of replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. operation unit is operating normally. Further, when the second process is executed without executing the first process, the disconnection of the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is not executed,
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When a plurality of harnesses are disconnected Example of operation] [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first processing is not executed when the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is not operated;
If the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second processing is not executed ([when a plurality of harnesses are disconnected Example of operation] [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation section (eg, right stop button 139, right direction button),
A third process (for example, stopping the right reel 112 and moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the second operation section and the third operation section are being operated, Only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, when the first operation unit is replaced, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state in a state in which a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is established and both the first operation section and the second operation section are operated. Then, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness is switched from the disconnected state to the connected state in a state where a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first operation section and the second operation section are operated, the first One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is connected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operation portion (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operation portion belonging to the first operation unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined operation unit is operated when the first harness is in a connected state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., lever unit 135U) having an operation unit and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, left direction button and up direction button),
A first process (for example, cursor left movement) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, cursor upward movement) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
The first process may be executed when the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is being operated,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, the first processing and the second processing There is a case where only the first process of is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, and in the situation where the first case occurs again, the output result of the first processing in the first case and the , the output result of the first process in the later first case may be different ([Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or at the time of replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. operation unit is operating normally. Further, when the second process is executed without executing the first process, the disconnection of the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed. The operation of the first operation unit can also be confirmed by the fact that the output results of the first processing are different.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is not executed,
If the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When the menu button harness is disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first processing is not executed when the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is not operated;
If the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When the menu button harness is disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation part (for example, right direction button),
A third process (for example, cursor right movement) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the second operation section and the third operation section are being operated, Only the second process of may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, when the first operation unit is replaced, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the description above,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (eg, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first substrate via a first harness (eg, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, left direction button and up direction button),
A first process (for example, cursor left movement) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, cursor upward movement) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
The first process may be executed when the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is being operated,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the first operation section and the second operation section are being operated (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). , only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, and in the situation where the first case occurs again, the first process is executed in the previous first case. , in the first case described later, the first process may not be executed ([Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], see FIG. 194(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or at the time of replacement of the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first processing is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. operation unit is operating normally. Further, when the second process is executed without executing the first process, the disconnection of the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by the operation when the first process is executed and when it is not executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the first operation unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first processing is not executed,
If the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When the menu button harness is disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first processing is not executed when the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first operation unit is not operated;
If the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When the menu button harness is disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation part (for example, right direction button),
A third process (for example, cursor right movement) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the second operation section and the third operation section are being operated, Only the second process of may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, when the first operation unit is replaced, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the description above,
a first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (eg, left stop button 137) for stopping rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (eg, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
A stop button unit (e.g., stop button) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first substrate via a first harness (e.g., stop button unit harness HA2) unit 136U); and
A game machine comprising
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first processing and the second processing There is a case where only the first process of is executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
After the first case, when the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are being operated, the first processing is performed. and only the second process of the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the stop button unit is connected during the pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the stop button unit is replaced at the amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to ensure that the stop button unit is functioning normally. can confirm that it is working. Further, when the second process is executed without executing the first process, the disconnection of the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Also, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by stopping the reel.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the stop button unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When multiple harnesses are disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is not executed when the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first stop button is not operated,
If the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When multiple harnesses are disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first harness is changed from the unconnected state to the connected state in a state in which a certain condition (for example, reel rotation state) is established and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. Then, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state in a state where a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is connected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating portion (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating portion belonging to the stop button unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined operation unit is operated when the first harness is in a connected state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., lever unit 135U) having an operation unit and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (eg, left stop button 137) for stopping rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (eg, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
A stop button unit (e.g., stop button) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first substrate via a first harness (e.g., stop button unit harness HA2) unit 136U); and
A game machine comprising
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed,
The first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first reel is not out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. Then, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when a plurality of harnesses are disconnected]),
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first reel is out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, Only the second process out of the first process and the second process may be executed ([Example of operation when a plurality of harnesses are disconnected], see FIG. 193(b)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

When the first harness of the stop button unit is connected during the pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the stop button unit is replaced at the amusement arcade, the first processing is executed to ensure that the stop button unit is functioning normally. can confirm that it is working. Further, when the second process is executed without executing the first process, the disconnection of the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Also, by stopping the reel, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit and the state of the reel.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm the operation of the stop button unit depending on whether or not the first process that may be executed during the game is executed.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
If the first harness is changed from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When multiple harnesses are disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first process is not executed when the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state while the first stop button is not operated,
If the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([When multiple harnesses are disconnected operation example]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, since the first processing may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the first operation unit.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first harness is changed from the unconnected state to the connected state in a state in which a certain condition (for example, reel rotation state) is established and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. Then, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness is changed from the disconnected state to the connected state in a state where a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is connected.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating portion (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating portion belonging to the stop button unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined operation unit is operated when the first harness is in a connected state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a second board (eg, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (eg, harness HB1);
and a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is means for executing connection error notification (for example, third display) when the second harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state ([main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, the presence or absence of the connection state of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by notification by the notification means.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., lever unit 135U) having an operation unit and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first control board (for example, main control board 300B);
a second control board (for example, a sub-control board 400B);
A game machine comprising
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (for example, harness HE1),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first control board may be reset ( [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

During pre-shipment inspection at a factory or parts replacement at an amusement arcade, resetting the first control board when the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state allows the first control board to function normally. can be operated.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first control board includes light emitting means (e.g., monitor LED),
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it can be confirmed that the first control board is in the activated state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs in the state where the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light ([Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected ]reference),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an energized state even when it is reset.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Before the first time (for example, the time when the amount of electricity stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) after the first case has occurred, the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the description above,
A first control board (eg, main control board 300B) having predetermined operation means (eg, setting keys) and controlling the progress of the game;
a second control board (for example, a sub-control board 400B);
A game machine comprising
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (for example, harness HE1),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first control board may be reset ( [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]),
After the first case, when the first harness is changed from the non-connected state to the connected state while the predetermined operation means is operated, the first control board is adapted to operate the predetermined operation means. (For example, setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

During pre-shipment inspection at a factory or parts replacement at an amusement arcade, resetting the first control board when the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state allows the first control board to function normally. can be operated. Further, it is possible to shift to a state based on the operation of the predetermined operating means while the game machine is in the energized state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first control board includes light emitting means (e.g., monitor LED),
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it can be confirmed that the first control board is in the activated state.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs in the state where the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light ([Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected ]reference),
A game machine characterized by:

With this game machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an energized state even when it is reset.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Before the first time (for example, the time when the amount of electricity stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) after the first case has occurred, the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

<Configuration related to cooling inside the game table>
Next, an example of a configuration for discharging the heat inside the game machine to the outside and cooling it will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 201. FIG. In the following description, the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32) are assigned the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, regarding configurations that contradict each other between the following description and the previous embodiment, the terms and symbols used in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 196 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

In this figure, a cooling fan 950 is provided above the front door 102 . A plurality of through-holes (hereinafter referred to as upper through-holes 242H1 and lower through-holes 242H2, respectively) are formed in the upper and lower portions of the back plate. The cooling fan 950 is for cooling the VDP 534 of the second sub-controller 500 provided on the front door 102, and is also used to cool the main controller 300 provided inside the main body 101. . Upper through-hole 242H1 and lower through-hole 242H2 serve as an air inlet and an air outlet when cooling fan 950 is in operation.

The configuration of the cooling fan 950 for heat radiation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 197 and 198. FIG. FIG. 197 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the lateral direction, and FIG. 198 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the sub board case 500a and the main board case 300a. In these figures, the arrows indicate the flow of air when the cooling fan 950 operates.

The flow of air will be described in order. First, air flows from the outside to the inside of the slot machine 100 through the lower through-hole 242H2. Then, the inflowing air reaches the front door 102 through the sides of the hopper unit 180 and the like, and rises from there toward the cooling fan 950 above. At this time, it passes by the side of the intermediate board RB1 and further flows into the sub-board case 500a arranged above the reel unit 109. As shown in FIG.

Sub-board case 500a accommodates boards 400B and 500B of first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, and these boards are fixed to sub-board case 500a by screws 500b. there is In addition, the heat sink 950c for improving the cooling efficiency of VDP534 is attached to the 2nd sub-control board 500B. The cooling fan 950 is fixed to the sub-board case 500a with screws 950b. This cooling fan 950 is provided at a position not facing the VDP 534 .

Intake ports 500H2 are formed in the upper and lower portions of the sub board case 500a, and an exhaust port 500H1 is formed in a direction facing the main board case 300a. The air that has flowed in from the lower through-hole 242H2 flows into the sub-board case 500a through the air inlet 500H2, and is discharged from the air outlet 500H1 toward the main board case 300a by the operation of the cooling fan 950. FIG. This operation cools the sub-control boards 400B and 500B (including the VDP 534) inside the sub-board case 500a.

The air discharged from the sub board case 500a by the cooling fan 950 hits the main board case 300a housing the board 300B of the main control section 300, flows along its surface, and is discharged from the upper through hole 242H1. That is, the operation of the cooling fan 950 cools the main control board 300B inside the main board case 300a.

Due to the above air flow, each device inside the slot machine 100 such as the intermediate board RB1, the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, the main control board 300B, etc. is cooled. In the above example, the configuration using the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B has been described, but the above-mentioned boards are not limited, and a board that requires cooling. Various substrates can be employed. In addition, in the first board case (main controller number 300B in the above example) on the side directly exposed to the air of the cooling fan 950, the dust adhering to the first board case is blown off and the inside of the first board case is cleaned. visibility of the first substrate can be enhanced. In addition, since the cooling of the first substrate can be performed without providing the first substrate case, the configuration of the first substrate case can be simplified and the visibility can be improved in some cases.

If the air volume of the cooling fan 950 is small and the air is not discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 from the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. For this reason, the air volume of the cooling fan 950 must be at least such that the air can be discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 from the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. Thereby, the inside can be cooled by generating the air flow as described above.

Since the cooling fan 950 described above is provided on the front door 102, for example, when the front door 102 is opened for maintenance, the air from the cooling fan 950 flows toward the worker SM as shown in FIG. Since the air is blown, the worker SM can comfortably perform the maintenance work.

[Technical Ideas Corresponding to Embodiments Concerning Cooling Inside the Game Machine]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 196 to 201 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
a first board (eg, main control board 300B);
a second board (for example, a second sub-control board 500B);
a cooling fan (eg, cooling fan 950) for cooling the second substrate;
A game machine comprising
The blowing direction of the cooling fan may be directed toward the first substrate (see, for example, FIG. 197),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game table, the visibility of the first substrate is improved by removing dust adhering to the periphery of the first substrate, and the cooling of the first substrate is performed without providing the first substrate case. In some cases, visibility can be improved by simplifying the configuration around the first substrate.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first board is provided on the main body side of the gaming machine,
The second board and the cooling fan are provided on the door side of the game table,
in a state in which the door is closed, the air blowing direction of the cooling fan is directed toward the first substrate;
When the door is opened up to a certain position, the direction of blowing air from the cooling fan is not directed toward the first substrate (see, for example, FIGS. 197 and 201),
A game machine characterized by:

In this amusement machine, when the door is open, the wind from the fan does not go to the first board, but to the operator who opened the door, so maintenance work can be carried out comfortably.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the second board has a processor (e.g., VDP 534) that controls the operation of the second board;
The cooling fan is provided at a position different from the position facing the processor (see, for example, FIG. 198),
A game machine characterized by:

With this gaming machine, visibility around the processor can be enhanced.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A reel unit (for example, reel unit 109) is provided,
The gaming table has a first opening (eg, upper through-hole 242H1) formed above the reel unit, and a second opening (eg, lower through-hole 242H2) below the reel unit. and
When the cooling fan operates with the door closed, the air taken into the gaming machine through the second opening is discharged from the first opening via the cooling fan ( For example, see FIG. 197),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, the air sucked from the second opening passes through the periphery of the reel unit and is discharged from the first opening after heading for the first board, so dust around the first board and damage to the main body Internal heat can be discharged to the outside of the main body without causing convection inside the main body.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A reel unit (for example, reel unit 109) is provided,
The cooling fan is positioned above the reel unit when the door is closed (see, for example, FIG. 197),
A game machine characterized by:

In this game machine, the heat generated by the operation of the reel unit can be discharged to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the amusement machine according to the present invention comprises a shooting device for shooting a ball into a predetermined game area, a winning opening configured to allow the ball fired from the shooting device to enter, and a ball entering the winning opening. Equipped with a detection means for detecting, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects the ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (identification information), a game ball enters a winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device stops displaying after changing the pattern to notify the transition of the game state.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured on a single chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be integrated into one chip.
The secondary control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main controller and the first sub-controller, the communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be one-way communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 symbol display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device

Claims (4)

a first control board;
a second control board;
A game machine comprising
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first control board may be reset.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The first control board comprises light emitting means,
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 2,
Even if the second case occurs in a state where the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
If the first harness changes from the disconnected state to the connected state before the first time elapses after the first case, the first control board is not reset.
A playground characterized by:

Images